HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D07-432 - WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER MALL - SEARS - 2ND LEVEL ENTRIESSEARS
301 SOUTHCENTER MALL
D07 -432
Citf Tukwila
Parcel No.: 5379200330
Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW
Suite No:
Tenant:
Name: SEARS
Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL , TUKWILA WA
Owner:
Name: WEA SOUTHCENTER LLC
Address: 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD , LOS ANGELES CA 90025
Phone:
Contact Person:
Name: MILTON LANSER
Address: 4582 S ULSTER ST PY, STE 1501 , DENVER CO 80237
Phone: 303 741 -3737 X 285
Contractor:
Name: B N BUILDERS INC
Address: 2601 4 AV STE 350 , SEATTLE WA 98121
Phone: 206 718 -0960
Contractor License No: BNBUII *990K3
doc: IBC -10/06
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
DEVELOPMENT PERMIT
* *continued on next page **
Permit Number: D07 - 432
Issue Date: 03/26/2008
Permit Expires On: 09/22/2008
Expiration Date: 09/12/2009
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
ALTERATION TO ADD NEW 2ND LEVEL EXTERIOR ENTRY (FROM BRIDGE TO PARKING GARAGE) AND NEW 2ND LEVEL
MALL ENTRY (FROM NEW MALL BUILDING AREA) AND ASSOCIATED INTERIOR MODIFICATIONS AND FINISHES
Value of Construction: $100,000.00 Fees Collected: $2,037.27
Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS /AFA International Building Code Edition: 2006
Type of Construction: ILA Occupancy per IBC: 0019
D07 -432 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
Public Works Activities:
Channelization / Striping: N
Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N
City oTukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
Permit Number: D07 -432
Issue Date: 03/26/2008
Permit Expires On: 09/22/2008
Fire Loop Hydrant: N Number: 0 Size (Inches): 0
Flood Control Zone:
Hauling: N Start Time: End 'rime:
Land Altering: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y.
Landscape Irrigation:
Moving Oversize Load: Start Time: End Time:
Sanitary Side Sewer:
Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public:
Storm Drainage:
Street Use: Profit: N Non - Profit: N
Water Main Extension: Private: Public:
Water Meter: N
Permit Center Authorized Signature: � / - Date: � V e
I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances
governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not.
The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating
construction or the pe nuance of rk. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit.
Signature: Date: 3/z G /
o
Print Name:
This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended
or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection.
doc: IBC -10/06
/KA
D07 -432 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
Parcel No.: 5379200330
Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW
Suite No:
Tenant: SEARS
1: ** *BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * **
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
PERMIT CONDITIONS
Permit Number: D07 - 432
Status: ISSUED
Applied Date: 11/27/2007
Issue Date: 03/26/2008
2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the
Building Official.
3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center
(206/431- 3670).
4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to
start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is
granted.
5: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non - building structures seismic design
requirements of ASCE 7.
6: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced
to the building structure.
7: All construction shall be done m conformance with the approved plans and the requirements of the International
Building Code or International Residential Code, International Mechanical Code, Washington State Energy Code.
8: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building
Department (206 - 431 - 3670).
9: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of,
any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits
presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila
shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the
Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data.
10: ** *FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS * **
11: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the
following concerns:
12: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
(IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2)
13: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle
is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10)
14: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the
International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC
1008.1.8.1)
15: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10)
doc: Cond -10/06
D07 -432 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
16: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress
travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress
travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access
corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the
nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1)
17: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with
the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having
a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be
less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire
Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high
contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not
energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction
cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.5.1)
18: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90
minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system
provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2, 1006.3)
19: Means of egress, including the exit discharge, shall be illuminated at all times the building space served by the means
of egress is occupied. The means of egress illumination level shall not be less than 1 foot -candle (11 lux) at the
floor level. The power supply for the means of egress illumination shall normally be provided by the premise's
electrical supply. In event of a power failure an emergency power system shall provide power for a duration of not less
than 90 minutes and shall consist of storage batteries, unit equipment or on -site generator. (IFC 1006.1, 1006.2,
1006.3)
20: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the
aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4)
21: Maintain sprinlder coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition/relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating
and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4)
22: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate
flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13- 8.6.5.3.3)
23: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and
approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinlder systems and all modifications to sprinkler
systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk
Insurers Kemper or any other representative designated and/or recognized by the City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to
the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #2050)
24: Maintain fire alarm system audible /visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require
relocation and/or addition of audible /visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2051)
25: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire
Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2051) (IFC
104.2)
26: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70)
27: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2050 and
#2051)
28: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of
doc: Cond -10/06 007 -432 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
such condition or violation.
City of Tukwila
doc: Cond -10/06
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
29: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at
(206)575 -4407.
* *continued on next page **
D07 - 432 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
City of Tukwila
I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing
this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not.
The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating
construction or the performance of work.
Signature:
Print Name:
doc: Cond -10/06
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
P nrtsr9-
Date: ?/ `�' ` 0 E
007 -432 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
ftive
CITY OF TUKWILA
Community Development Department
Public Works Department
Permit Center
6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100
Tukwila, WA 98188
http://www. ci. tzrinvila. w a. its
. 4&
Building Permit No.
Mechanical Permit No
Plumbing/Gas Permit No.
Public Works Permit No
Project No. 1
(For office use only)
Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review.
Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax.
* *Please Print **
King Co Assessor's Tax No.: S 37 '7 D' 0330
<OVTK CE nt1z 2. M A I t— Suite Number: ht
Site Address:
Tenant Name: N P
Property Owners Name: 2 S�-rA 1LS Q.og�t; Co
Mailing Address: 3333 REVE1Zt -Lt h✓0 t+ �� 4
New Tenant: ❑ Yes
140 FF /y! Ar/ ES 1'
City State
Floor: OA.
TL Co/7
Zip
CONTACT PERSON - who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued
Name: 01 t I c-i to LA - Srt2— Day Telephone: (3 741'3"1 ( a $
Mailing Address: 4S S Vu T ST R4. SITi l SOI OEN VE2- (p
60'217
City State Zip
Fax Number:(72 ,) ya`7 - It: e s
E -Mail Address: P1 U 1e S-a rn l r` o .• Co rr,
GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION —
(Contractor Information for Mechanical (pg 4) for Plumbing and Gas Piping (pg 5))
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
City
Day Telephone:
Fax Number:
State
Contact Person:
E -Mail Address:
Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date:
ARCHITECT OF RECORD - All plans must be wet stamped by Architect of Record
Company Name: S, A. m l ao / i [;nor (iytq -F
Mailing Address: 4c132 S. 0,...carE tt ST PA-12-1c.44.44 S 101 Oer, -t c
City State
Contact Person: IY) I (r'N L A-N S F;(
E -Mail Address: YYl) 0 SA PI re' • Corn
Contact Person:
Zip
�0
Zip
Day Telephone: RA — 741 M.& ' an -
Fax Number: (12.a) 401 —lc, vc"
ENGINEER OF RECORD - All plans must be wet stamped by Engineer of Record
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
Coy
Day Telephone:
E -Mail Address: Fax Number:
Q: Applications\Porms- Applications On Line '3-2006 - Permit Application. doc
Revised: 9-2006
bh
State
Zip
Page 1 of 6
BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION - 206 - 431 -3670
Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 100 000 -00 eCT Existing Building Valuation: $ N
Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): A L-TV RA-Tto.J fib Apo l'lruv 2Np LF1lr t--
V>crr& Epavi caw., aYUbyr - lb PIt}YLIL, GM'sy 4, A/ t 2N p L��r
v n Ac.t. F r t 7 1 2 y f �i7orti i\J i WI At.._ � ruu4.) A I Se , ci A7 , l r j7WY . Jai
vnoptF1 Tur-4t' 4.,i ri j1 S�tI�. f
Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes
Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below
PLANNING DIVISION:
Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches)
*For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following:
Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling:
*Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence.
Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard:
Will there be a change in use?
❑ Yes
Q: \Applications\Forms- Applications On Line 3.2006 - Permit Application.doc
Revised, 9 -2006
bh
El.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required.
Compact: Handicap:
No If "yes ", explain:
FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS:
74 Sprinklers /4 Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify)
Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes No
If 'yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets.
SEPTIC SYSTEM
❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health
Department.
Page 2 of 6
Existing
Interior Remodel
Addition to
Existing
Structure
New
Type of
Construction per
IBC ''
Type of
Occupancy per 'q
IBC
1 Floor
5 9
1
0
1 A
m i s -)
2 Floor
5 61 e
1200
0
46
lc 4
MI -I
3"' Floor
SS; .1c3
0.
65
0
tr A
mIS -1
Floors thru
k l
/ 7� K
Basement
Accessory Structure*
Attached Garage
Detached Garage
Attached Carport
Detached Carport
Covered Deck
Uncovered Deck
BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION - 206 - 431 -3670
Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 100 000 -00 eCT Existing Building Valuation: $ N
Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): A L-TV RA-Tto.J fib Apo l'lruv 2Np LF1lr t--
V>crr& Epavi caw., aYUbyr - lb PIt}YLIL, GM'sy 4, A/ t 2N p L��r
v n Ac.t. F r t 7 1 2 y f �i7orti i\J i WI At.._ � ruu4.) A I Se , ci A7 , l r j7WY . Jai
vnoptF1 Tur-4t' 4.,i ri j1 S�tI�. f
Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes
Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below
PLANNING DIVISION:
Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches)
*For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following:
Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling:
*Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence.
Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard:
Will there be a change in use?
❑ Yes
Q: \Applications\Forms- Applications On Line 3.2006 - Permit Application.doc
Revised, 9 -2006
bh
El.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required.
Compact: Handicap:
No If "yes ", explain:
FIRE PROTECTION /HAZARDOUS MATERIALS:
74 Sprinklers /4 Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None ❑ Other (specify)
Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ Yes No
If 'yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets.
SEPTIC SYSTEM
❑ On -site Septic System — For on -site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health
Department.
Page 2 of 6
Unit Type:
Qty
Unit Type:
Qty
Unit Type:
Qty
Boiler /Compressor:
Qty
Furnace <100K BTU
Air Handling Unit >10,000
CFM
Fire Damper
0 -3 HP /100,000 BTU
Furnace >100K BTU
Evaporator Cooler
Diffuser
Z-
3 -15 HP /500,000 BTU
Floor Furnace
Ventilation Fan Connected
to Single Duct
Thermostat
15 -30 HP /1,000,000 BTU
Suspended/Wall /Floor
Mounted Heater Cr—AU-416
o
$
Ventilation System
Wood/Gas Stove
30 -50 HP /1,750,000 BTU
Appliance Vent
Hood and Duct
Emergency
Generator
50+ HP /1,750,000 BTU
Repair or Addition to
Heat/Refrig/Cooling
System
Incinerator - Domestic
Other Mechanical
Equipment
Air Handling Unit
<10,000 CFM
Incinerator - Comm/1nd
MECHANICAL PERMIT INFORMATION - 206- 431 -3670
MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION
Company Name:
Mailing Address:
City State Zip
Day Telephone: d) `741-' 73 7
Fax Number: 67 ?.G) 46 �✓
Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date:
Contact Person: " 1 1(. IDN
E -Mail Address: Ill 1 S 15 011 ro Lor
Valuation of Mechanical work (contractor's bid price): $ s (700. 0 0 EST
Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): 69nwN6fxzON OF' Two 1-& /L /r t Qi v.s r-/1 -s(4
' Tb Ex iciius 00 (.rwoe.k_ Two AfriA) g-c.� -a'IUC £C�/.-/#J5 Ina
RYm EI S Krz I cii:Gtar.4v L-a.11 ecr pio . e
Use: Residential: New .... ❑ Replacement .... ❑
Commercial: New .... Replacement .... ❑
Fuel Type: Electric ❑ Gas .... Other:
Indicate type of mechanical work being installed and the quantity below:
Q: W pplications\Forms- Applications On Line3.2006 - Permit Application.doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
Page 4 of 6
PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Applicable to all permits in this application
Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject
to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules.
Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation.
Signatur
Print Name:
Building and Mechanical Permit
The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be
requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition).
Plumbing Permit
The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. The extension shall be requested
in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 103.4.3 Uniform Plumbing Code (current edition).
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER
PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT.
BUILDING 0 %I Si .- HORIZED A NT:
Day Telephone: (3o3) 14) 3737 kz 8 S
Mailing Address:46 S ULsiYiie J Su L Sol Ogha (Z Co 3p237
IYILTow LA- rnlS'�ziZ
Date Application Expires:
Date Application Accepted:
tt 17,11 01-
Q \Applications \Forms - Applications On Line 3.2006 - Permit Application. doc
Revised: 9 -2006
bh
Date: Vcg/A7
City State Zip
Staff Initials•
Page 6 of 6
i
Payee: MARK RONISE
ACCOUNT ITEM LIST:
Description
PLAN CHECK - NONRES
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
Parcel No.: 5379200330 Permit Number: D07 -432
Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: ISSUED
Suite No: Applied Date: 11/27/2007
Applicant: SEARS Issue Date: 03/26/2008
Receipt No.: R08 -01106 Payment Amount: $58.00
Initials: JEM Payment Date: 04/09/2008 01:05 PM
User ID: 1165 Balance: $0.00
TRANSACTION LIST:
Type Method Descriptio Amount
Payment Check 2031 58.00
RECEIPT
Account Code Current Pmts
000/345.830 58.00
Total: $58.00
hr2 O2 ?711 TOTAL 6
doc: Recefot -06 Printed: 04 -09 -2008
Receipt No.: R08 -00918
Payee: BN BUILDERS
ACCOUNT ITEM LIST:
Description
BUILDING - NONRES
PLAN CHECK - NONRES
STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
RECEIPT
Parcel No.: 5379200330 Permit Number: D07 -432
Address: 301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: APPROVED
Suite No: Applied Date: 11/27/2007
Applicant: SEARS Issue Date:
Initials WER Payment Date: 03/26/2008 02:13 PM
User ID: 1655 Balance: $0.00
TRANSACTION LIST:
Type Method Descriptio Amount
Payment Check 32780 1,312.93
Account Code Current Pmts
000/322.100
000/345.830
000/386.904
Payment Amount: $1,312.93
1,231.98
76.45
4.50
Total: $1,312.93
043e 03,26 2711 TOTAL 1.342.93
doc: Receiot -06 Printed: 03 -26 -2008
Don: RECSETS -06
RECEIPT NO: R07 -02583
Initials: JEM
User ID: 1165
Payee: S.A. MIRO, INC.
SET ID: S000000901
SET TRANSACTIONS:
Set Member Amount
724.34
07 -715 82.00
TOTAL: 806.34
TRANSACTION LIST:
Type Method Description Amount
Payment Check 32210 806.34
TOTAL: 806.34
ACCOUNT ITEM LIST:
Description
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 -431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: //www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
ELECTRICAL PLAN - NONRES
PLAN CHECK - NONRES
SET RECEIPT
Payment Date: 11/27/2007
Total Payment: 806.34
SET NAME: Tmp set/Initialized Activities
Account Code Current Pmts
000.345.832.00.0 82.00
000/345.830 724.34
TOTAL: 806.34
5397 11/27 9710 TOTAL 806.34E
Project•
Type of tction:
fre'4
� (4
/ C Iled:
/
I
.?
Date Wanted:
c ,2— .2L/..,.
. pfi`
Requester:
4 . e w . /
Phone No
_
COMMENTS:
/
.?
2
/4' e / rc7i- ik
c(-09 J
r`/ #11.c7
4 . e w . /
—
_
L... / i - / ...
/ a v_
Inspector:
fd -fist....
l 7f
w Je'. _
Date: /
1 y .
INSPECTION NO.
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188
PERMIT NO.
(206)431 -3670
`.Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval.
0 REINSPECTION FEE IEGUIOD. Prior to inspection, fee must be
id at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Sifite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
Receipt No.: 'Date:
COMMENTS:
Type of Ins ction:
t`. t.',` iiifi s,S r ",- 7/f_.. r 6 ;' " „t
Address: 1
() Sn i! ! 4fr"c” -cr-
r
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted: /
.,3 t / ,9 / 4 5 j - p.
m
Requester:
Phone No:
Project
Type of Ins ction:
Address: 1
() Sn i! ! 4fr"c” -cr-
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted: /
.,3 t / ,9 / 4 5 j - p.
m
Requester:
Phone No:
INSPECTION NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670
Approved per applicable codes. ' a Corrections required prior to approval.
Inspec
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
Date:
t D
(Receipt No.: 'Date:
PERMIT NO.
.00 REINSPECTION FEE ,REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
aid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
Project:
5fa r5
Type of Inspection:
Rhi
Address:
)?j ri it
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date Wanted: --7_ L °
a.m.
p.m.
Requester:
Phone No:
a
INSPECTION NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION P-
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3
El Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS:
\ /L 17- A fr t t/ iZ� rr�/ 4 of ; /
Inspector:
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
[732 Lt
PERMIT NO.
(Date: /_
EJ $60.00 RFISPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be
paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection.
'Receipt No.:
'Date:
Projes
Type of Inspection:
1
Address:
..?C / /n0
Date Called:
Special Instructions:
Date lei d: 1 ,/ i ddiro
4 C--
Requester:
Phone No:
O 4 -9/-
9.,
INSPECTION RECORD . 1
d7 Retain a copy with permit
PERMIT NO.
CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION
6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431-3670
INSPECTION NO.
El Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS: po
be"; II 14 1-1P So I dr
5 e40 yert hide
4„g
rate:44/6Y
El $58. EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection. fee must be
paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection.
'Receipt No.:
'Date:
Project: Sere,
_
1 I
Type of Inspection:
:t44C./ SPa 1 riv LOL
Address: 301 5(
Suite #:
/1l
Contact Person:
S Z-UL
Special Instructions:
Occupancy Type:
Phone No.:
70(v- `fail - `��
0
Needs Shift Inspection:
Sprinklers:
Fire Alarm:
Hood & Duct:
Monitor:
Pre -Fire:
Permits:
Occupancy Type:
INSPECTION NUMBER
INSPECTION RECORD
Retain a copy with permit
CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT
Doi -y32 -
PERMIT NUMBERS
444 Andover Park East Tukwila Wa. 98188 206 - 575 -
proved per applicable codes.
n Corrections required prior to approval.
COMMENTS:
SPk N. L - CH
-l-t 4 t-t 1 -
1 — ; pector: � /S 1 2_ I Date: 8 Hrs.:
$80.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from
/64 City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection.
Word /Inspection Record Form.Doc
1/13/06
T.F.D. Form F.P. 113
Cc:
& ASSOCIATES INC.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING • ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
CONSTRUCTION TESTING & INSPECTION
February 24, 2009 KA Project No. 066 -06316
4 �' • , 5 `' ` Permit No 07 -432
CITY OF TUKWILA
ATTN: BUILDING DEPARTMENT
6300 SOUTHCENTER BLVD
TUKWILA, WA 98188
To Whom It May Concern:
FEB 21 ROT
COMMUNTP
OEVELOPti
RE: Final Letter Regarding: Westfield Mall Expansion / Entrance to Existing Sears
633 Southcenter Blvd.
Seattle, WA
In accordance with your request and authorization, we have performed special testing and inspection
services for the above referenced project. The special inspections for this project were:
• Epoxy
To the best of our knowledge, all work which has been tested and/or inspected has been found to be in
general accordance with the approved plans and specifications, engineering revisions, and Chapter 17 of
the 2006 International Building Code.
If you have any questions or if we can be of further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact our office
at (253) 939 -2500.
Respectfully submitted,
KRAZAN & ASSOCIATES, INC.
6,0er7t—
Kathryn E. Gordon
Project Manager
Puyallup Division
Westfield Corp.
ANF & Assoc.
Bayley Const.
SAK
With Offices Serving The Western United States
922 — Valley Avenue NW Suite 101 • Puyallup, WA 98371 • (253) 939 -2500 • Fax: (253) 939 -2556
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Project Summary
PRJ-SUM
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Info
Project Address
Sears Mall Store
400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Applicant Name: Milton Lanser / S. A. Miro, Inc.
figOiCSDOIWRireSS: 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 80237
Applicant Phone: (303) 741-3737
Date
11/17/2007
For Building Department Use
FILE COPY
Permit No.
Piar rcv:ay• ETTINNalisSubjecttoerronsantiorn'.ssti277.:.
■ :-" cr
C
r -
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKVVILA
NOV 27 2007
1/4:EIJI Eh
Revised July 2007
VT+
wwuun
(floor /room no.) Occupancy Description
Allowed
Watts per per fl 2 k
Area in tt 2
Allowed x Area
New Mall Entry Retail
New Exterior
1.20
350.0
420.0
Entry Retail
1.50
630.0
945.0
"'
6
101.0
606.0
From Table 15-1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts
1365.0
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Interior Lighting Summary
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
LTG -INT
Project Info
Project Address Soars Mall Store
400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Applicant Name:
Milton Langer / S. A. Miro, Inc.
ApplicantAddress: 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 80237
Applicant Phone: (303) 741 -3737
Date
11/21/2007
For Building Department Use
Project Description
ID New Building ❑ Addition
Plans Induced
Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans.
Alteration
'Compliance Option
1 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis
(See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.)
Alteration Exceptions
(check appropriate box - sec 1132.3)
12
El
No changes are being made to the lighting
Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage
oposec! Lighting Wattage
•
1. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, Tamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if
included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, Tamp, and ballast information.
2. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and
other criteria as specified in Section 1530. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual
may also be used. For track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable,
the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer.
3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, note section and exception number, and leave Watts/Fixture blank.
Revised July 2007
Location
(floor /room no.)
Fixture Description
Number of
Fixtures
Watts/
Fixture
Watts
Proposed
New Mall Entry
New Exterior
Type 8 Compact Fluorescent
7
58.0
406.0
Entry
Type A 2 Foot Flourenscent (Match Existing)
6
101.0
606.0
Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total
m..
m -
Proposed Watts
1012 .
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Interior Lighting Summary
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
LTG -INT
Project Info
Project Address Soars Mall Store
400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Applicant Name:
Milton Langer / S. A. Miro, Inc.
ApplicantAddress: 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 80237
Applicant Phone: (303) 741 -3737
Date
11/21/2007
For Building Department Use
Project Description
ID New Building ❑ Addition
Plans Induced
Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans.
Alteration
'Compliance Option
1 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis
(See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.)
Alteration Exceptions
(check appropriate box - sec 1132.3)
12
El
No changes are being made to the lighting
Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage
oposec! Lighting Wattage
•
1. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, Tamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if
included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, Tamp, and ballast information.
2. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and
other criteria as specified in Section 1530. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual
may also be used. For track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable,
the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer.
3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, note section and exception number, and leave Watts/Fixture blank.
Revised July 2007
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Interior Lighting Summary (back)
LTG -INT
Revised July 2007
Prescriptive Spaces
Qualification Checklist
Note: If occupancy type is "Other" and fixture
answer is checked, the number of fixtures in
the space is not limited by Code. Clearly
indicate these spaces on plans. If not
qualified, do LPA Calculations.
Occu an 0 Warehouses, storage areas or aircraft storage hangers
P cy:
O Other
1
Lighting
Fixtures:
(Section
1521)
Check if 95% or more of fixtures comply with 1,2 or 3 and rest are ballasted.
1. Fluorescent fixtures which are non - lensed with a) 1 or 2 two lamps, b) reflector
or louvers, c) 5 -60 watt T -1, T -2, T-4, T -5, T -8 lamps, and d) hard -wired elec-
tronic dimming ballasts. Screw -in compact fluorescent fixtures do not qualify.
2. Metal Halide with a) reflector b) ceramic MH lamps <= 150w c) electronic ballasts
3. LED lights.
TABLE 15 -1 Unit Lighting Power Allowance (LPA)
LPA` (W!sf)
Use'
Automotive facility
Convention center
Courthouse
Cafeterias, fast food establishments ° ,
restaurants/bars
Dormitory
Exercise center
Gymnasia", assembly spaces"
Health care clinic
Hospital, nursing homes, and other Group 1 - 1 and
1 -2 Occupancies
Hotel/motel
Hotel banquet/conference/exhibition hall
Laboratory spaces (all spaces not dassified
"laboratory" shall meet office and other appropriate
categories)
Laundries
Libraries
Manufacturing facility
Museum
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.0
2.0
1.8
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.1
Use'
Office buildings, office/administrative areas in
facilities of other use types (including but not limited
to schools, hospitals, institutions, museums, banks,
churches)
Penitentiary and other Group 1 -3 Occupancies
Police and fire stations'
Post office
Retaii retail banking, mall concourses, wholesale
stores (pallet rack shelving)
School buildings (Group E Occupancy only), school
classrooms, day care centers
Theater, motion picture
Theater, performing arts
Transportation
Warehouses ', storage areas
Workshops
Parking garages
Plans Submitted for Common Areas Only'
Main floor building lobbies' (except mall concourses)
Common areas, corridors, toilet facilities and
washrooms, elevator lobbies
LPA` (Wisf)
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.6
1.0
0.5
1.4
0.2
1.2
0.8
Footnotes for Table 15 - 1
1) In cases in which a general use and a specific use are listed, the specific use shall apply. In cases in which a use is
specifically, the Unit Power Allowance shall be determined by the building official. This determination shall be based
comparable use specified in the table. See Section 1512 for exempt areas.
2) The watts per square foot may be increased, by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twenty feet, unless spe
otherwise by subsequent footnotes.
3) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above twelve feet.
4) For all other spaces, such as seating and common areas, use the Unit Light Power Allowance for assembly.
5) Watts per square foot of room may be increased by two percent per foot of ceiling height above nine feet.
6) Reserved.
7) For conference rooms and offices less than 150ft with full height partitions, a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.10 w/ft may be used.
8) Reserved.
9) For indoor sport tournament courts with adjacent spectator seating over 5,000, the Unit Lighting Power Allowance for the court area is
2.60 W/ft
10) Display window illumination installed within 2 feet of the window, provided that the display window is separated from the retail space by
walls or at least three - quarter- height partitions (transparent or opaque). and lighting for free- standing display where the lighting moves
with the display are exempt.
An additional 1.5 w/ft of merchandise display luminaires are exempt provided that they comply with all three of the following:
a) located on ceiling - mounted track or directly on or recessed into the ceiling itself (not on the wall).
b) adjustable in both the horizontal and vertical axes (vertical axis only is acceptable for fluorescent and other fixtures with two points
of track attachment).
c) fitted with LED, tungsten halogen, fluorescent, or high intensity discharge lamps.
This additional lighting power is allowed only if the lighting is actually installed.
11) Provided that a floor plan, indicating rack location and height, is submitted, the square footage for a warehouse may be defined, for
computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance, as the floor area not covered by racks plus the vertical face area (access side only)
of the racks. The height allowance defined in footnote 2 applies only to the floor area not covered by racks.
not mentioned
upon the most
cifically directed
Tradable Locations
Description
Allowed Watts
per ft or per If
Area (ft perimeter
(10 or # of items
Allowed Watts
x ft (or x If)
Other Entries
Now Second Floor Entry 20 W /LF of door widt
24.0
480.0
170.0
❑ Exemption (list)
..
1—
Non - Tradable Locations
— _ v
Description
Allowed Watts
per ft or per If
Area (ft perimeter
(If) or # of items
Allowed Watts
x ft (or x If)
Bridge to Parking
New 70 watt MB Full Cutoff Photo cell control
2
85.0
170.0
❑ Exemption (list)
..
1—
Location
Fixture Description
Number of
Fixtures
Watts/
Fixture
Watts
Proposed
Bridge to Parking
New 70 watt MB Full Cutoff Photo cell control
2
85.0
170.0
❑ Exemption (list)
..
1—
Location
Fixture Description
Number of
Fixtures
Watts/
Fixture
Watts
Proposed
Bridge to Parking
New 70 watt MB Full Cutoff Photo cell control
2
85.0
170.0
❑ Exemption (list)
..
1—
Exterior Lighting Summary
LTG -EXT
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Info
Proj Address sears Mall Store
400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Name:
Milton Langer / S. A. Miro, Inc.
APIA Name 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 8023'
Appl. Phone (303) 741 -3737
Date
11/17/2007
For Building Department Use
Project Description
❑ New ❑ Addition El Alteration El Plans Induded
Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans.
Compliance Option
erasion 1 xceptions
(check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3)
Tradable Proposed Lighting Wattage
Non - Tradable Proposed Lighting Wattage
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
0 Lighting Power Allowance
No changes are being made to the lighting
Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Watta
❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
nor
Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage
0 Systems Analysis
Revised July 2007
otal Allowed Watts 480.0
Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only,
the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
otal Proposed Watts
170.0
1
Building Grounds
(luminaires > 100 Watts)
4 Efficacy > 60 Iumens/W
❑ Controlled by motion Sensor
❑ Exemption (list)
..
1—
Exterior Lighting Summary
LTG -EXT
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
Project Info
Proj Address sears Mall Store
400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Name:
Milton Langer / S. A. Miro, Inc.
APIA Name 4582 South Ulster Street, Ste 1501, Denver, CO 8023'
Appl. Phone (303) 741 -3737
Date
11/17/2007
For Building Department Use
Project Description
❑ New ❑ Addition El Alteration El Plans Induded
Indicate controls (Sections 1513) including commissioning requirements on plans.
Compliance Option
erasion 1 xceptions
(check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3)
Tradable Proposed Lighting Wattage
Non - Tradable Proposed Lighting Wattage
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
0 Lighting Power Allowance
No changes are being made to the lighting
Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Watta
❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed.
nor
Non - Tradable Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage
0 Systems Analysis
Revised July 2007
otal Allowed Watts 480.0
Use mfgr listed maximum input wattage. For fixtures with hard -wired ballasts only,
the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used
otal Proposed Watts
170.0
Tradable Surfaces
(Lighting power
densities for uncovered
parking areas, building
grounds, building
entrances and exits,
canopies and overhangs
and outdoor sales areas
may be traded.)
1
Uncovered Parking Areas
Parking lots and drives
1 0.15 W/ft
Building Grounds
Walkways less than 10 feet wide
1.0 W/linear foot
Walkways 10 feet wide or greater
plaza areas
Special feature areas
0.2W/ft
Stairways
1.0 W /ft
Building Entrances and Exits
Main entries
30 W/linear foot of door width
Other doors
20 W/linear foot of door width
Canopies and Overhangs
Canopies (free standing and attached and
overhangs)
1.25 W/ft
Outdoor Sales
Open areas (including vehicle sales lots)
0.5 W /ft
Street frontage for vehicle sales lots in
addition to "open area" allowance
20 W/linear foot
Non - Tradable
Surfaces (Lighting
power density
calculations for the
following applications
can be used only for the
specific application and
cannot be traded
between surfaces or
with other exterior
lighting. The following
allowances are in
addition to any
allowance otherwise
permitted in the
"Tradable Surfaces"
section of this table.)
Building Facades
0.2 W/ft for each illuminated wall or
surface or 5.0W/linear foot for each
illuminated wall or surface length
Automated teller machines and night
depositories
270 W per location plus 40 -W per
additional ATM per location
Entrances and gatehouse inspection
stations at guarded facilities
1.25 W /ft of uncovered area (covered
areas are included in the "Canopies
and Overhangs" section of "Tradable
Surfaces ")
Loading areas for law enforcement,
fire, ambulance and other emergency
service vehicles
0.5 W /ft of uncovered area (covered
areas are included in the "Canopies
and Overhangs" section of "Tradable
Surfaces ")
Material handling and associated
storage
0.5 W /ft
Drive -up windows at fast food
restaurants
400W per drive - through
Parking near 24 -hour retail entrances
800 W per main entry
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form
Exterior Lighting Summary (back)
LTG -EXT
2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms
TABLE 15 -2
LIGHTING POWER DENSITIES FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS
Revised July 2007
M I R O
S. A. Miro, Inc.
S. A. Miro, Inc. •
4582•South Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, Colorado 80237
(303) 741 -3737
•
S. A.'Miro - Project No. 07 -164
New 2n Level Ennries
Southcenter Mali
'Tukwila, Washington
._ RECEIVED
CITY °` ' "' I-A RETAIL STORE
NOV 2 7 20011
ALTERATIONS
ER ( NTE� REVIEW ISSUE
',November 19,_2007.
re
S
ri
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Pages
00000 Cover Page 1
00003 Table of Contents 1 - 03
00004 List of Drawings
BIDDING & CONTRACT CONDITIONS
PROVIDED BY OWNER
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS
th" 01010 Summary of Work 1 - 03
01015 Scheduling 1
01040 Project Coordination 1 - 06
i" 01045 Cutting and Patching 1 - 03
01050 Field Engineering 1 - 02
01095 Definitions and Standards 1 - 04
01200 Project Meetings 1 - 06
01300 Submittals 1 - 08
01400 Quality Control Services 1 - 04
liat 01500 Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls 1 - 06
01600 Materials and Equipment 1 - 04
01700 Project Closeout 1 - 07
01720 Project Record Documents 1 - 04
01740 Warranties 1 - 05
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02070 Selective Demolition 1 - 04
ww
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 1 - 21
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY - NOT USED
DIVISION 5 - METAL
05400 Cold - Formed Metal Framing 1 - 09
05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 1 - 02
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
w
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00003 - 1
Iwo
rr
•
m
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Pages
06100 Rough Carpentry 1 - 09
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 Building Insulation 1 - 04
07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1 - 04
07901 Joint Sealants 1 - 11
DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS AND GLASS
08310 Access Doors 1 - 04
08340 Overhead Coiling Grilles 1 - 04
08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1 - 13
08710 Door Hardware 1 - 06
08800 Glazing 1 - 14
09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1 - 16
09300 Ceramic Tile 1 - 09
09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 1 - 07
09660 Resilient Base 1 - 02
09680 Carpeting 1 - 05
09900 Painting 1 - 10
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES - NOT USED
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - NOT USED
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHING - NOT USED
DIVISION 13 - SPECIALTIES - NOT USED
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 1 - 03
15300 Fire Suppression System 1 - 12
15600 HVAC Systems 1 - 04
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00003 - 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Pages
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 Basic Materials and Methods 1 - 15
16500 Lighting 1 - 03
16600 Special Systems 1 - 04
END OF DOCUMENT
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00003 - 3
is
r.
INS
IN
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS:
Sheet Title
LIST OF DRAWINGS
A -0. Cover, Index, Abbreviations, Notes, and Location Map
A -1 Second Level Reference Plan and Exterior Elevations
A -2 Enlarged Floor and Ceiling Plans
A -3 Wall Sections
A -4 Details and Door Schedule
ME -1 Mechanical and Electrical Plans
OTHER DOCUMENTS:
PROJECT MANUAL
END OF DOCUMENT 00004
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL LIST OF DRAWINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 00004 -1
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The Project: Demolition and construction associated with a new second level
mall entry and second level exterior entry into the Sears Retail Store located at
the Westfield South center Mall in Tukwila, Washington. Work includes some
interior finish including limited electrical, mechanical and fire protection work.
ARCHITECT:
Robert S. Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 South Ulster Street
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
B. The Work:
1. Alteration of an existing 3 -story Sears department store including, but not
limited to selective demolition, architectural features & storefronts, interior
partitions, interior finishes, mechanical systems, fire protection system,
electrical power & lighting systems.
a. Store fixturing work, as identified in Section 01040, is by the Owner.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. See Instruction to Bidders, General Conditions, and Section 01040 for the
following:
1. Items noted to be furnished and installed by the Owner or Mall.
2. Items noted to be furnished by the Owner or Mall for installation and final
connections by the Contractor.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUMMARY OF WORK NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01010 - 1
S
6
bra
L
ig
liai
1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of the premises & construction activities to areas designated.
1. Confine operations to areas of work and other designated areas. Portions of the
project beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be
disturbed.
2. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the
Owner and the Owner's employees at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time
requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.
3. Contractors cannot locate offices within the building at any time.
B. Prior to beginning work, photograph existing conditions.
1. At end of work return staging areas and disturbed areas to original condition.
2. Comply with requirements of Section 01500.
1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY
A. Beneficial Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy, and to place and
install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion.
Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of
the total Work.
1. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials
as required to allow Owner's fixturing and merchandise operations.
2. If space turned over to the Owner for occupancy is not complete and accepted
by the Owner at time of start of fixturing the Contractor shall accomplish the
completion of contract work using methods, techniques and scheduling that do
not interfere, or create obstacles with Owner's fixturing work. Unfinished
contract work shall be accomplished as expeditiously as possible, in accordance
with a schedule approved by the Owner.
1.6 DOCUMENTS PROVIDED BY THE ARCHITECT
A. Architect will provide to the Contractor two sets of prints; one bound, and one
unbound copy of Project Manual and Addenda.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUMMARY OF WORK NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01010 - 2
B. During construction the Architect will provide the same number of documents
related to Bulletins and Change Orders.
C. The Contractor shall make any sets required for sub - contractors and suppliers at their
expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable.)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable.)
END OF SECTION 01010
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SUMMARY OF WORK
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01010 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
Ihro
SECTION 01015 - SCHEDULING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 CONTRACTORS SCHEDULE
A. Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar chart "Contractors Schedule."
1. Submit within 30 days of notice to proceed. No payment to the General
Contractor will be processed until the Contractors Schedule is submitted and
approved by Sears.
2. Schedule shall be submitted to the Architect, Sears, and Mall for review and
agreement.
3. Coordinate schedule dates with Mall construction.
4. Schedule shall be updated on a monthly basis to coincide with date of application
for payment and submitted with the application for payment.
5. Anticipated start of construction is February 4, 2008.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWIIA, WASHINGTON)
END OF SECTION 01015
SCHEDULING
01015 - 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
SECTION 01040 - PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for
Project Coordination including, but not necessarily limited to :
1. Coordination.
2. Administrative and Supervisory Personnel.
3. General Installation Provisions.
4. Cleaning and Protection.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01015 "Schedules" - Construction Schedule
2. Section 01200 Project Meetings
3. Section 01300 Submittals
4. Section 01700 "Project Closeout" requirements for final cleaning.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the
Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection,
and operation.
B. Coordinate the work with Separate Contractors retained by the Owner and Mall and
coordinate the alarm systems installation (contracted by Owner) similar to the way he
does with his own subcontractors.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 1
L
is
is
1`
is
C. Coordinate with the Owner for Owner's and Mall's furnished equipment and Owner's
Fixturing Operations.
D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required
administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and
ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Project Close -out activities.
6. Application for licenses, permits and any Certificates of Occupancy required.
7. Coordination of activities with inspection and testing companies.
8. Developer or Mall Owner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections.
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and
careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated
off -site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum
utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.
B. Comply with requirements contained in Section 01300 "Submittals."
C. Staff Names: Submit with bid a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments,
including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify
individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers.
1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, and the temporary field office.
kat
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
r ' • ' 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 2
2.1 COORDINATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Owner Furnished Equipment. The Owner will furnish and deliver to the project
site equipment and materials listed in the Owner's Equipment Matrix. The
Contractor is responsible for providing date needed if different than indicated in
schedule (date of arrival), receiving, unloading, storing, protecting and installing
the material and equipment listed. Contractor shall provide all related utilities,
mechanical, electrical and cable work needed for the completeness of the system.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 3
Owner's
Equipment
Furnished
and Installed
by Owner
Furnished by
Owner, Installed
by Source and
Connected by
Contractor
Furnished by
Owner's,
Installed and
Connected by
Contractor
Remarks
*Carpeting &
Carpet Wall
Base
X
(SIC)*
*Entrance
Vestibule Mats
X
*Store Fixtures
X
*Sales Area
Demountable
Partition
System
X
First Level
Light Boxes
X
Furnished and installed by
Mall — electrical power by
(MEC) * *.
Light Fixtures
and Exit Signs
Per List In
Electrical
Drawings
Furnished and installed by
Contractor. (Mall entry by
(MEC)). (Exterior Entry by
(SIC) except for exterior
light fixtures by (MEC)).
Lamps for
Light Fixture
Furnished and installed by
Contractor — see above.
*Exterior and
Mall Signs
X
Mall to provide plywood
backing. Refer to electrical
drawings for power
requirements. (MEC)
Note: Exact location of
rough in electrical by Sears
contractor is critical.
Sales Area
Floor
Ceramic Tile
X
Floor prep materials by
Contractor (SIC)
including setting and
grout materials and vinyl
base furnished and
installed by Sears
Contractor.
•
r
Ir
1
iW
irr
wr
ea
Owner's Equipment Matrix —All the equipment not listed below is to be furnished and
installed by the Contractor.
*(SIC) = Sears Interior Contractor
* *(MEC) = Mall/Entry Contractor
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
01040 -4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Installer of each component shall inspect both the substrate
and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more
explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.
C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to
installation. Reject damaged and defective items.
D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for necessary for
securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building
movement.
E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in
exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the
Architect for final decision.
F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.
G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure
the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from
incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.
H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the
necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual
components at mounting heights to comply with the state accessibility code or ADA
criteria for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height
decisions to the Architect for final decision.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure
protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 5
ensure operability without damaging effects.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such
exposures include, but not limited to, the following:
Storm Water Degradation
Excessive static or dynamic loading.
Excessive internal or external pressures.
Excessively high or low temperatures.
Thermal shock.
Excessively high or low humidity.
Air contamination or pollution.
Water or ice.
Solvents.
Chemicals.
Lights.
Radiation.
Puncture.
Abrasion.
Heavy traffic.
Soiling, staining and corrosion.
Bacteria.
Rodent and insect infestation.
Combustion.
High speed operation.
Improper lubrication.
Unusual wear or other misuse.
Contact between incompatible materials.
Destructive testing.
Misalignment.
Excessive weathering.
Unprotected weathering.
Improper shipping or handling.
Theft.
Vandalism.
END OF SECTION 01040
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT COORDINATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWII.A, WASHINGTON) 01040 - 6
SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and
patching.
B. Related Documents:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Sears General and Special Conditions and other Division -1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
C. Related Sections:
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 sections for specific requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the work.
Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections.
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and
patching is required before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well
in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to
proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:
B. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed.
C. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the
building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
D. List products to be used and entities that will perform work.
E. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CUTTING AND PATCHING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01045 - 1
F. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected. List utilities that will be relocated and
those that will be temporarily out -of- service. Indicate how long service will be
disrupted.
G. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements,
submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with
the original structure.
H. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the
Architect's right to require later complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory
work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a
manner that would change their load - carrying capacity or load- deflection ratio.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching
the following structural elements:
B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements for
safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life
or safety.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the
building's aesthetic qualities or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.
Remove and replace work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
A. For patching use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if
identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed
performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CUTTING AND PATCHING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01045 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and
conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective
action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project site with parties involved in cutting and
patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts
before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent
damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that
might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork
serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have
been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and
patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CUTTING AND PATCHING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01045 - 3
L
bon
to
r
r
SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Ira
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
ihod Section.
L2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field -
engineering services including, but not limited to, the following:
6
1. Damage surveys.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 EXAMINATION
A. Layout of Work - Developer shall furnish only basic reference lines and bench
marks indicated on the drawings to establish location of the structure. Contractor
shall lay out the construction site and correctly establish all lines, levels, grades and
position of all parts of the work, and shall be responsible for their accurate and
proper correlation with reference lines, monuments, and datum established by
developer. Such monuments and datum as may be set by developer shall be
carefully preserved by Contractor, and if displaced shall be replaced at the expense
of Contractor.
B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property
survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate
and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference
►• points during construction.
1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements
to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or
locations.
taw
2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements
on the original survey control points.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIELD ENGINEERING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
+•r 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
r
01050 - 1
C. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site,
referenced to data established by survey control points.
D. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and
other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before
beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground
utilities and other construction.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project
Record Documents.
A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish
benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure
required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale
Drawings to determine dimensions.
1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels
provided for their use.
2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and
plumb.
B. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures,
building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and
levels required for mechanical and electrical work.
END OF SECTION 01050
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIELD ENGINEERING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01050 - 2
SECTION 01095 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Contract Documents are complimentary. Work indicated or described in any one
of the Contract Documents shall be provided even though not indicated or described
elsewhere. If any inconsistency shall occur between the Contract Documents, the
better quality or greater quantity shall be provided, unless otherwise directed in
writing by the Architect.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions.
B. Indicated refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the drawings, or
other paragraphs or schedules in specifications, and similar requirements in Contract
Documents. Where terms such as "shown ", "noted ", "scheduled" and "specified" are
used, it is to help locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended except as
specifically noted.
C. Directed: Terms such as "directed ", "requested ", "authorized ", "selected ",
"approved ", "required" and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect ", "requested
by the Architect ", and similar phrases.
1. However, no implied meaning shall be interpreted to extend the Architect's
responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.
D. No Exception Taken: The term "no exception taken ", where used in conjunction
with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests,
is limited to the responsibilities and duties of the Architect stated in General and
Supplementary Conditions. Such action shall not release the Contractor from
responsibility to fulfill Contract Document requirements, unless otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 1
E. Regulation: The term "regulations" includes laws, statutes, ordinances and lawful
orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions and
agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the work,
whether lawfully imposed by authorities having jurisdiction or not.
F. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the Project site,
ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project site including the
actual unloading, unpacking, storing, assembly, erection, utility connections, placing,
anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and
similar operations.
H. Provide: The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the
intended use.
I. Installer: An installer is an entity engaged by the Contractor either as an employee,
subcontractor or sub - subcontractor for performance of a particular construction
activity, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. Installers
are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
1. The term "experienced ", when used with the term "installer ", means having a
minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project,
and familiar with the precautions required, and has complied with requirements of
the authority having jurisdiction.
J. Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to
perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to
report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.4 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Format: These specifications are organized into divisions and sections
based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16- division format and the
MASTERFORMAT numbering system.
B. Assignment of Specialists: The specification requires that certain specific
construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in
the operations to be performed. The specialists must be engaged for those activities,
and assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option.
Nevertheless, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains
with the Contractor.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 2
r
1. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building
i,,., codes and similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to
interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
h 2. Trades: Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain
construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals
of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter ". It also does not imply that
requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding
generic name.
is
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Except where Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and
effect as if bound or copied directly into Contract Documents. Such standards are
made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply
with standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is
specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
quantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be enforced. Refer
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which
quality level is more stringent to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required
to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity.
Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards
are frequently abbreviated. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the
Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the
trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction or
other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the. Encyclopedia
of Associations, published by Gale Research Company, available in most libraries.
F. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard or
specification - producing agencies are frequently abbreviated. The acronyms or
abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard or
specification - producing agencies of the federal government.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 3
1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS /AUTHORITIES
A. The Architect has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary to obtain
information necessary for the preparation of Contract Documents; that information
may or may not be of significance to the Contractor. Contact authorities having
jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01095
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01095 - 4
►.Y
Sim
m
irr
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project
meetings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Site Mobilization/Preconstruction conference.
2. Preinstallation conferences.
3. Progress meetings.
4. Coordination meetings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project
meetings with other construction activities.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. The Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at
a time convenient to the Contractor. The conference will be held at the Project Site
or another location designated by the Owner. The Owner's Representative will
conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Architect, Testing and
Inspection Agency, the Contractor and its Project Superintendent, major
subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, and other concerned parties may attend the
conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Designation of responsible personnel and assignments. (Communications chain)
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 1
2. Owner Contractor Agreement Status.
3. Developers responsibilities and representative.
4. Protection of existing to remain, staff and customers
5. Review conditions to start construction.
6. Testing requirements and procedures.
7. Permits.
8. Use of the premises.
9. Staging Area.
10. Parking availability.
11. Office, work, and storage areas.
12. Signage - Identification & Control.
13. Proposed construction schedule.
14. Critical work sequencing. (Identify milestones)
15. Distribution of Contract Documents.
16. Establish submittal schedules and logs.
17. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
18. Project meeting schedule.
19. Preparation of record documents.
20. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
21. Owner furnished equipment and materials.
22. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
23. Procedures for processing field decisions, Change Orders, and establishing costs
of Change Orders.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 2
li
24. Working hours.
25. Housekeeping.
26. Safety procedures.
27. First aid.
28. Security.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. The Contractor shall conduct preinstallation conferences at the Project Site before
each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. See
individual sections for particular preinstallation conferences.
B. Attendees: Contractor, the Installer and representatives of manufacturers and
fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or
integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow,
shall attend the meeting. Advise the Owner's Project Representative and the
Architect of scheduled meeting dates at least 10 working days in advance.
1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference,
including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality- control samples.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 3
3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
2. The Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements and
disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly
distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner,
the Architect and attendees.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
1. Manufacturer's recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Governing regulations.
s. Safety.
t. Inspection and testing requirements.
u. Required performance results.
v. Recording requirements.
w. Protection.
A. The Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at intervals
established at the preconstruction meeting. Notify the Owner, and the Architect of
scheduled meeting dates, a minimum of ten working days in advance. Coordinate
dates of some meetings to coincide with preparation of the payment request.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 4
ift
ip
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Contractor, the Owner and the
Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be
familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction
Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
hi
a. Interface requirements.
b. Time.
c. Sequences.
d. Status of submittals.
e. Deliveries.
f. Off -site fabrication problems.
V.
g. Access.
h. Site utilization.
i. Temporary facilities and services.
j. Hours of work.
k. Hazards and risks.
1. Housekeeping.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 5
1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS
m. Quality and work standards.
n. Change Orders.
o. Documentation of information for payment requests.
D. Reporting: No later than 5 days after each meeting, the Contractor shall distribute
minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been
present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous
meeting and report.
1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
A. The Contractor shall conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals
convenient for all parties involved, but not less than semi - monthly. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes,
such as regular progress meetings and special preinstallation meetings.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in
coordination or planning for the construction activities involved.
C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others
affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
D. Notify the Owner's project representative and the Architect a minimum of ten
working days in advance of coordination meetings. The Owner and the Architect
reserves the right to attend coordination meetings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT MEETINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01200 - 6
IS
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals
required for performance of the work, including:
1. Submittal schedule.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Product data.
4. Samples.
5. Mock -Ups.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division -1 Sections and other Contract
Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include,
but are not limited to:
1. Permits.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Applications for payment.
4. Performance and payment bonds.
5. Insurance certificates.
6. Evidence that required governmental fees have been paid.
7. List of subcontractors.
8. Sworn statements and lien waivers.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
r.r
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 01015 Schedules, for Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of �•
performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the
work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
3. Processing: Allow sufficient delivery and review time so that installation will not
be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time
for resubmittals.
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the
label or title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on
Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the
action taken.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording
action taken:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
a. The Owner's Representative reserves the right to withhold action on a
submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related
submittals are received.
a. Allow ten working days for each review. Allow additional time for delivery
and if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent
submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor when a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination.
b. No extension of Contract time will be authorized because of failure to
transmit submittals to the Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance of
the work to permit processing.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
Soo
S
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Owner's Representative.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submittals received for
sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action.
1. On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the
form or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements,
including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that
information complies with Contract Document requirements.
D. Contractor's Submittal Review:
1. Each submission shall bear the Contractor's review stamp attesting to the
Contractor's review of the submission for conformance to Contract requirements
and coordination with other work.
2. Omission of Contractor's executed review stamp will be cause for rejection by
the Owner's Representative and submission will be returned to Contractor.
1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. After development and acceptance, by Sears and its consultants, of the Contractor's
construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the
schedule 15 working days prior to the first submittal date.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values
and the list of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during
the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information:
a. Scheduled date for each submittal package and number of drawing in each
package.
b. Related Section number.
c. Submittal category.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
g. Scheduled date for Owner's Representative final release or approval.
B. Distribution: Following response to the proposed submittal schedule and mutual
acceptance, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Sears, subcontractors, and
other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the
Project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the work and are no longer involved in construction
activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where
revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently
with report of each meeting.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or
otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce
Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings.
Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not
considered Shop Drawings.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
•
is
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams,
schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings, Include, but not limited to, the
following information:
1.6 PRODUCT DATA
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
a. All Submittals: Submit one correctable translucent reproducible print and
two blue- or black -line print for the Architect's review; the reproducible
print will be returned with notations.
b. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating
action taken in connection with construction.
A. Collect product data into a single submittal for each element of construction or
system. Product data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation
instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and templates,
standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where product data must be
specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as
"Shop Drawings ".
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed product
data includes information on several products, some of which are not required,
mark copies to indicate the applicable information.
B. Submittals: Submit three (3) copies of each required submittal; submit additional
copies required for maintenance manuals. The Owner's Representative will return
one, marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required.
1. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 5
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
C. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers,
manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction
activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1.7 SAMPLES
1. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of product data
applicable is in the installer's possession.
2. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of product data in connection with
construction.
A. Submit full -size, fully fabricated samples cured and finished as specified and physically
identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range
sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern.
1. Mount, display, or package samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated.
2. Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of
these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these
characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered
and installed.
Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in
the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than three)
that show approximate limits of the variations.
Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for samples that illustrate
workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation
and similar construction characteristics.
3. Preliminary Submittals: Where samples are for selection of color, pattern,
texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full
set of choices for the material or product.
Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark
indicating selection and other action.
4. Submittals: Except for samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit
two (2) sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated
with each set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets of subcontractors,
manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for
performance of the work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
5. Maintain sets of samples, as returned, at the Project site for quality comparisons
throughout the course of construction.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
�., submittal may serve as the final submittal.
1.8 MOCK -UPS
A. See individual technical sections for required mock -ups.
B. Erect where directed by Architect and leave in place until directed to be removed by
Architect.
C. Restore mock -up area to original condition.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start -up, adjusting and
finishing, in quantities specified for product data.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.
1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturer's certificate
to Architect for review, in quantities specified for product data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product but must be
acceptable to Architect.
1.11 JURISDICTIONAL DOCUMENTS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWII.A, WASHINGTON)
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 7
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of
permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, certificates of occupancy, releases,
jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar
documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance
with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work.
1.12 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. With each applications for payment, submit digital photographs via e-mail to Owner
showing progress of construction within three days from the day the photos are taken.
B. Photographs: Provide 15 different views, half of them taken from approximately the
same points to be able to determine the progress from each submittal to the next.
C. Identify photographs with date, time, orientation and project identification.
1.13 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and
return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to
indicate action taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
2. Submittals not presented in conformance with the requirements of this Section
will be returned noted "Not Accepted ".
B. Action Stamp: The Owner's Representative will stamp each submittal with a
uniform, self - explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked as
follows to indicate the action taken:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 8
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
L
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality- control
services.
B. Quality- control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including
reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing
authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation
procedures, not production of standard products.
1. Specific quality- control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements,
including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well as
customized fabrication and installation procedures.
a. Requirements in particular Sections identify the entity responsible for
quality control services.
2. Inspections, tests, and related actions specified are not intended to limit the
Contractor's quality- control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract
Document requirements.
3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality- control services required by
the Architect, Sears, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 1
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of
another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality -
control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by
authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract
Sum.
1. The Owner will employ and pay an Independent Inspection and Testing Agency
to perform specified quality control services; identified in particular Sections.
2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required
inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform
inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual
Sections shall cooperate with the Owner's Project Manager, the Architect and the
Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide
qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of
irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its
services.
2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of
the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections.
A. The independent testing agency will submit a certified written report of each
inspection, test, or similar service to Owner's Project Manager, the Architect, and the
Contractor, in duplicate.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing
authority, when the authority so directs.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 2
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include,
but are not limited to:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section.
h. Complete inspection or test data.
i. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work
complies with Contract Document requirements.
1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
B. Distribution of field observation and test reports.
1. One (1) copy of each report and back -up, to the Architect and Structural
Engineer as soon as the report is completed.
2. One (1) copy of each report and back -up, to the Contractor as soon as the report
is completed.
3. One (1) copy of each report and back -up, to the Owner's Project Manager.
Reports to the Owner shall be compiled and forwarded once a month
accompanied by an invoice (in triplicate) for services performed. In case any
tests fail to come up to required - specified results, one (1) additional copy of the
report shall be forwarded immediately to the Owner.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 3
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing any additional quality control
services other than these performed by the Owner's independent consultant. The
Contractor is not permitted to use the Owner's Consultant. Reports of the
Contractor's testing services shall be distributed in the same manner as for the
Owner's consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
B. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies,
including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.
END OF SECTION 01400
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01400 - 4
SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
so
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
..
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
v
A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities, including temporary
utilities, controls, support facilities, and security and protection.
B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to, the following:
1. Telephone, facsimile and E -Mail service.
C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Staging area.
2. Construction Offices.
3. Temporary heat.
4. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
5. Temporary enclosures.
6. Hoists and temporary elevator use.
7. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
hip
8. Waste disposal services.
9. Rodent and pest control.
10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Temporary fire protection.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
3. Temporary enclosure wall around work area to prevent access by unauthorized
personnel and transmission of dust or debris to customers/staff occupied areas.
Construction and location as approved by owner & local jurisdictional authority.
4. Environmental protection.
Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections.
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Building Code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.
4. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in
appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention
measures. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Do
not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to
develop or persist on -site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use
undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition Provide materials
suitable for use intended.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use
undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment
suitable for use intended.
B. Telephone, Facsimile and E -Mail Service: Contractor shall provide and pay for
telephone line services, limited however, to business calls made by the Owner or their
representatives.
C. Janitorial Services: Contractor shall provide adequate janitorial service incident to the
temporary facilities required herein.
D. Contractor's Office and Storage: Contractor shall provide and maintain such office
and storage facilities on the site as required for the proper conduct of the work. The
type of structure(s) and location thereof must be approved by the Owner.
E. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self - contained, single- occupant toilet units of the
chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented
and fully enclosed with a glass - fiber - reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent
material.
F. Drinking Water: Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary drinking water
facilities in compliance with regulations of the governing agency.
G. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.
H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class A fire
extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide
hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class ABC, dry- chemical extinguishers or a
combination of extinguishers of NFPA- recommended classes for the exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and
size required by location and class of fire exposure.
I. Plant and Equipment: The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain, and operate a
complete and adequate plant for the handling, execution, disposal and distribution of
all material and equipment required for the proper and timely performance of all work
connected with the contract. The location, arrangement and type of plant and
equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner and such thereof as may be
deemed by him to be sufficient. Defective or otherwise unsuited plant and equipment,
for the proper performance of the work shall, when directed by Owner, be promptly
dismantled and removed from the site by Contractor.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
& TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where
they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify
as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by
authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Staging Area: Staging area shall be maintained by Contractor. Contractor shall give
back staging area to Developer in the original condition.
B. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary
construction and support facilities for easy access.
1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to
Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will
be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Sears.
C. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities, for
curing or drying of completed installations or protection of installed construction
from adverse effects of low temperatures on high humidity. Select safe equipment
that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being
installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition
required and minimize consumption of energy.
D. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water fixtures.
Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation
and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the
Project's needs.
E. Scaffolding, Staging, Etc.: Contractor and each sub - contractor shall be responsible
for providing scaffolding, staging, planking, runways, guard rails, and other
temporary construction necessary in the proper performance of his particular part or
parts of the contract. This requirement shall not be construed as precluding the joint
use of such temporary construction, but shall require that the Contractor and each
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction,
in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction
i.. operations, and similar activities.
1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete,
provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment
of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
ho
2. Interior side temporary enclosure at both entries by Sears Interior Contractor
(SIC).
H. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a
local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize
attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to
perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will
be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control
operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
ink
3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire- protection needs are supplied by permanent
facilities, install and maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of the types needed
to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for
Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."
■r
in
v
sub - contractor specifically arrange for such joint use if such is to be the case. All
temporary construction included herein shall be in compliance with all laws, rules, and
regulations of the Industrial Safety and Accident Commission, the insurance carriers,
local ordinances, and other authorities of competent jurisdiction.
G. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
v
B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code
requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate
colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard
being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including
flashing red or amber lights.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 5
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially
completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized
entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
D. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and
conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental
regulations, and avoid the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be
contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of
tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise - making tools
and equipment to hours that will avoid complaints from persons or firms near the site.
3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect
from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
B. Termination and Removal: Unless the Owner's Representative requests that it be
maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when
replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have
been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Restore staging area
to conditions present at the beginning of the work. Repair damaged Work, clean
exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
END OF SECTION 01500
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) & TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
u
v
Iwo
r
r
ihr
4
SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the
Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 1 Section -01095 "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the
applicability of industry standards to products specified.
2. Division 1 Section -01300 "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of
the Contractor's Construction Schedule Section -01015 "Scheduling" and the
Submittal Schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms
used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure,"
"finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self - explanatory and
have well - recognized meanings in the construction industry.
1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether
purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term
"product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of
similar intent.
a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name,
including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in
the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date
of the Contract Documents.
2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished,
refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the
Work.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 1
3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually
operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to
the Owner and Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the
manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.
1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the
Schedule of Submittals.
2. Initial Submittal: Within 15 days after date of commencement of the Work,
submit 3 copies of an initial product list.
a. At the Contractor's option, the initial submittal may be limited to product
selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract
period.
3. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work,
submit 3 copies of the completed product list. Provide a written explanation for
omissions of data and for known variations from Contract requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2. If a dispute arises between prime contractors over concurrently selectable, but
incompatible products, the Architect will determine which products shall be
retained and which are incompatible and must be replaced.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 2
4. Owner Representative's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to
Contractor within 10 working day of receipt of the completed product list. No
response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or ►•
products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products
comply with Contract Documents.
L
A. Source Limitations: Provide products of the same kind from a single source.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting
between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be
compatible with other products selected.
1. Each prime contractor is responsible for providing products and construction
methods that are compatible with products and construction methods of other
prime or separate contractors.
C. No substitutions of materials, systems or assemblies will be permitted after award of
the Contract.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's
recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration,
and loss, including theft.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at the site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract
Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and
measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not
endanger the supporting construction.
7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in
a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's
instructions.
2_1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide new products that comply with the Contract
Documents, and that are undamaged.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, fmish, safety guards, and
other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use
and effect.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 3
B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations
govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the
following:
1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a
single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions
will be permitted.
2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or
more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No
substitutions will be permitted.
3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a
product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use
of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the
characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require
compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with
these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the
application indicated.
a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications
only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a
product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.
6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established color
or sample, the Architect's decision will be fmal on whether a proposed product
matches the established color or matches satisfactorily.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for
installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely
in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.
1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage
and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01600
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01600 - 4
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_i RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L22 SUMMARY
A. The Architect will schedule substantial completion inspections and final acceptance
inspections for of the work, or designated portions, thereof, identified by the Owner.
B. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project
closeout, including but not limited to:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
it
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
6. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
C. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the
appropriate Sections in Divisions -2 through -16.
D. Requirements for Project Record Documents are included in Section 01720.
L33 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before scheduled inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion, the Contractor shall complete the following: (List exceptions in the
request.)
rr
1. In the Application for payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date for
Substantial Completion, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the
,., Work claimed as substantially complete.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 1
a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these
Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to
the Contract Sum.
b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete
items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not
complete.
2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications and similar documents as required by each section of these
specifications (HVAC, BAS, EIFS, etc.).
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates
and similar releases.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. •
6. Make final change -over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner.
7. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner's operating and
maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary
facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock -ups, and similar
elements.
8. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch -up painting.
9. Touch -up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
10. Provide a list of items to be corrected or resolved prior to final completion.
11. Consent of Surety to Release Final Payment [applicable only when part of
contract].
12. Waivers of Lien from Contractor and all sub - contractors and material supplier.
13. Certificate of Occupancy as issued by the governing authority.
14. Contractor's 1 -year warranty with applicable extensions as required for other
work or trades.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
int
�r.
SID
r
15. Certificate of Substantial Completion fully executed establishing the substantial
completion date. The substantial completion date to be the commencement date
of all warranties, guarantees, etc.
16. Copy of all shop drawings indicating Contractor's approval.
17. Copy of all submittal data indicating Contractor's approval.
18. Information or data on all approved or selected samples. This pertains to the
product name and number of floor tile, ceiling tile, wall tile, paint, etc. and where
each product may be obtained.
19. Confirmation of Contractor conducted instructions on electrical systems as well
as building components with moving parts such as automatic doors, electric
operated doors, access panels, etc. Contractor shall prepare video of instruction
conducted and/or obtain from authorized Owner's representative a signed
acknowledgment that instructions have been given according to specifications.
20. List of all sub - contractors and major material suppliers indicating trade or work
responsibility. Also provide the address, phone number and name of contact
person for emergencies and/or business matters.
21. Paint colors and manufacturers (interior and exterior).
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request by the Contractor for inspection, the
Owner and the Owner's Representative will either jointly proceed with inspection or
advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Owner's Representative will
prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate
will be issued.
1. At any designated portion of the work, the Owner's Representative and the
Owner will conduct inspection when requested once only and assured in writing
by the Contractor that the Work has been substantially completed. The
Contractor will be backcharged for any additional inspections and expenses
relating thereto, and they will be deducted from Contractor's final payment.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Acceptance.
3. No partial inspections of any designated portion of the work will be made.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 3
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before scheduled final inspection for certification of final
acceptance and final payment, the Contractor shall complete the following: (List
exceptions in the request.)
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products
and completed operations where required.
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the
Contract Sum.
3. Submit a certified copy of the Owner's Representative substantial completion
inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has
been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been
endorsed and dated by the Architect.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and
similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took
possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
8. Certify in writing to the Owner's Representative that:
a. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
b. Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents.
c. Work has been completed for accordance with the Contract Documents.
d. Equipment and systems have been tested as required, and are operational.
e. Work is completed and ready for Final Review.
9. Submit final Waivers of Lien from Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWIIAA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 4
L
U
12. Should the Owner's Representative determine that the Work is incomplete or
defective:
a. The Owner's Representative promptly will so notify the Contractor, in
writing, listing the incomplete or defective work.
b. Remedy the deficiencies promptly, and notify the Owner's Representative
when ready for re- review.
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Owner's Representative and the Owner will jointly
reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list
16 o items from Substantial Completion inspection, has been completed, except items
whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the
Owner and the Architect.
Irr
r
10. Submit 2 copies of final inspection by authorities of governing jurisdication.
11. The Owner's Representative will make a "Final Review" to verify status of
completion.
C. When the Owner's Representative determines that the Work is acceptable under the
Contract Documents, he will promptly process the final Certificate for Payment. Final
Certification will not be made until all Change Orders and requests for adjustments
have been settled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that
requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide
instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in
procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed
review of the following items:
1. Maintenance manuals.
2. Record documents.
3. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans and Inspection Reports
4. Spare parts and materials.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 — 5
5. Tools.
6. Lubricants.
7. Fuels.
8. Identification systems.
9. Control sequences.
10. Hazards.
11. Cleaning.
12. Warranties and bonds.
13. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
1. Start -up.
2. Shutdown.
3. Emergency operations.
4. Noise and vibration adjustments.
5. Safety procedures.
6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7. Effective energy utilization.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions.
B. Final Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final
cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal,
commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's
instructions, cleaning materials and cleaning products.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
is
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
Certification of Substantial Completion.
a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are
�•• noticeable vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and
other damaged transparent materials.
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dust -free
condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore
reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete
floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess
lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary
condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and
other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains,
spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor
planted to a smooth even - textured surface.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid
the Project of rodents, insects and other pests.
D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for
protection of the Work during construction.
E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety
standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on the Landlord's or Sears property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or
dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and
dispose of in a lawful manner.
END OF SECTION 01700
IWO
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT CLOSEOUT NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWIL.A, WASHINGTON) 01700 - 7
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of the following
on the most appropriate sheet of the Record Document Job Set:
a. Significant changes made during the construction.
b. Significant detail not shown in the original Contract Documents.
c. The location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in building
structures, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.
d. Such other as -built information as directed.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01050, Field Engineering.
2. Section 01300, Submittals.
3. Section 01700, Project Closeout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections.
A. Submit Final Record Documents to Architect prior to or concurrent with the request
for Final Payment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accuracy of records:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 1
v
A. Maintain the job set of Record documents completely protected from deterioration
and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded
data to the final Project Record documents.
L
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET
A. Preservation:
1. Devise a suitable method for protecting the job set to the approval of the
r Architect.
1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate
and prior entries on each page Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and
other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly,
including SWAPPP storm water pollution prevention plans..
2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the
Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the
approved Project Record Documents.
B. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has
occurred.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
B. In the event of loss of record data, use means necessary to again secure the data to
the Architect's approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal
and replacement of concealing materials.
2. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the
Contract Documents.
2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. A. Job set: Promptly following receipt of the Owner's Notice to Proceed reserve
one complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract for documentation
use, marking these "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET ".
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 2
2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by
the Architect, until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents.
B. Making entries on Drawings:
1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the
change by graphic line and note as required.
2. Date all entries.
3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected.
4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping
changes.
C. Make entries in the pertinent other Documents as approved by the Architect.
D. Conversion of schematic layouts:
1. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts,
and similar items, is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precise
physical layout.
a. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the
Architect's approval.
b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate
information as to the final physical layout of items which area shown only
schematically on the Drawings.
2. Show on the job set of Record Documents, by dimension accurate to within one
inch, the centerline of each run of items such as are described above, measured
from visible and accessible features of the existing building.
a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain," "galv.
water," and the like.
b. Shown, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ( "under slab," in
ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like).
c. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably
to the Specifications.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 3
1r
111
3.2 FINAL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Transfer of data to Drawings.
.., 1. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the
corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required.
2. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing a full description of
changes made during construction, and the actual location of items described
above.
3. Call attention to each entry by drawings a "cloud" around the area or areas
affected.
4. Make changes neatly, consistently, and with the proper media to assure longevity
and clear reproduction.
B. Transfer of data to other Documents:
1. If the Documents other than Drawings have been kept clean during progress of
the Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the
Architect, the job set of those Documents other than Drawings will be accepted
as final Record Documents.
2. If any such Document is not so approved by the Architect, secure a new copy of
that Document from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge for
reproduction and handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy
to the approval of the Architect.
C. Review and submittal:
1. Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents to the Architect for
review.
2. Participate in review meetings as required.
3. Make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record Documents
to the Architect.
END OF SECTION 01720
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01720 - 4
SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
L1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties
required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on
products and special warranties.
1. Refer to Article 13.3 of the General Conditions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties.
2. Division 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on
products and installations specified to be warranted.
3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to
the Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that
incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to
countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
L33 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by
individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the
manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to
provide greater rights for the Owner.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 — 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
lbw
Imo
tor
1_ WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted
construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of
such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of
warranted construction.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been
corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written
endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an
equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,
replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements
of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing
or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether The Owner has benefited from
use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
D. Owner Recourse: Expressed warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise
available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as
limitations on the time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations,
rights, or remedies.
1_5 SUBMITTALS
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and
to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of
the Contract Documents.
E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on
the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the
Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign
such commitments are willing to do so.
Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections.
A. Submit written warranties to The Owner prior to the date certified for Substantial
Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a
commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for
the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon
request of the Architect.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by
the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
period, submit properly executed warranties to the Owner within 15 days of
completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a
subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a
written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for
execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the
Architect, for approval prior to final execution.
C. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of individual Sections. Prepare
a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the
Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a
draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 3 copies of each required warranty
properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or
manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on
the table of contents of the Project Manual.
E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, commercial - quality, durable 3 -ring, vinyl -
covered loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and
sized to receive 8'h -by -11 -inch (115 -by- 280 -mm) paper.
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and
the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2A GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
Iwo
L
2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project title or name, and name of the Contractor.
3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, �..
provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion
in each required manual.
A. The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee against all defects in materials or
workmanship of all trades under the Contract. This guarantee shall be for a period of
twelve (12) months, unless noted to be longer, or for the period stipulated in the
various specification sections where such bonds, warranties, or guarantees are for
periods longer than twelve (12) months. This period shall commence as stated
herein upon Substantial Completion.
B. The Contractor shall obtain from his subcontractors and shall deliver to the Owner in
writing all individual trade bonds, warranties or guarantees specified under the
various trade sections of the Specifications.
C. Supplementing the above, the guarantee and warranty period for mechanical and
electrical equipment or any other mechanical contrivance shall commence from the
date the equipment is first placed in continued service. In no case shall the guarantee
period start date precede the date of Substantial Completion. Mechanical and/or
electrical equipment placed into service for the benefit of the Contractor shall not
constitute continued service. As a condition of formal acceptance by the Owner, the
Contractor, at his expense, must place same in first class operating condition as if it
had not been used. The date of continued service will be determined from lease
periods set forth in the lease agreements for the building.
D. Should any defects develop in contract work within specified periods due to defects
in materials and/or workmanship (exclusive of damage due to the Owner's improper
maintenance or operation), the Contractor shall make repairs and perform all
necessary work to correct defective work, as approved by the Architect. The
Contractor shall execute such repairs and corrective work within five (5) days, or
sooner if so specified in the trade Sections, after written notice to Contractor by the
Owner, and the Contractor shall bear all costs in connection therewith. The Owner
will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
E. Should any defects develop in the contract work that constitutes an emergency, the
Contractor shall visit the site within twenty -four (24) hours of notification by Owner
of the deficiency and begin emergency repairs within that period. The Owner shall
promptly notify the Contractor and shall take available measures to minimize any
damage to the building and contents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of all
damages to the building and contents.
F. In Contractor fails to do corrective guarantee work so ordered, the Owner may have
work done by others, and the Owner may charge the cost thereof against monies
retained pursuant to the Contract. If said retained monies are insufficient to pay such
cost, or if no money is available, the Contractor and/or his sureties shall pay Owner
the entire balance of the cost of such work.
G. During the guarantee period, the Contractors shall assign a person and an alternate
person to administer the guarantee. The Contractor shall provide and keep current a
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of the administrators, where they can
be reached during and after business hours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01740
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL WARRANTIES
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 01740 - 5
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
rs
SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1I RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the
provisions of this Section.
1_2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of portions of exterior walls, interior flooring, ceilings and walls and
fmishes, lighting, fire sprinkler heads and other interior work as indicated on
Drawings.
1_3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00700 "General Conditions ": Provisions regarding discovery of
hazardous materials including asbestos.
B. Section 01700 "Contract Closeout ": Project record documents.
L44 REFERENCES
A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency.
L5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of areas to be
demolished.
1_6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize
need for disruption of Owner's operations. Provide minimum of
ninety -six (96) hours advance notice to Owner of demolition
activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations.
2. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent
building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at all times.
A. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit
dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with
governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 1
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements are as show on Drawings.
B. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record
documents. Report discrepancies to the Owner before disturbing existing
installation.
C. Prior to beginning work of this Section inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions of fmished surfaces, equipment, or
surrounding areas which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective
demolition work; file documentation with Owner's Representative prior to
beginning work.
1. Beginning of selective demolition work means Contractor
accepts existing conditions.
12 PREPARATION
A. Erect and maintain weatherproof and secure closures for exterior openings with
provision for emergency exiting.
1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of
dust, fumes, noise, and smoke to provide for Owner occupancy.
B. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection required to protect and
provide safe passage of Owner's personnel to and from building. Exits from the
building must be maintained at all times.
C. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered.
D. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas.
1. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate
capping locations on Project Record Documents.
3.3 DEMOLITION - GENERAL
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 2
L
1.
irr
L
w
r
II re
how
um
A. Perform selective demolition work in systematic, orderly, and careful manner. Use
such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance
with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry
at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or
hand tools. Do not use power -driven impact tools.
B. Distribute demolition equipment throughout area, and promptly remove debris to
avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
C. Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous
materials encountered.
D. Do not burn or bury materials on site.
E. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of
work, leave areas of work in clean condition.
3_4 SALVAGE MATERIALS
A. Items for re -use remain the property of the Owner. Verify items prior to removal
and protect from damage. Notify Architect prior to removal and obtain
acceptance regarding method of removal.
3_5 UTILITY SERVICE
A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, and protect against damage during
demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied areas except when authorized
by the Owner and utility company. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities.
3_6 EXPLOSIVES
A. Use of explosives is not permitted.
3_7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Remove, handle, and dispose of hazardous materials encountered in a safe manner
complying with local regulations.
`" B. For materials containing or likely to contain asbestos or PCB, refer to the General
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 3
3_8 ASBESTOS
Conditions.
A. A survey has been made to determine the existence of asbestos. Notify Owner if
the existence of asbestos is suspected for inspection and removal. Comply with
all required regulations. Coordinate with asbestos removal activities provided by
the Owner.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations
from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site.
B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with
applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and
protection against exposure or environmental pollution.
3.10 CLEAN - UP AND REPAIR
A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and remaining
demolished materials from site. Remove protection and leave interior rooms broom
clean.
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that indicated or required. Return
structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of
selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or
damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION 02070
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 02070 - 4
L
lor
..r
Iwo
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 1
m
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
bog
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
Cast -in -place concrete including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures and fmishes.
1.3 DUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications,
and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural
Concrete for Buildings."
2. ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting ".
3. ACI 306 "Cold Weather Concreting ".
4. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection ".
5. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ".
6. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork ". Concrete
reinforcing slab institute, "Manual of Standard Practice ".
7. ACI 302.IR "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction ".
8. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard
Practice."
B. Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a testing laboratory to perform
material evaluation tests and to examine concrete construction.
1. Provide access to mixing plant and project site.
C. When inspections or test results indicate that the concrete does not meet specified
criteria, retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and
forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems,
curing compounds, color finish materials, and others as requested by Design
Engineer.
C. Design Mixes
D. Shop Drawings for Reinforcement: Prepared by registered Professional Engineer
licensed in the state of the project's location, for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP -66 "ACI Detailing
Manual" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars,
arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for
openings through concrete structures.
1. Show construction joints and pour sequences.
E. Laboratory Test Reports: For concrete materials and mix design tests.
F. Materials Certificates: Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory
test reports when permitted by Structural Engineer. Materials certificates shall be
signed by manufacturer and fabricator certifying that each material item complies
with or exceeds specified requirements.
1. Provide admixture manufactures written certification for each admixture
used, that it contains no oxygenation, or has no more than 0.05 percent
chloride ions.
G. Concrete delivery receipts.
L
L
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood
faced, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide full- depth, continuous,
straight, smooth exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 2 1.
a
to
number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form
material of sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly - placed concrete
without bow or deflection.
1. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1 "B-B (Concrete
Form) Plywood ", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge -
sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark.
B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other
acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for
tight fit.
C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form - coating compounds with a
maximum VOC of 350 mg/1 that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect
concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
D. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, adjustable - length, removable or snap -off metal
form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete
upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 11/2 inches to
exposed face.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
ha
hag
A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel.
1. Provide prefabricated sheets. Roll type not permitted.
D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for
spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place.
Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
1. For slabs -on- grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners
where base material will not support chair legs.
2. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in
contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are plastic protected
(CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2).
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 3
Sieve
% Passing
No. 4
100
No. 8
92
No. 16
68
No. 39
43
No. 50
21
No. 100
6
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise acceptable
to Design Engineer.
B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide
aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete.
1. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as
iron sulphides, pyrite, marcasite, or ochre which can cause stains or
exposed concrete surfaces.
2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand, free from loam, clay lumps or
other deleterious substances. Beach sand shall not be used. Washed river
sand may be used provided it meets the requirements of ASTM C 33 and
the following gradation:
3. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate, containing no
clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows:
a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank run
gravel is not permitted.
c. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be larger than one-
fifth of the narrowest dimensions between forms, one -third of the
depth of slabs, nor three- fourths of the minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars or
pretensioning tendons or post - tensioning ducts.
d. Grading shall be approved by the engineer and shall be such that
the grading shall be within the limits specified in Table 2, ASTM
C 33.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
Except for interior slabs on grade,
retaining walls and slabs on metal
deck:
Interior slabs on grade, retaining
walls and slabs on metal deck:
Sieve
% Passing
Sieve
% Passing
1'h"
100
1"
100
1"
95 -100
3 /a"
90 -100
%2"
25 -60
3/8"
20 -55
No. 4
0 -10
No. 4
0 -10
No. 8
0 -05
No. 8
0 -05
iha
Ii
NO
e. Supply of aggregates shall be from one source of supply to ensure
uniformity in color, size and shape.
4. Water for washing aggregates, mixing, and curing shall be clean, fresh,
free from oil, acid, organic matter or other deleterious substances. Provide
water for curing that does not contain impurities in sufficient amount to
etch concrete surfaces, or cause discoloration to concrete indicated to
remain exposed and unpainted.
C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C 330.
D. Water: Drinkable and not detrimental to concrete.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be
compatible with other required admixtures.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Sika AER"; Sika Corp.
b. "Micro -Air" Master Builders.
c. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair "; W.R. Grace.
d. "Air -Mix" or "Perma- Air "; Euclid Chemical Co.
B. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 5
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Eucon WR -75 "; Euclid Chemical Co.
b. "Pozzolith 322N "; Master Builders.
c. "Plastocrete 160 "; Sika Chemical Corp.
d. "Chemtard "; Chem - Masters Corp.
e. "Prokete -N "; Prokete Industries, Inc.
C. High -Range Water- Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494,
Type F or Type G.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Sikament 300 "; Sika Chemical Corp.
b. "Eucon 37 "; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Rheobuild "; Master Builders.
d. "PSP "; Prokrete Industries, Inc.
D. Water - Reducing, Accelerator Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Daraset' ; W.R.Grace & Co.
b. "Accelguard 80 "; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Pozzutec 20 "; Master Builders.
E. Water - Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Pozzolith R "; Master Builders.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
V
Irmo
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
+r.. 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 7
is
b. "Eucon Retarder 75 "; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Daratard -17 "; W.R. Grace.
d. "Plastiment "; Sika Chemical Co.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Non - metallic, Non -shrink Grout: CRD -C 621, factory premixed grout.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Set Grout"; Master Builders.
b. "Sonogrout "; Sonneborn- Rexford.
c. "Euco-NS"; Euclid Chemical Corp.
d. "Five Star Grout"; U.S. Grout Corp.
B. Underlayment Compound: Free - flowing, self - leveling, pumpable, cement -based
compound for applications from one inch thick to feathered edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "K -15 ", Ardex, Inc.
b. "Flo Top ", Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Levelex ", L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Sonoflow, Sonnobom Div. ChemRex
e. "Thoro Underlayment Self - Leveling ", Thoro System Products.
C. Bonding Compound:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Euco Weld ", Euclid Chemical Co.
b. "Weld- Crete ", Larsen Products Corp.
c. "Everweld ", L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. "Daraweld C ", W.R. Grace & Co.
e. "Hornweld ", A.C. Horn, Inc.
a. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620 ", Euclid Chemical Co.
b. "Epoxtite Binder 2390 ", A.C. Horn, Inc.
c. "Epabond ", L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. "Concresive Liquid LPL ", Master Builders, Inc.
e. "Sikadur 32 Hi- Mod ", Sika Corp.
2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by laboratory trial
batch method as specified in ACI 301. Use an independent testing facility
acceptable to the Owner and the Structural Engineer for preparing and reporting
proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used by the
Owner for field quality control testing.
B. Submit written reports to Structural Engineer of each proposed mix for each class
of concrete at least 30 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete
production until mixes have been reviewed by Structural Engineer.
C. Design mixes to provide concrete with the following properties, as indicated on
drawings and schedules:
1. 4000psi 28 -day compressive strength, regular weight; w/WC ratio, 0.44
maximum (non -air entrained), 0.35 maximum (air entrained).
D. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component material suitable for use on dry or
damp surfaces. Provide material "Type ", "Grade" and "Class" to suit project
requirements.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 8 L
in
D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by
Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by
Structural Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength
results must be submitted to and accepted by Structural Engineer before using in
work.
E. Admixtures:
1. Use water - reducing admixture or high range water - reducing admixture
(super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability.
2. Use non - chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at
ambient temperatures below 50 °F.
3. Use high -range water - reducing admixture in exterior exposed concrete,
i unless otherwise indicated. Add air entraining admixture at
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having total air content with a tolerance of plus -or -minus 11/2 percent
within following limits.
a. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure)
3 /a inches maximum aggregate.
F. Only use admixtures for water - reducing and set - control with Design Engineer's
approval and in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed directions.
G. Water - Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum
water - cement (W /C) ratios as follows:
1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45.
2. Subjected to deicers /watertight; W/C 0.40.
3. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C 0.40.
4. Floor slabs interior; W/C 0.50 or less.
H. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of
placement as follows:
Iwo
1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.
2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 4 inches and not more than
6 inches.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
i., 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 9
4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein
specified.
3_2 FORMS
3. Concrete containing High -Range Water Reducing admixture (super -
plasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after addition of admixture to site -
verified 2 to 3 inches slump concrete.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 95 °F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above
95 °F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of
water introduced.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, inserts and vapor retarders with
placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and
lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until such loads can be
supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and
structures are of correct size, shape, construction tolerances complying with
ACI 347.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to
cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shows, and to obtain
accurate alignment, locations, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures.
Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications,
reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other
features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes.
Solidly butt joints and provide back up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 10
Is
F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or
rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge
11.1 joints.
he
L
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep
to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,
reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for
cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete.
Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.
G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to
accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings,
recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and
securely support items built into forms.
H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive
concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete
is placed. Retighten forms and bracing after concrete placement as required to
eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
3_3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars ", for details and methods of reinforcement placement
and supports, and as herein specified.
1. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement
placement and concreting operations. If vapor retarder is damaged, repair
to satisfaction of Inspecting Agency prior to placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials
which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement for
formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support
�..► reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by
Structural Engineer.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
�.+ 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 11
3.4 JOINTS
position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed
into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install sheets of welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap
adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps
in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
F. Provide adequate time for inspection of formwork and reinforcing installation by
concrete testing agency prior to depositing concrete.
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not
indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as
acceptable to Structural Engineer. Pour sequencing and construction joint layout
to be submitted, reviewed and approved by the Owner's Concrete Testing Agency.
B. Provide keyways at least 1' /2 inches deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and
between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be
used for slabs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue
reinforcement and welded wire fabric across construction joints, except as
otherwise indicated.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting
drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to
be attached thereto.
B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing, and to receive
thru-wall flashings in outer face of concrete at exterior walls, where flashing is
shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions.
C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for
slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide
and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of
strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.
3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Clean re -used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to
return forms to acceptable surface condition.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 12
L
a
B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form- coating compound before
reinforcement is placed.
C. Thin form- coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, amount, and under
conditions of form - coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow
excess form- coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with
in -place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust - preventative form oil or otherwise protect
against rusting. Rust stained steel formwork is not permitted.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing
steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work.
Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are
not used.
B. Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting, and Placing Concrete ", and as herein specified.
1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no
concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to
cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot
be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its fmal location.
C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not
deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where
placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still
plastic to avoid cold joints.
W., 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand - spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and
withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther
�.. than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to penetrate rapidly
the preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete
that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to
time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 13
D. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced
strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures in
compliance with ACI 306R and as herein specified.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 °F,
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete
mixture temperature of not less than 50 °F, and not more than 80 °F at point
of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not
place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing
antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in
mix designs.
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time
of placement below 90 °F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice
may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water - soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so
that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature
immediately before embedment in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is
placed.
4. Use water - reducing retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions.
18 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of
mix.
E. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously
impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with
ACI 305R and as herein specified. ►.
A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the
finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the `'
concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 14 W-
a
L
6
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
►+ 2. Use continuous water -fog spray.
1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3
inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof
tape.
Yaw
E. Provide curing, compound as follows:
1. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final
finishing operations are complete (within two hours and after surface
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 15
holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections
exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
B. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to surface exposed to view,
which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after
form removal.
1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other
abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply
cement other than that created by the rubbing process.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture
loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation control material.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull
floating, but before power floating and troweling.
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete
surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less
than 7 days.
B. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture - retaining cover, by mono-
molecular film forming compounds and by combinations thereof, as herein
specified.
C. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
D. Provide moisture cover curing as follows:
water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation
by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's direction.
Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be
covered with fmish materials applied directly to concrete.
F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of
beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in
place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed,
continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping,
and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls,
columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing
at not less than 50 °F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
sufficiently hard not to be damaged by form removal operations, and provided
curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and
other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until
concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine
potential compressive strength of in -place concrete by testing field cured
specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C. Form facing material may be removed four days after placement, only if shores
and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing
material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new
formwork.
L
tar
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean
surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and L
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 16 6.
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of
work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other
trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with
in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or
required to complete work.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
2. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color
164 surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture
and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective
surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Structural Engineer.
Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fms and other projections on surface; and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form
r.. tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects
that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired,
remove and replace concrete.
Imo
r
secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete
surfaces, except as acceptable to Structural Engineer.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Patching defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Structural Engineer.
1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over Y4 inch in any dimension,
and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case
to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the
concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush coat
the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching
mortar after bonding compound has dried.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs,
for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface
and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 17
sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template
having required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect
durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in
excess of 0.01 inch wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or
completely through non - reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling,
pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has
cured at least 14 days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and
replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent
concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable
to Design Engineer.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not
exceeding 1 inch diameter, but cutting out and replacing with fresh
concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square
cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3 /4 inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide
concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and
finish to blend with adjacent fmished concrete. Cure in same manner as
adjacent concrete.
D. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter when
directed by Structural Engineer by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut
out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen
cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting
of one part portland cement to 21/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh
sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry
pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not
less than 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Owner and Concrete Testing
Agency and Structural Engineer for method and procedure, using specified epoxy
adhesive and mortar.
F. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of
Structural Engineer, Concrete Testing Agency and the Owner.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 18
10
los
L
3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The Owner will employ and pay for a testing laboratory to perform tests and to
submit test reports.
1. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete will
include the following:
A. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C 94 as noted below:
1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test of each truck load, at point of discharge.
Additional tests, when concrete consistency exceeds maximum allowable
slump by more than 1 /2 inches.
2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal
weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight
concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air - entrained concrete.
3. Concrete Temperature: Test each truck load, hourly and when air
temperature is 40 °F (4 °C) and below, and when 80 °F (27 °C) and above;
and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed.
Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when
field -cure test specimens are required.
5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 9; one set for each day's pour
exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. over and
above the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day;
one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
a. When frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests
for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5
randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
b. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu.
�• yds., strength test may be waived by Structural Engineer if, in his
judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
+�- c. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of
companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 19
and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-
place concrete.
d. Strength level of concrete will be considered unsatisfactory if
averages of sets of three consecutive strength test result falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
A. Test results will be reported by the Concrete Testing Agency in writing to the
Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours after tests.
Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete
type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength
at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength
and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests.
A. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive
device shall be performed when requested by the Structural Engineer but shall not
be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
A. Additional Tests: The testing service shall make additional tests of in -place
concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other
characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Structural
Engineer. Testing service will conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
Contractor shall pay for such tests and repairs when unacceptable concrete is
verified.
A. The Owner's testing agency will conduct floor flatness and level tests to assure
compliance with specifications.
A. Testing Agency will monitor floor slabs concrete curing, coloring, and hardening
operations to assure compliance with the specifications.
A. The Contractor will bear all costs for correcting conditions not meeting specified
criteria and shall accomplish corrective measures within specified time constraints.
END OF SECTION 03300
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 03300 - 20
Iw
he
int
ior
w
SECTION 05400 - COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING
b'" PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior non -load bearing steel stud framing.
2. Interior load - bearing steel -stud framing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry" for exterior sheathing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
2. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum board and nonload-
bearing metal -stud framing and ceiling- suspension assemblies.
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of cold - formed metal framing, accessory, and product
specified.
C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -
formed metal framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including
mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental
framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and
attachments to other units of Work.
1. For cold - formed metal framing indicated to comply with certain design loadings,
include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional
engineer who was responsible for its preparation.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 1
D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of cold - formed metal framing certifying that
their products comply with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield
strength, tensile strength, total elongation, and galvanized- coating thickness.
1. In lieu of mill certificates, submit test reports from a qualified independent testing
agency evidencing compliance with requirements.
E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with
requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing
compliance with requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing:
1. Expansion anchors.
2. Powder - actuated anchors.
3. Mechanical fasteners.
4. Verticals slide clips.
H. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction that evidence cold - formed metal framing's compliance
with building code in effect for Project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold -
formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in- service performance.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code -- Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 2
is
C. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated assemblies are
indicated, provide cold - formed metal framing identical to that tested as part of an
assembly for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire- Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations listed in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory," or by Warnock Hersey or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect cold - formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage
during delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Store cold - formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate
to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold - formed
metal framing by one of the following:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
2. Dale Industries, Inc.
3. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
4. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc.
5. Unimast, Inc.
6. United Construction Supply.
7. United States Steel.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), zinc coated according
to ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M), and as follows:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 3
1. Coating Designation: G 90 (Z 275).
2. Grade: D (33,000 psi) minimum.
3. Thickness: 16 gage, minimum.
2.3 WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs of web depths
indicated, on drawings with lipped flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Uncoated -Steel Thickness: as indicated on drawing.
2. Flange Width: 1 9/16" (41 mm), minimum.
3. Web: Punched or unpunched.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, unpunched, of web
depths indicated, with straight flanges, and complying with the following:
1. Uncoated -Steel Thickness: Match steel studs.
2. Flange Width: Manufacturers standard deep flange.
2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel - framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing
members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi for 21/2 to 6" members and
40,000 psi for members larger than 6 ".
B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless
otherwise indicated, as follows:
1. Supplementary framing.
2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
3. Web stiffeners.
4. Gusset plates.
5. Deflection track and vertical slide clips.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 4
in
6. Stud kickers and girts.
bog
7. End closures.
8. Reinforcement plates.
2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
ilmi
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), zinc coated by the hot -dip
process according to ASTM A 123.
B. Cast -in -Place Anchor Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568,
Property Class 4.6); carbon -steel hex -head bolts and studs; carbon -steel nuts; and
flat, unhardened -steel washers. Zinc coated by the hot -dip process according to
ASTM A 153.
C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Powder - Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 10 times the design load, as determined by testing
per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion- resistant coated, self - drilling, self - threading steel
drill screws.
F. Head Type: Low- profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard
elsewhere.
G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 or DOD -P- 21035, with dry film
containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining
grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage - compensating
agents, plasticizing and water - reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107,
with fluid consistency and a 30- minute working time.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 5
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold- formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line,
and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's
recommendations and the requirements of this Section.
1. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates.
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
3. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening,
as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold -framed
metal framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating
joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold - formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or
screw fastening, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery,
and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance
variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus
1/8" from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum
fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold - formed metal framing assembly to a
maximum out -of- square tolerance of 1/8 ".
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 6
h
it
r
3.1 EXAMINATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements, including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of cold - formed metal framing. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges
or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
�r.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cold- formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it
may be field assembled.
B. Install cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and
with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations
and the requirements of this Section.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
lu 2. Fasten cold - formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening,
as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted.
a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold -framed
metal framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating
joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.
C. Install framing members in one -piece lengths, unless splice connections are
indicated for track or tension members.
D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently
stabilized.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWIIA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 7
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold - formed metal
framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
F. Install insulation in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed
joists, and double studs, inaccessible upon completion of framing work.
G. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of
manufacturer's standard punched openings.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold - formed metal framing to a maximum allowable
tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10 feet (1:960)
and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8" (3 mm)
from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening
requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.4 NONLOAD - BEARING EXTERIOR CURTAINWALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and
securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.
B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of
studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm) minimum or as indicated on structural
drawings.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb
walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent
transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install deflection track and anchor to building structure.
2. Connect studs with vertical slide clips to continuous angles or
supplementary framing anchored to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48
inches (1219 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 8
L
it
•
1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in curtainwall stud beneath
deflection track when curtainwall studs are not fastened to an additional
top track.
2. Bridging: Combination of flat, steel -sheet straps of width and thickness
indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching
studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud
webs or flanges.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web
stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, solid blocking, firestopping, anchors,
fasteners, and stud gins, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall - framing
system.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on
fabricated and installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint
according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer to ensure that cold - formed metal framing is without damage or
deterioration at the time of application of sheathing or gypsum board.
END OF SECTION 05400
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05400 - 9
SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Floor expansion joint cover assemblies.
2. Wall expansion joint cover assemblies.
3. Ceiling and soffit expansion joint cover assemblies.
B. Related Sections:
PART 2- PRODUCTS
1. Section 03300 "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for cast -in anchorage and frames for
expansion joints cover assemblies in concrete floors, parking decks, and walls.
2. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for walls, partitions and ceilings with
expansion joints.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Furnished by Mall Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In addition to requirements of these specifications,
comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for phases of Work,
including preparing substrate, applying materials, and protecting installed units.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions
for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05810 - 1
Iwo
D. Provide inset as required for installation of Sears side expansion joint receiver. Mall
Owner will furnish and install expansion joint assembly including Sears side
receiver. Sears contractor is to closely coordinate with this Mall Owner to provide
blockout on Sears side as required and furnish and install grout fill on Sears side
6r following installation of expansion joint assembly.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
IV
A. Protect exposed surfaces from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION 05810
IS
to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later
placement and grouting -in of frames.
C. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Coordinate provision of anchorage devices and
6, fasteners by others where necessary to secure expansion joint cover assemblies to
construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
16+ 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 05810 - 2
•
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood nailers and blocking.
2. Gypsum sheathing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05400 "Cold- Formed Metal Farming ".
2. Section 09300 "Ceramic Tile ".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Submit the following according to Sears General and Special Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and
generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment manufacturer's
instructions for handling, storing, installation, and finishing of treated material:
1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by
treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net
amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 1
L
e
2. For water -borne treated products include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site.
3. For fire- retardant treated wood products include certification by treating plant
that treated material complies with specified standard and other requirements.
4. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire- retardant treated wood
products with requirements indicated.
5. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each type of fire- retardant- treated wood product from a single source and by
a single producer.
1.6 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and
contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood and other panels.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place
spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with DOC PS 20
"American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of
inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC)
Board of Review.
B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory- marked with grade stamp of
inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and
identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and
mill.
1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of
each piece.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 2
2.2 BOARDS
C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual
sizes as required by DOC PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber
of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S -DRY or KD -19) and of following
species and grade:
1. Southern Pine "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules, or any species graded
"Construction Boards" per WCLIB or WWPA rules.
2.3 GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND FURRING
A. Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including support
bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members.
B. Fabricate from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive
wood preservative treatment.
D. Grade: "Standard" grade light- framing -size lumber of any species or board -size
lumber as required.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. Provide fasteners of size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended
by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for mails,
staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers
and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each
use including recommended nails.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or pressure
treated, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI
Type 304 stainless steel.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 3
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105.
C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER -272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and where indicated, flat washers.
2.5 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. Where lumber or plywood is not fire - retardant treated or is indicated as preservative -
treated wood, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2
(Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB
Quality Mark Requirements.
B. Pressure -treat above - ground items with water -borne preservatives to a minimum
retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln -dry lumber and
plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent.
Treat indicated items and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, plywood sheathing,
blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,
vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
C. Pressure -treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-
borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf.
D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after
treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4: Inspect each piece of
lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Hickson Corp.
2. Hoover Treated Wood Products.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 4
3. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc.
2.6 FIRE- RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. Where fire- retardant - treated wood is indicated, or required by code, pressure
impregnate lumber and plywood with fire- retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA
C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated; identify "fire- retardant-
treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire- retardant- treated wood for
which a current model code evaluation/research report exists that is acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidences compliance of fire- retardant-
treated wood for application indicated.
B. Interior Type A: For interior locations use fire- retardant chemical formulation that
produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions
present after installation:
1. No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness, and fastener holding
capacities below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that
are based on tests by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood
products identical to those indicated for this Project under elevated temperature
and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions.
2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes
related to manufacture and treatment.
3. No corrosion of metal fasteners results from their contact with treated wood.
C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
1. Use in connection with roofing, flashing, and waterproofing.
D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged
or defective pieces.
E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Interior Type A Fire - Retardant- Treated Wood:
a. "Dricon," Hickson Corporation.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 5
b. "Pyro- Guard," Hoover Treated Wood Products.
c. "Flameproof LHC -HTT," Osmose Wood Preserving Co, Inc.
2. Exterior Type Fire - Retardant- Treated Wood:
a. "Exterior Fire -X," Hoover Treated Wood Products.
2.7 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Sheathing: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems- -Class PB."
B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Board: Gypsum board designed as an exterior substrate for a
weather barrier, consisting of a noncombustible water - resistant core, essentially
gypsum, surfaced with glass mats on face and back, partially or completely
embedded in core, and with unsurfaced square edges. Comply with ASTM C 1177.
1. Thickness: 1/2"
C. Product:
1. "Dens -Glass Gold FR "; Georgia - Pacific Corp.
2.8 TAPES AND SEALANT
A. Sheathing Tape: Tape specifically designed and manufactured to seal joints in
gypsum sheathing against water and air infiltration, formulated with an adhesive that
permanently bonds to gypsum sheathing substrates, and as indicated below:
1. Linerless, polypropylene sheathing tape, 0.0027 inch (0.07 mm) thick, 21/2 inches
(63 mm) wide, composed of oriented polypropylene backing coated with
permanent acrylic adhesive formulated to adhere to gypsum sheathing surfaces.
2. Polyethylene tape, 0.025 inch (0.63 mm) thick, 3 inches (76 mm) wide,
composed of polyethylene backing coated with synthetic - rubber -based adhesive.
3. Self - adhering, glass -fiber tape, 2 inches (51 mm) wide, 10 -by -10 or 10 -by -20
threads per inch (25.4 mm), of type recommended by tape manufacturer to use
with siliconized emulsion sealant in sealing joints and fasteners for gypsum
sheathing, and with a history of successful in- service use.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 6
4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. No. 8086 Contractor Sheathing Tape; 3M Construction Markets.
b. Perma -Tite Tape - -PGM 207A; PermaGlass -Mesh, Inc.
c. POLYKEN 612 Seam Seal Tape; Polyken Technologies.
d. Quik -Tape; Quik -Tape, Inc.
A. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Product complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with
sealant tape and gypsum sheathing, recommended by manufacturers of both
sheathing and tape for use with glass -fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed
fasteners.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elmer's Siliconized
Acrylic Latex Caulk; Borden, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry
construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with
minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line
and cut and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate
fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to
allow attachment of other construction.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated.
E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting of wood; predrill to prevent splitting.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 7
•
A. Install wood grounds, nailers and blocking, where shown and where required for
screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as
required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with
other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and
nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during
installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete
placement.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS. BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
3.3 WOOD FURRING
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finished work.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for Wood Frame Construction,"
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated.
C. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with National Evaluation Report No. NER-
272 for pneumatic or mechanical driven staples, P- Nails, and allied fasteners,
"Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with N.F.P.A.
"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction," and recommended
nailing/fastening schedule of the applicable codes.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Install gypsum sheathing board according to manufacturer's instructions and GA -253
"Application of Gypsum Sheathing ".
B. Install square end and edged sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and
centered over, studs. Install solid blocking where end joints do not bear against
framing sills or track. Fasten gypsum sheathing board to perimeter framing and to
each stud with self - drilling, bugle -head screws, located a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5
mm) from ends and edges of board units, as follows:
1. Space fasteners to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 8
2. Space fasteners not more than 8 inches (203 mm) apart around perimeter at edge
and end supports and 8 inches (203 mm) apart at intermediate supports.
3.6 TAPE AND SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Sheathing Tape: Apply sheathing tape to joints in sheathing; overlap tape by not less
than the tape width at joint intersections.
1. For polyethylene tape, apply primer, specified by tape manufacturer, to sheathing
surfaces. In addition, apply polyethylene tape, 2 inches (50 mm) square, to
completely cover each exposed fastener.
2. For glass -fiber tape, apply approximately a 3/8 -inch (9 5 mm) bead of
siliconized emulsion sealant to tapes along joints and embed sealant into tapes
along their entire surface with a trowel. In addition, apply sealant with a trowel
to each exposed fastener so that fasteners are completely covered.
END OF SECTION 06100
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ROUGH CARPENTRY NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 06100 - 9
w
to
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L22 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building insulation in batt form.
L33 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those
whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM
test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
B. Single- Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building
insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
L4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, sunlight, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products of one of the
following:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 1
1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
c. Johns- Manville.
d. Owens /Corning Fiberglass Corp.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Faced Glass Fiber Batt or Roll Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining
glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type
III, Class A (blankets with foil- scrim -kraft vapor - retarder facing on one side with
maximum flame spread of 25 or less).
1. Combustion Characteristics: Unfaced blanket/batt passes ASTM E 136 test.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
values of 25 and 50, respectively.
3. Thermal Resistance: R -11 for interior partitions and walls, R -19 for exterior
walls and above ceilings.
23 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond
insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or
corroding either insulation, anchors, or substrates.
B. Adhesively Attached Pin Anchors: Perforated plate, 2 inches square, welded to
projecting pin, with self - locking washer, complying with the following requirements:
1. Plate: Zinc- plated steel, 0.106 inch thick.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWIL.A, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 2
ead
Ihd
•
a. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect
ends with capped self - locking washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to
determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do
not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3_2 PREPARATION
2. Pin: Copper- coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 inches in diameter,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated and, with washer in place, to hold
insulation tightly to substrate behind insulation.
3. Self - Locking Washer: Mild steel, 0.016 inch thick, size as required to hold
insulation securely.
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations, including removal of projections
that might puncture vapor retarders.
3_3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and
application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to
project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific
recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove
projections that interfere with placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness.
D. On walls use faced insulation, or unfaced insulation with sheet vapor barrier. Where
Irm
no interior drywall surface is in placed. Provide wire screen retainer for insulation.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 3
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with
manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to
substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement
and support of units. Employ fastening system to ensure that insulation remains in-
place fully extending to perimeter of area to be covered.
B. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction. Do
not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
3_5 PROTECTION
1. Friction fit roll and batt insulation between studs.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of
insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or
enclosures where insulation cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BUILDING INSULATION
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07210 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
L
..
in
I.
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L22 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
i,, 1. Metal counter flashing and base flashing.
•
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
13 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper
sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability
of work and protection of materials and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2_1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper T -5 or T -6, 0.040 -inch minimum
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Solder: For use with stainless steel, provide 60 - 40 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32),
with acid - chloride type flux, except use rosin flux over tinned surfaces.
B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non - corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material
being fastened.
b`'i C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally
free of sulfur, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat.
irk
D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non - drying,
nonmigrating sealant.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007
Iwo 07 -164 (TUKWII.A, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 1
E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and
fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint
sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2 -part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound,
recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior /interior nonmoving joints including
riveted joints.
G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for
waterproof/weather - resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.
H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5 -1b. Rosin -sized building paper.
I.
J.
Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6 -mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to
decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154.
Reglets: Metal units of type and profile indicated, compatible with flashing indicated,
noncorrosive.
K. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with
material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.
L. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed -cell polyethylene or other soft closed -cell material
recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure
movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet.
M. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
2_3 FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop- fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply
with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for
waterproof and weather - resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running
work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the
work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions
and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without
excessive oil- canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 2
L
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For stainless
steel tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with
epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water /weatherproof, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic
sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required
for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of
elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive
substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous
coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer /fabricator.
F. Downspouts: Formed 0.032" thick aluminum.
2_4 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
B. High Performance Coating: Fluoropolymer Two -Coat System: Primer coat and
color coat utilizing not less than 70 percent Elf Atochem "Kynar 500" polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight, based coating; comply with AAMA 605.2.
1. Color: Match exterior building wall color as approved by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 INSTALLATION REOUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for
thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true
to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weatherproof.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 3
B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of
polyethylene underlayment.
C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
D. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated. Where
shown Where shown in concrete, furnish reglets to trades of concrete work for
installation as work of Division 3 sections. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets
to trades of masonry work, for installation as work of Division 4 sections.
E. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap -in seal arrangement or by welding in
place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated
and depending on degree of sealant exposure.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of
metal or deterioration of finishes.
B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection
of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be
without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 07600
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07600 - 4
inr
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below:
a. Joints between different materials.
b. Perimeter joints of door frames, and storefront.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and guides of interior doors.
c. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08800G1ass and Glamg'for sealants used in glamg.
2. Section 09300 Tile'for sealing tile joints.
1_3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish
and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or
deterioration of joint substrates.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 1
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed
to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause
no staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
L4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and
cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds.
2. Manufacturer's inspection and maintenance procedures.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead
samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors
available, for each product exposed to view.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required.
Install joint sealant samples in Minch wide joints formed between two 6 -inch long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint
sealants.
E. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply
with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
F. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in Quality Assurance"
article.
G. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer
indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have
been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant
manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
H. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance
with requirements specified.
I. Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation
methods demonstrate acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 2
►y
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer approved in writing by the
sealant manufacturer.
B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing
laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of
laboratory- submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience
and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying
progress of the Work.
C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant
materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.
D. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant
based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current
product formulations within a 24 -month period preceding date of Contractor's
submittal of test results to Architect.
1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance,
adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low -
temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of
heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering.
2. Include test results performed on joint sealants after they have cured for 1 year.
1_6 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with
labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration
period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent
materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
13 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under
the following conditions:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 3
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 °F (4.4 °C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where
joint widths are less or more than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for
application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than seven days after
completion of exterior doors, windows and storefront.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the sealant manufacturer and
installer, agreeing to repair or replace sealants that fail in material or workmanship
within ten years after the date of Substantial Completion.
B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owners of other rights or remedies the Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to
and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that
are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors: Unlimited custom colors chosen by Architect to match color of adjacent
surfaces, for exterior silicone and polyurethane.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 4
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing
elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade,
Class, and Uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is
specified, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and
cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the
specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and
remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses
indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide on the following:
1. Single -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealants:
a. Mameco Vulkem 921"
b. Pecora Corp. Dynatrol I"
c. Peterson Iso -Flex 881"
d. PRC Permapol RC -1"
e. Sika Corp. Sikaflex 1 a"
f. Tremco Dymonic"
2. Single -Part Neutral- Curing Silicone Sealants:
a. Dow Corning 790"
b. GE Silpruf
c. Rhone - Poulenc, Inc. Rhodorsil 5C"
d. Sonnebom Sonolastic Omniseal
e. Tremco Spectrum 1"
2.3 SOLVENT- RELEASE - CURING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent - release -curing
acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT -S -00230 or both,
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 5
with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint
width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated
for Project without failing cohesively:
1. percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15
percent.
B. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent - release - curing,
polymeried butyl sealant complying with ASTM C 1085 and formulated with
minimum of 75 percent solids to be nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack -free time
of 24 hours or less.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acrylic Sealant:
a. 60Unicrylic,'Pecora Corp.
b. PTI 738,'Protective Treatments, Inc.
c. PTI 767,'Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. Mono,'Tremco, Inc.
2. Butyl Sealant:
a. BC- 158,'Pecora Corp.
b. P11 757,'Protective Treatments, Inc.
c. Sonneborn Multi- Purpose Sealant,'Sonnebom Building Products Div.,
ChemRex, Inc.
d. Tremco Butyl Sealant,'Tremco, Inc.
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining;are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers;and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and
laboratory testing.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 6
2. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas,
nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
i,.,, 3. Proprietary, reticulated, closed -cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a
density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with
water absorption less than 0.02 gmskc per ASTM C 1083.
irr
4. Any material indicated above approved for use with sealant by sealant
manufacturer.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining
Y�r resilient at temperatures down to -26 °F (- 32 °C). Provide products with low
compression set and of sie and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant
depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
L
m
is
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining,
nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below
and of sie, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Open -cell polyurethane foam.
D. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint
filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in
sealant failure. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable.
2_6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint sealant- substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous
surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint
substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants
and surfaces adjacent to joints.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 7
2.7 LOCATIONS OF USE
A. Single -Part Non -sag Urethane Sealant: Interior control and expansion joints and
interior side of perimeter joints around doors and windows in exterior wall.
B. Single -Part Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant: Exterior joints unless otherwise noted.
C. Acrylic or Butyl Sealant: Interior joints around perimeter of door frames, under
exterior door thresholds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with
installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the
following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent,
protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility
by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water
repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglaied surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous
joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing
out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazd surfaces of ceramic tile, and other
nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 8
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant - substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's
recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond;do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3_3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements
apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for
use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions
indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during
application and at position required to produce the cross - sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant
application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used
between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 9
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants
directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses
provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross - sectional shapes
and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion
of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to
joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not
approved by sealant manufacturer.
2. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where
indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess
depth and at locations indicated.
3_4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07901
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL JOINT SEALANTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 07901 - 10
bow
L
in
SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1A RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall and ceiling access panels.
2. Types:
a. Painted Steel, trimless at gypsum wallboard.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies'for installation in gypsum board
walls and ceilings.
2. Section 09900 Painting'for field applied finish.
1_3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each type of access panel, including details of construction relative
to materials, individual components, profiles, fmishes, and fire- protection ratings.
C. Shop drawings showing locations, quantities, sies, fabrication and installation of
access panels and frames, including details of each frame type, elevations of door
design types, locking provisions, anchorage, and accessory items.
L4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain access panels for entire Project from one
source and by a single manufacturer.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 1
B. Sie Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard sie units,
which may vary slightly from sies indicated. Show on shop drawings.
L55 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sies for access panels needed to gain
access to concealed equipment, and indicate on shop drawings specified under
Submittals "Article. Show on shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2_1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1. Cesco Products
2. J.L. Industries
3. Karp Associates, Inc.
4. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
5. Milcor, Inc.
2_2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366A 366M commercial - quality, cold - rolled steel sheet with
baked -on, rust- inhibitive primer.
23 ACCESS DOORS
A. Trimless, Flush Access Doors for Gypsum Board: Units consisting of frame,
concealed edge trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following
requirements:
1. Frame: 0.0598 -inch- (1.52 -mm -) thick steel sheet.
2. Door: 0.0747 -inch- (1.90 -mm -) thick steel sheet.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 2
3. Concealed, Gypsum Board Edge Trim: 0.0299 -inch (0.76 -mm) inc- coated or
galvanied -steel sheet with face flange formed to receive joint compound.
4. Hinge: Continuous type.
5. Latches: Bolt or cam type, operated by flush key device.
2A FABRICATION
A. Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. Steel and Stainless Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded
construction. Grind and polish welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to
types of substrate indicated.
1. For gypsum board assemblies furnish frames with concealed edge trim for
gypsum board or gypsum base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door
installation, including sies of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as
locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring
devices for access panels that must be built into other construction. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
12 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access panels.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face
panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Coordinate with appropriate trades for quantities, sies and locations.
3_3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 3
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08310
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACCESS DOORS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08310 - 4
►r
1 _ 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 08340 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Overhead coiling grilles, including curtains, guides, counterbalance
mechanisms, hardware, operators, and installation accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08310 "Access Doors ".
2. Section 8710 "Door Hardware ".
3. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for openings.
4. Electrical connections are specified in Division 16.
L33 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data, roughing -in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and
size of overhead coiling grille. Include operating instructions and maintenance data.
C. Shop drawings for special components and installations that are not fully
dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.
D. Samples of grille curtain with specified fmish.
A. Furnish overhead coiling grille units by one manufacturer for entire Project.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 1
B. Anchorages: Furnish anchoring devices that must be built into gypsum board
partitions for installation of overhead coiling grille units. Provide setting drawings,
templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorage devices. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2A MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of
AlumaTek, contact Rachel Maxwell, at 1- 800 - 647 -7049.
1. Unless otherwise noted, provide "Model AT -9/LX" (polycarbonate panels).
2. Where required by code, provide "Model AT -9/PF" (perforated aluminum
panel(s)).
2.2 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. Counterbalance grille by means of steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel
shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to the curtain. Use grease- sealed
ball bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance: Hot - formed, structural - quality carbon steel, welded or seamless
pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support the rolled -up curtain
without distortion and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of
span under full load.
1. Furnish spring balance of one or more oil - tempered, heat - treated steel helical
torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform
adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast -steel barrel plugs to
secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
2. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case - hardened steel, sized to
hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
C. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design, cold - rolled steel plate.
23 ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATORS
A. Furnish electric operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided
by grille manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory- pre -wired motor
controls, gear - reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, remote - control stations, and
control devices.
to
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 2 �-
to
B. Provide hand- operated disconnect or a mechanism for automatically engaging a
sprocket- and -chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation.
Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include an
interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency
operator is engaged or door is deadlocked.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit- switch
adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
D. Operator Type: Furnish wall or bracket - mounted operator units consisting of electric
motor, worm -gear drive from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm -gear drive
from reduction box to a gear wheel mounted on counterbalance shaft, and
disconnect- release for manual operation. Provide motor and drive assembly of
horsepower and design as determined by manufacturer for size of unit required.
E. Electric Motors: Provide high - starting torque, reversible, constant -duty, Class A,
insulated electric motors with overload protection, sized to move grille in either
direction, from any position, at not less than .25 foot nor more than 1 foot per
second.
ia
1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with
building electrical system.
2. Provide open -drip -proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type 1
enclosure.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary- contact, key switch on interior side of
wall, operating mechanism so grille can be stopped at any point in its travel and to
remain in position until movement is reactivated by turning key.
1. Provide interior units, full - guarded type, recessed - mounted, heavy -duty, with
haw general - purpose NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
G. Automatic Reverse Control: Provide each grille with bottom rail sensor and safety
Iwo device which will stop grille from fully closing and immediately stop downward
travel and reverse direction to fully opened position if an obstruction is in the way.
1. Connect to control circuit. No exposed wires are permitted.
H. Provide automatic electric lockout that prevents motor from operating when curtain
is in an opened or closed position and locks are engaged. No exposed wires
permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 3
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, in
accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified
here.
B. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test and
adjust grilles to operate easily, free from warp, twist, distortion, or binding.
END OF SECTION 08340
1
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL OVERHEAD COILING GRILLS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08340 - 4
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2. Frames for entrances.
3. Storefront -type framing system at entrances and clerestory.
4. Power assist door openers with guards.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08800 "Glass and Glazing," glazing requirements for aluminum
entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be factory glazed.
2. Section 08710 "Finish Hardware," lock cylinders.
3. Division 16: Electrical service and final connections for power door operators.
1_3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance
characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the itsvi corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to
provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors
shall function normally over the specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range
of 180 °F (100 °C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance,
stress on glass, or other detrimental effects.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
�++ 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 1
C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that
comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration
requirements indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies
capable of withstanding wind pressures of 40 psf inward and 40 psf
outward acting normal to the plane of the wall.
D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with
ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or
permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing
members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear
span.
1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure
deflection of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be
equivalent to the wind load specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175
of the clear span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test.
2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure
deflection parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind
pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load
shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the
design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member
and the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 ". The
clearance between the member and an operable door or window shall be at least
1/16 inch.
E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an
air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding
operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test
pressure differential of 1.57 psf.
F. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration
(excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per
sq. ft.
G. Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal- break" construction,
provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503
showing condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 2
als
1.r
L
1
H. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U -value of
not more than 0.65 BTU /(hr. x sq. ft. x °F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when
tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.
1_4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:
1. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
2. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
3. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
C. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required,
including:
1. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work.
2. Elevations at' /4 -inch scale.
3. Detail sections of typical composite members.
4. Anchors and reinforcement.
5. Hardware mounting heights.
6. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
7. Glazing details.
D. Coordinate hardware and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete
designations of every item required for each door opening.
E. Submit two samples of aluminum finish specified on 12" long sections extrusions of
material to be used on project. Where color or texture variations are anticipated,
provide additional sets of samples indicating extreme limits of variations.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 3
1. Construction Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the
right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and
workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories.
F. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing
laboratory showing that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested
in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance
characteristics indicated.
G. Certification of the installer, by the aluminum entrance and storefront manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems
produced by a nationally recognized firm experienced in manufacturing standard
systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of
successful in- service performance.
1. Extrusions and components assembled by local fabricators not permitted.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems
fabricated by a firm approved in writhing by the manufacturer. The fabricator shall
have sufficient production capacity to produce components required without causing
delay in progress of the Work.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer approved in writing by the
manufacturer.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain entrance and storefront systems from one
source and from a single manufacturer.
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional
requirements of aluminum entrance and storefront work required and are based on
the specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other
referenced manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and
profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect.
The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original
protective packaging.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 4
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or
concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene
sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid
significant or permanent damage.
1_7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.
1_8 WARRANTY
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and
coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, and installer,
agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air
infiltration.
2. Faulty operation.
r "" PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3. Deterioration of metals, metal fmishes and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and
runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
2A MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company Inc. "Tri -Fab
451T" shear block assembly for exterior entrance storefront and clerestory, or equal
Imo system manufactured by one of the following:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 5
1. Amarlite Architectural Products.
2. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc.
3. YKK AP America, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required fmish; comply with ASTM
B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and
ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM
A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and
strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing"
section of these specifications.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated
steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non - corrosive and
compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw - anchor into aluminum members less
than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic
stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non - corrosive
pressed -in splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of
hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws
that match the fmish of member or hardware being fastened.
E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179 -inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or
0.026 -inch thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by
manufacturer for compatibility with other components.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high - strength aluminum brackets and
reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless
steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip
galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 6
in
H. Compression Weather stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible
r ,. weather stripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or
molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.
lb,., I. Sliding Weather stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping of
wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip
backing, complying with AAMA 701.2.
ihNi
2_3 HARDWARE
A. Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items
other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.
B. Provide heavy -duty hardware units as indicated, schedule, or required for operation
of each door, including the following items of sizes, number and type recommended
by manufacturer for service required; fmish to match door. Finish schedule is for
exterior doors.
1. Offset Pivot Sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Provide exposed parts
of cast aluminum alloy. Provide top, bottom and intermediate pivot for each
door leaf.
2. Surface - Mounted Overhead Closer: LCN 4040 - Cush x 3049 CNS Arm 85°
series type with cover, for parallel -arm -type mounting installation. Comply
with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
closer size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated
frequency of use.
3. Mortise type cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying
into the building system.
I '"' 4. Deadlocks: Mortised maximum security three -point deadlock, with minimum f-
inch long pivoted bolt and stainless steel strike box; comply with ANSI A156.5,
Grade 1. On one leaf of each bank of doors, deadlock shall be furnished with an
exit indicator similar to Adams Rite's Option 4089.
5. Push Bars: Forms and Surfaces "Series DT -1211 x 33," 11/4" diameter, US32
polished stainless steel with concealed mounting.
6. Pull Handles on exterior doors main entrance doors: Forms and surfaces "Series
DT -1211 x 12," 11/4" diameter, US32 polished stainless steel with concealed
mounting.
oft
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 7
7. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill
finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots.
8. Door Holder: Glynn Johnson. 100 -H.
2A POWER ASSIST DOOR OPENERS:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dor- O- Matic, "SR Swing." Contact Sears Account Representative at (708) 867-
7400 or (800) 543 -4635.
2. Gyro Tech, Inc., Division of Lanson Ind., Contact Sears Account Representative
at (414) 679 -0045, (414) 679 -2505 - FAX.
B. One door at each new exterior entrance to the Main Store shall be equipped with a
power assist door opener. A button controlling the exterior door, shall be positioned
on the outside of the building and inside the entry area.
C. Hard wire interior controls and radio transmit exterior controls.
D. Provide: Low energy units to comply with ANSI A117 and A156 -19, adjustable
time delay, safety stop and close when meeting an obstruction. Wall- mounted push
button actuation, with universal handicapped symbol. Interior push button to be by
Curran Engineering CE -635 or equal. Exterior push button to be satin stainless steel
post mounted system by Curran Engineering CE- 910/911 -615 or equal. See
drawings for locations.
E. Closer finish to match storefront and entrances frames.
2_5 COMPONENTS
A. Storefront Framing System for: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems
fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include
sub -frames and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush
glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop -
fabricate and pre- assemble frame components where possible. Provide window
frame sections without exposed seams.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive
resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece.
Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 8
r1
irr
v
r
B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame
assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with
manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads.
C. Stile -and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated
with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods
or j- bolts.
1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without
disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing
164 stops, with exterior stops anchored for non - removal.
2. Design: Provide 1 inch -thick doors of design indicated.
ire
a. Medium Stile that complies with code requirements (minimum — 3 ' /z"
nominal width and 10" bottom rail).
D. Aluminum Closure: Provide 0.090" thick aluminum sheet with spray applied
thermal insulation on concealed side.
2_6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile
requirements are indicated on the drawings.
1. Thermal -Break Construction: Fabricate storefront framing system with an
integrally concealed, low- conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior
materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal -to -metal
contact. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for
similar projects.
B. Complete fabrication, assembly, fmishing, hardware application, and other work to
the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and
grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed fmish surfaces. Complete
these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.
`" 2. Do not drill and tap for surface - mounted hardware items until time of
installation at project site.
3. Pre -glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 9
C. Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld
spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical fmish.
1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to
minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.
D. Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance
requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
E. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a non-
absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use
coatings containing lead.
F. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting
members.
1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not
have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in
the sample pair submittal.
G. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops. At
other edges, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised
into door edge.
1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weather stripping in bottom door rail,
adjustable for contact with threshold.
2. At interior doors and other locations without weather stripping, provide
neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact.
23 FINISHES
.A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum fmishes
C. High Performance Organic coating: AA- C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned
with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid
chromate- fluoride- phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below).
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 10
L
L
im
ihr
Prepare, pre - treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 3 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 3 -coat thermo-
cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and
fluorocarbon color coat, and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and
clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent Elf Atochem "Kynar 500"
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with AAMA 605.2.
2. Color and Gloss: Kyner Bone White.
3. Use at storefronts and door frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, for compliance with requirements indicated,
installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum
entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with
the installation.
3_2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for
installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members,
doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established
lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with
the following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 'A inch in
any total length.
2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two
identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements
shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
in
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 11
4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of framing at comers shall
not exceed 1/32 inch.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after
fabrication.
2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with
alkali resistant coating.
E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface - mounted hardware items. Comply
with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use
concealed fasteners wherever possible.
F. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with joint fillers or gaskets to
provide weather -tight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for
sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other
panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, not pre - glazed by
manufacturer.
H. Coordinate and install power assist door button post on bridge construction.
3_3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without
binding, and for weather -tight closure.
3_4 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising
care to avoid damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the
"Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing
and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.
15 PROTECTION
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 12
110
r
r
NM
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08410 - 13
•
If
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction
period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or
deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08410
�.J
leg
VD
Val
NI
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Vim
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L22 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for
doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections
as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. Items:
1. Lock cylinders and keys.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 08310 for mall rolling grill.
2. Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances and StorefrontsTor aluminum entrance
door hardware, except cylinders.
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors.
2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by the Owner.
La COORDINATION
A. Coordinate hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation.
Furnish other trades with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations.
B. Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at
time of door hardware selection, furnish types, fmishes, and quantities of door
hardware, including fasteners, and Owned maintenance tools required to comply with
specified requirements and as needed to install and maintain hardware. Furnish or
replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items at no
cost to Sears.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 1
C. Provide secured lock -up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware jointly
with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered
materials.
L4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections. In addition to the copies provided to the Architect, provide (1) copy to the
Owner - Construction Planning Manager.
B. Product data including manufacturers technical product data for each item of door
hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and
other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper sie, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organic
schedule into Hardware setsindicating complete designations of every item
required for each door or opening. Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, sie, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on
Drawings.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
1i
g. Door and frame sies and materials.
h. Keying information.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential
product data in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in
the Project construction schedule. Submit fmal schedule after samples, product �..
data, coordination with shop drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and
similar information has been completed and accepted.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 2
6
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how
final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch, lock sets, hinges,
closers, etc.) from a single supplier.
B. Supplier: Approved hardware suppliers are as follows:
1. Classic Hardware Company
Contact: Joseph Giovenco
388 Gunderson Drive
Carol Stream, IL 60188
Phone: 630 -597 -0050 Ext. 102
Fax: 630 -597 -0051
or as accepted by Owner§ Representative.
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
1_5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1_6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware
schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by
hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers
clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of
approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same
container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and
hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation
(shop or Project site).
E. Provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet
installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 3
1_7 MAINTENANCE
replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses
both before and after installation.
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialied tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Sears'continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2A MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of
lesser (commercially recognizd) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for
finish designations indicated.
2.2 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Integrate with existing grandmasterfnasterkey system for Project.
1. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required
(master, or grandmaster).
2. Comply with Sears instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise
indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to
be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
a. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies
cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, DO NOT
DUPLICATE."
B. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
C. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock.
1 Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2. Deliver keys to key control system manufacturer.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 4
B. Removable construction core cylinders shall be used on all locks. No keys are to be
delivered to the General Contractor with the locks. All permanent keys for all finished
hardware are to be sent to Sears Field Construction Project Manager. Transmittal of said
keys for proper installation will then be handled by Sears.
boo 3_2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
r
3. Deliver keys to Sears -Field Construction Project Manager.
D. Equip locks with manufactured removable core cylinder.
E. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or brone, stainless steel, or nickel
silver.
2_3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock
sets (or push -pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide fmishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the
Architect's sample.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less
than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware fmishes of brass, brone, and
aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix 'NL'is used with standard fmish
designations to indicate lio lacquer."
E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware fmishes are those
listed in ANSIBHMA A156.18, Materials and Finishes,'fncluding coordination with
the traditional U.S. fmishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 INSTALLATION
A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 5
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate
freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or
occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices L
to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
C. Instruct the Owner personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door
hardware and hardware fmishes.
PART 4 - HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Hardware suppliers shall provide quantities and door hardware equipment according to the
construction bid documents and the following schedule:
A. Hardware Set No. 1: (MALL Entrance #403) All other Hardware by door Manufacturer .
(a) Cylinder Schlage 20 -061 -626
(b) Control Panel Wall Mounted Cylinder Schlage 20- 061 -626
B. Hardware Set No. 2 -: (Exterior Vestibule Doors #401 &02)
All other Hardware by door Manufacturer.
(a) Cylinder (Mortise) Schlage 20- 062 -626
(b) Thumbturn Cylinder Schlage IL631 -626
(c) Decals Vinyl Decal to read `PHIS DOOR MUST REMAIN
UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS"
END OF SECTION 08710
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL DOOR HARDWARE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08710 - 6
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
Iry
SECTION 08800 - GLAlNG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glamg for the following components and assemblies, including
those specified in other Sections where glamg requirements are specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Entrances and other doors.
2. Storefront construction.
B. Related Sections: Refer to the following sections of specifications for glass products
covered in other assemblies and not specified in this section.
1_3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or
fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glanng standard.
B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage
and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer§
directions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration
in metallic coating.
C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's directions.
Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through
glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass
standard.
D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due
to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and
cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust,
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLA NG
08800 - 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for
maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions.
L4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide glaing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand
normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable),
without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:
defective manufacture,, fabrication, and installation;failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight;deteriorati on of glaing materials;and other defects in
construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analying Project loads and in- service conditions.
Provide glass lites for the various sic openings in the thicknesses and strengths
(annealed or heat - treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in doors, and exterior walls is ' /a
inch.
2. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat -
treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not
exceed the following:
C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass - framing members and glaing
components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 °F (67 °C), ambient;180 °F (100 °C), material
surfaces.
2.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and
under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed
glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed
glass, determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of
analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on
type of glass.
b. 1 lite per 1000 for lites set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of
wind or snow.
GLAB'TG
08800 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
b
L
L
1
V
haw
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each glass product and glaing material indicated.
C. Samples for verification purposes of 12- inch - square samples of each type of glass
indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 -inch -long samples of
each color (except black) required for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.
Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color
of the adjoining framing system.
D. Product certificates signed by glaing materi als manufacturers certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glaing materials bearing
manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass,
provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognied certification
agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that
glaing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glaing sealants.
Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant
performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant
indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glaing
materials including sealants, glaing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.
G. Product test reports for each type of glaing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing
compliance with requirements specified.
H. Maintenance data for glass and other glaing materials to include in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
1_6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glaffig Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organiations below, except where more stringent requirements
are indicated. Refer to these publications for glaing terms not otherwise defined in
this Section or in referenced standards.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLAYNG
08800 — 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1. FGMA Publications: FGMA Glaing Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA TIR -A7 Sloped Glaing Guidelines'and Glass
Design for Sloped Glamg."
3. LSGA Publications: LSGA Design Guide."
4. SIGMA Publications: TM -3000 Vertical Glaing Guidelines'and TB -3001
Sloped Glaing Guidelines."
B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI X7.1 and testing requirements of 16
CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently
marked with certification label of Safety Glamg Certification Council (SGCC)
or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently
marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate
certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
3. National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL).
D. Gla er Qualifications: Engage an experienced glaier who has completed glaing
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of
successful in- service performance.
E. Single- Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each
product indicated below:
1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated.
2. Heat - treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated.
3. Laminated glass of each (ASTM C 1172) kind indicated.
4. Insulating glass of each construction indicated.
F. Single- Source Responsibility for Glaing Accessories: Obtain glaaig accessories
from one source for each product and installation method indicated.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLAFNG
08800 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
0
how
L8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glaing materials
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08800 - 5
li
taw
Imo
G. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant
manufacturers, samples of each glass, gasket, glaing accessory, and glass- framing
member that will contact or affect glaing sealants for compatibility and adhesion
testing as indicated below:
1. Use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming and
other specific preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum glaing
sealants adhesion to glass and glaing channel substrates.
a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions during installation.
2. Submit not less than nine pieces of each type and fmish of glass - framing
members and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic,
laminated, insulating units) for adhesion testing, as well as one sample of each
glaing accessory (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility testing.
3. Schedule sufficient time to test and analye results to prevent delay in the Work.
4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and get sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including
using special primers.
5. Testing is not required when glaing sealant manufacturer can submit required
preparation data that is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous testing
of current sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility with submitted
glaing materials.
13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glaing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glaing materials from condensation, temperature
changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes,
comply with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and
sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glaing when ambient and substrate
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GLAB EG
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
manufacturer or when glanig channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 °F (4.4 °C).
L9 WARRANTY
A. Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by
manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass
units that deteriorate as defined in Def initions'article, fo.b. point of manufacture,
freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to
handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass
manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date
of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by
insulating glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated
glass units that deteriorate as defined in the Defmitions'article, f.o.b. point of
manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated
below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not
to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's
published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2A MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass by one of the following:
1. Ford Glass.
2. PPG.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLASNG
08800 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
r
3. Pilkington.
4. Guardian Industries Corp.
5. Spectrum Glass Products.
6. Viracon, Inc.
2_2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated
below, and Quality q3 (glamg select).
1. Class 1 (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
2. Class 2 (Low E, heat - absorbing, and light- reducing).
23 HEAT - TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Fabrication Process: By horiontal (roller- hearth) process.
B. Uncoated, Clear, Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated
surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glamg select),
kind as indicated below.
1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated.
2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
C. Coated, Clear, Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated
glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glamg select),
with coating type and performance characteristics complying with requirements
specified under coated glass products;kind as indicated below:
1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated.
2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLABVG
08800 - 7
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed
lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and
with other requirements indicated.
1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements
specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and
conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units.
2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLA1'1G SEALANTS
A. Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select gla ng sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating
glass units, and gla ng channel substrates, under conditions of installation and
service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for
selecting glaing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated
and conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with selections made
by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of
type indicated.
B. Elastomeric Glaaig Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically
curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C
920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glamg Sealant Product Data Sheet
at the end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM classifications for
Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is
specified in Elastomeric Glarng Sealan t Product Data Sheet, provide products,
when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719, with the capability to withstand the specified percentage change
in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with
other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Tremco Inc.
2. Pecora Corp.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLA}NG
08800 - 8
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
•
Ir.y' B. Expanded Cellular Glaing Tape: Closed -cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory
coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner
protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Back - Bedding Mastic Glaing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
a. P11 303 Glaing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc.
b. S -M 5700 Poly -Glae Tape Sealant, Schnee - Morehead, Inc.
c. Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco Inc.
d. Extru -Seal, Pecora Corp.
e. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
f. Dyna -Seal, Pecora Corp.
g. P11 626 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
h. S -M 5710 H.P Poly -Glae Tape Sealant, Schnee - Morehead, Inc.
`' i. SST -800 Tape, Tremco, Inc.
2. .Back- Bedding Mastic Glaing Tape With Spacer Rod:
Iwo
bow
•
3. General Electric.
2.6 GLAE'1G TAPES
A. Back - Bedding Mastic Glaing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a
solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with
nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass
manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper
backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.1.
2. AAMA 806.1.
Imo
3. AAMA 807.1.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GLABVG
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 08800 - 9
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
a. PTI 303 Glamg Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc.
b. Pre - shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc.
c. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
3. Expanded Cellular Glaaig Tape:
a. Norseal V -980 Closed -Cell Glaaig Tape, Norton Company.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLA)'TG MATERIALS
A. Provide products of material, sie, and shape complying with referenced glaing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glaing materials
involved for glaing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility
with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus
or minus 5.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral
movement (side - walking).
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining,
nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed -cell plastic foam of density, sie, and
shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant
performance.
2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAJNG PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glaing products in sies required to glae openings
indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions,
and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced
glaing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLAB'TG
08800 - 10
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
b
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for
installation indicated.
tin
B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt-glaltd monolithic lites in a manner that
produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
2_9 GLASS SCHEDULE
1. Type A`.' 1'Insulating glass; %lear laminated outerpane, low E coating on
surface 2;',Iftir spaceaaminated inner pane. (Heat strengthen as required.)
2. Type B'is the same except outer pane is gatin opaque'instead of dear."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for silt, squareness,
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass - framing members.
B. Do not proceed with glaing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3_2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glaing channels and other frami ng members receiving glass immediately
before glaing. Remove coatings from substrates.
3.3 GLAfl'TG, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glaing materials, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated, including those in referenced glaing publications.
B. Gla ng channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLAYNG
08800 - 11
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass
comers. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to
shift glass units within openings;do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar.
Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horiontal edges so
edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by
manufacturer's label.
2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site.
Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,
when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as
determined by glass manufacturer and fabricator, and preconstruction sealant -
substrate testing.
E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sied and located to comply with
referenced glaing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set
blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass sies larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as
follows:
1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install
correct sie and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except
where gaskets and glaing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to
maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance
requirements.
2. Provide 1E -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width. With glaing tape, use thickness slightly less than
final compressed thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glaing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
3_4 TAPE GLAI 4G
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLABVG
08800 - 12
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
is
ID
OM
hem
D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed.
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges
are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and
sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horiontal, cover these joints
by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3_5 GASKET GLA1NG (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress
gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of gla ng stops.
3_6 SEALANT GLAEs1G (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and gla ng stops to maintain glass
face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep
systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth
of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
GLAS4IG
08800 - 13
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
B. Force sealants into gla ng channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete
wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
Install pressuried gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and
moisture pockets.
3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching
crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass
surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
build -up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in
any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction
period.
E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass
as recommended by glass manufacturer.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAENG
08800 - 14
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L22 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nonload- bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2. Gypsum board, fire rated and non -fire rated.
3. Glass -mat, water - resistant gypsum backing board installed with gypsum board
assemblies.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry'for wood blocking and glass -m at faced
gypsum sheathing.
2. Section 09511 Acoustic Panel Ceiling'for proprietary suspension system s.
3. Section 09900 Painting'for finishing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for
definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in
other referenced standards.
L4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose
STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire- resistance ratings
indicated.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 1
1_5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and
expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other units of Work.
D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components
certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single- Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for
gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single- Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board
and other panel products from a single manufacturer.
C. Single- Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials
from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel
products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
D. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire- resistance -rated gypsum board
assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the
following requirements:
1. Fire - Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 Fire
Resistance Design Manual'br design designations in UL Fire Resistance
Directory'br in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire
resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name
and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 2
j.
Imo
beg
hoi
hit
L
iW
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic,
and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1_8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental
conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840
requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more
stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: For non - adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,
maintain not less than 40 °F (4 °C). For adhesive attachment and fmishing of gypsum
board, maintain not less than 50 °F (10 °C) for 48 hours before application and
continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 °F (35 °C) when using temporary heat
sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too
rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2A MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Dale Industries, Inc.
b. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
c. MarinoW are (formerly Marino Industries Corp.).
d. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division.
e. Unimast, Inc.
2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Georgia - Pacific Corp.
b. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 3
c. United States Gypsum Co.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated:
1. Firestop Type C;Georgia - Pacific Corp.
2. Fire- Shield G;National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.
3. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core;United States
Gypsum Co.
4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core;United States
Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions
indicated.
B. Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion - resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Chemical anchor.
2. Expansion anchor.
C. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling
construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
D. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 inc coating, soft tem per, 0.062
inch (1.6 mm) thick.
E. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 inc coating, soft tem per,
0.162 -inch (4 1 -mm) diameter.
F. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and inc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 4
r
G. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and inc coated or protected with rust- inhibitive paint.
H. Channels: Cold- rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch (1.5 -mm) minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and 7A 6-inch (11.1 -m m -) wide flanges, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 1' 38.1 m m) deep, 475 lbi1000 feet (70 kgd00 m ),
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Furring Channels: !(119.1 m m) deep, 300 lbd 000 feet (45 kg100 m ), unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Finish: Rust - inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent
back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch (5 -mm -) wide minimum lip
(return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of
base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Depth: As indicated.
3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, D0) hot -dip
galvanied coating.
J. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 78122.2 m m),
and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, D0) hot -dip
galvanied coating.
2_3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, D0) hot -dip
galvanied coating.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90
degrees and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch (5 -mm -) wide minimum lip (retum), and
complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and for depth:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 5
1. Thickness: 20 gage minimum, unless otherwise noted.
2. Depth: As indicated.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's top runner complying with the requirements of
ASTM C 645.
1. Top runner with 24fnch (63.5 -m m -) deep flanges that either have V- shaped
offsets that compress when pressure is applied from construction above or have
slots 1 inch (25.4 mm) o.c. that allow fasteners attached to studs through the
slots to accommodate structural movement by slipping.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Depth: 1'1038.1 m m).
i) Superior Flex Track System (SFT);Delta Star, Inc.
ii) SLP- TRK;Metal -Lite, Inc.
D. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads to
expand and contract with movement of structure above while maintaining continuity
of the assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 645 except configuration,
of thickness indicated for studs and width to accommodate depth of studs indicated
with flanges offset at midpoint to accommodate gypsum board thickness.
1. Offset Configuration: Reveal design with offset recessing in from depth of stud.
2. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that
may be incorporated in the Work includes, but is not limited to, Fire Trak"
manufactured by Fire Trak Corp.
E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
F. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold- rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch (1 5 -mm) minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7 /16 -inch (11.1 -mm -) wide flanges, 1' aches
(38 1 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (45 kgA00 m ), unless otherwise indicated.
G. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying
with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M), length and
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 6
is
k.
width as indicated, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows:
1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
H. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, sie, corrosion
resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and
furring members securely to substrates involved;com plying with the
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.
2_4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will
minimie end -to -end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board
application.
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm)
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X where required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies.
3. Type: Proprietary type as required for specific fire- resistance -rated assemblies.
4. Type: Sag - resistant type for ceiling surfaces.
5. Edges: Tapered.
6. Thickness: 'finless otherwise required by code andbr the drawings.
a. Two layers of !wick at curved surfaces.
C. Glass -Mat, Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178, of type and
thickness indicated below:
1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 58115.9 m m) thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 58115.9 m m) thick, where required for fire -
resistance -rated assemblies.
3. Products: Dens - Shield Tile Backer" and Dens - Shield FR Tile Backer,"
manufactured by Georgia - Pacific Corp.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 7
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints
complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
A. Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure- sensitive or staple - attached, open- weave, glass -fiber reinforcing
tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of
gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based
products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended
use.
1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
a. All- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 8
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following
requirement:
a. Steel sheet inc coated by hot -dip process or rolled inc.
2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: Y"
a. Comerbead on outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges;face flange form ed to receive
joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim, unless otherwise indicated.
c. L -bead with face flange only;face flange form ed to receive joint
compound. Use L -bead where indicated.
d. U -bead with face and back flanges;face flange form ed to be left without
application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated.
e. One -piece control joint formed with V- shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
L
B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating
gypsum panels to steel framing.
C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
23 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
lin
A. Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with
referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
2. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel
members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed
hollow metal frames, cast -in- anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3_2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with
installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that provisions for
anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that
will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.
3_3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C
754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum
board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,
toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 9
and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with
United States Gypsum Co.'s Gypsum Construction Handbook."
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer
of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on
Drawings.
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
a. Provide slip- or cushioned -type joints as detailed to attain lateral support
and avoid axial loading.
b. Install deflection track top runner to attain lateral support and avoid axial
loading.
c. Install deflection and firestop track top runner at fire- resistance -rated
assemblies where indicated.
i) Attach jamb studs at openings to tracks using manufacturer's
standard stud clip.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring
members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members
as indicated.
14 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling
suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and
offset resulting horiantal forces by br acing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in form of trapees or equivalent devices. Sie supplem ental
suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 10
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire - tying, either directly to structures or to
devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a
manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not
cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-
place hanger inserts that extend through forms.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sies and at spacings indicated, but
not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so
that cross - furring or grid suspension members are level to within 18'lnch in 12 feet
as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel
members.
E. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as
indicated.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid
suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -
furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
15 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 11
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where
gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that
fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1$ inch from the plane formed by the faces
of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above
suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around
ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
1. Cut studs ',213 m m) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.
2. For STC -rated and fire - resistance -rated partitions that extend to the
underside of floortoof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural
surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other
members extending below floortoof slabs and decks, as needed, to
support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from
floor to underside of solid structure.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sies and at spacings indicated.
1. Space studs 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of
each gypsum board panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud
flanges first.
F. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none
indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
16 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum
panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216.
B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimie the num ber of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or
clamp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 12
Irr
L
Ism
ID
itta
tor
bre
more than 1 /16 inch (1 5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Install 5'h olding at exposed edges of gypsum board, where abutting other
materials. Spackle to provide smooth, continuous surface finish.
E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back - blocking is provided behind end joints.
Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at comers of
framed openings.
G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
I. Where indicated on drawings and required for fire or sound ratings, cover both faces
of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces, except in
chases that are braced internally.
1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
2. Where partitions intersect steel deck, steel joists, and other structural
members projecting below underside of floortoof slabs and decks, cut
gypsum panels to fit profile formed by pans, joists, and other structural
members;allow to 38 -inch wide joints to install sealant.
J. Isolate perimeter of nonload- bearing gypsum board partitions at structural
abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide ',to Bch (6.4 to 12.7 -m m -) wide
spaces at these locations and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of
gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural
surfaces with acoustical sealant.
K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application
and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical
applications.
L. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm)
o.c.
3_7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 13
A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall(iartition board application and at
right angles to framing.
2. On partitionsXvalls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimie end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of board.
B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set ceramic tile and
similar rigid applied wall finishes, provide the following:
1. Install glass -mat, water - resistant gypsum backing board panels to comply with
manufacturer's installation instructions at locations indicated to receive wall tile.
Install with ii inch (6.4 -m m) open space where panels abut other construction or
penetrations.
2. Install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to
produce a flat surface except at locations indicated to receive water - resistant
panels.
C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
18 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same
fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according
to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install cornerbead at external comers.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide
edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where
other types are indicated.
1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction
and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
2. Install L -bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are
installed and when partitions abut to ceiling.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 14
low
L
iro
ihm
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge
trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as
required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type
joint compound.
If
is
3. Install U -bead where indicated.
4. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated.
D. Install control joints as recommended by manufacturer and at locations indicated.
3_9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having
flanges not requiring tape.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as
recommended by trim accessory manufacturer.
E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board
finish per GA -214.
1. Level 3 for joints in stock areas.
2. Level 2 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a
higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and sound -
rated assemblies.
3. Level 3 where panels form substrates for tile.
4. Level 4 for other gypsum board surfaces.
F. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the fmish levels
specified:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or taping
compound. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all- purpose or
topping compound. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready - mixed, drying -type, all -
purpose or topping compound.
G. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill
(second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 15
heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as
needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration.
H. Where Level 2 and Level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint
compound and apply first coat of joint compound.
I. Tape and fmish glass -mat, water - resistant gypsum backing board to comply with
board manufacturer's directions.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. Provide final
protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure
gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09255
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09255 - 16
Imo
its
2. Contractor shall purchase stone wall tiles for mall entrance from Mall Owner to
match lot utilied by Mall Owner at remainder of Mall entrance. 200 sf has
been set aside for this purpose.
3. Contractor shall provide all the floor prep required to complete the work in a
' first class condition.
tir
Irr
v
U.
•
SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE
kiwi
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
taw
IWO
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Unglaed wall tile.
2. Stone floor tile.
3. Stone wall tile.
4. Dividerbdge strips.
5. Reducerlransition strips.
6. Premolded expansionbontrol joint.
7. Crack isolation membrane.
B. Scope of Work:
1. The Owner will furnish stone floor tile. Contractor shall furnish setting
materials, grout, accessories, tools and labor for installation of tile.
C. Related Sections:
1_3 SUBMITTALS
1. Section 09255 Gypsum DrywallTor tile backer board installed as part of
gypsum wallboard systems.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 1
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product data for each product furnished by Contractor.
C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion,
contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring. Record
measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations,
in consultation with Architect.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on substrate of
sie and construction indicated for products th at involve color and texture variations,
provide in sets showing full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile, and for each item furnished by the
Contractor, at least 18 inches square for tile unit 6 inches or less in sie and 24
inches x 36 inches for larger tile, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing
and grouted.
2. Full -sie units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
3. Metal edge strips in 6 -inch lengths.
4. Premolded expansiontontrol joint in 6'tengths.
E. Master grade certificates for each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by
tile manufacturer and Installer.
1_4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single - Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients
of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully
completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated
for Project.
C. Field- Constructed Mock -Up: Before installing tile, erect mock -ups for each form of
construction and fmish required to verify selections made under sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution.
Build mock -ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of Work.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CERAMIC TILE
09300 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1. Locate mock -ups on site in location and sie indicated or, if not indicated,
directed by Architect to show full scope of all typical patterns and conditions in
both hori8ntal and vertical planes. Unless otherwise noted, minimum sie of
each mock -up shall be 40 s.f.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Rework
mock -ups as directed by the Architect to achieve desired results.
3. Obtain Ownerg Representative acceptance of mock -ups before start of final unit
of Work.
4. Retain and maintain mock -ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging completed unit of Work. Accepted mock -ups in
undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of
completed unit of Work.
D. Post Installation Review: Contractor is alerted that the Architect may chain drag the
completed floor tile installation to sound for incomplete bonding. Tiles identified as
liollow%hall be removed and properly replaced by the Contractor.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, receive and store packaged materials in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI
A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freeing, foreign matter, and
other causes.
L 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to
comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Maintain temperatures at 50 °F (10 °C) or more in tiled areas during installation and
for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced
installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CERAMIC TILE
09300 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
A. For materials furnished by Contractor, deliver extra materials to Sears at designated
location. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below,
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly
describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full -sie units equal to 5 percent or 20
s.f., whichever is greater, of amount installed, for each type, composition, color,
pattern, and sie.
B. For materials furnished by Sears, return extra materials at designated location.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ANSI A137.1 American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic
Tile'for Standard Grade'tile.
B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns:
1. Provide selections indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat
tile, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mounting: Where factory- mounted tile is required, provide back or edge - mounted
tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is
indicated.
2.2 CERAMIC TILE MATERIALS
A. Stone Floor Tile (Furnished by Sears):
B. Stone Wall Tile available for purchase from Mall Owner (Contact is Nicholas Lee,
Westfield LLC, (206) 802 - 6010).
C. Grout
1. Floor: Non - staining grout applied with grout release:
a. Product: Mapei UltraColor polymer modified sanded grout or equal.
b. Match existing color and joint width.
2. Mall Wall:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
6
INN
a. Match products used by Mall.
23 THIN -SET LATEX - PORTLAND CEMENT SYSTEM: WALLS AND FLOORS
A. Latex- portland cement mortar: ANSI A118.4.
B. Latex- portland cement grout: ANSI A118.6.
C. Latex additive Bostik #25'acrylic additive.
24 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Pre - molded ExpansionControl Joint: Ceramic Tool Corp., CTC Model,'l;olor to
match grout.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Match existing, similar to Ceramic Tool Corp. " /32'blear
anodied aluminum metal edge with integral provisions for anchorage to mortar bed
substrate.
C. Reducer Strips: Ceramic Tool Corp. Tranx' §trip, 38'high.
2_5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and
manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or
additive content;type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing
containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts
of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application
indicated.
2_6 FIELD - APPLIED TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Where needed to prevent adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout,
protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating
them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating taking care not to coat
unexposed tile surfaces.
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Sure Klean Protec Tile'by ProSoCo applied as
protective coating prior to grout application and removed with excess grout prior to
application of sealer.
2_7 TILE CLEANER
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CERAMIC TILE
09300 - 5
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
A. ProSoCo, Inc., Vanatrol."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates in areas where tile will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of installed tile.
1. Expansion joints in tile shall follow manufactures recommendations.
B. Locate all cracks and joints in slab and record on shop drawing submittal. Prepare
cracks, cold joints and slab as directed by crack isolation membrane manufacturer
and install crack isolation membrane consistent with manufacturer's instructions. ,
Membrane width shall provide a minimum 12'CNobel Seal CIS) or 241Nobel Seal
TS) cover on each side of crack, subject to manufacturer's instructions relative to
specific conditions. Roll installed membrane with weighted roller as prescribed by
membrane manufacturer. Protect installed membrane from traffic and install fmish
material within time requirements established by membrane manufacturer.
C. Level uneven areas with self - leveling and& mortar screed underlayment as
conditions dictate. Level substrate surfaces to within 18'in 10' -0:' Where this is
not possible with underlayment due to high spot on existing slab, grind off high spots
and install underlayment. Substrate shall be sufficiently flat to ensure a maximum
lippage of 1 /161thickness of a penny) between adjacent tiles.
D. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy
films and curing compounds.
E. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed before installing tile.
F. Prepare slab edges abutting horinntal materials designated to remain to ensure a
flush transition acrose surface of existing and new material.
G. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
32 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile
installation standards included under American National Standard Specifications for
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CERAMIC TILE
09300 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation;'
comply with TCA installation methods indicated.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate
work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile
without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,
finish, or built -in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical
outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
ire
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown in the floor covering plan details, lay tile
in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are
same sie. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or
on each wall area. Adjust to minimie tile cutting. Pieces of tile smaller than one
half tile are unacceptable. Provide uniform joint widths to match existing.
F. Expansion and Control Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant - filled
joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during
installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after
installation of tiles.
If
the Installation of Ceramic Tile'that apply to type of setting and grouting materials
and methods indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at column centerlines, unless otherwise indicated.
Control joints shall be 3 /16'wide and consistent with TCA Handbook Method
EJ171.
2. Locate joints in tile surfaces within 'Ale width above joints or cracks in
substrates which have received crack isolation membrane.
3. Joints are to set on BostikHryoment - Ultra set minimum 30 mils thick the
width of the tile as recommended by the manufacturer where CTC control joints
are set.
4. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7
Section 5oint Sealers'tvhere tile abuts vertical surfaces.
5. Expansion joints shall be installed only across and never along the floor aisles
with ceramic tile.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CERAMIC TILE
09300 - 7
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards.
1. For latex - portland cement grouts, comply with ANSI A108.10.
33 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Porcelain Floor Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for
setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor
construction, and grout types:
1. Sales Area Floors: Latex - Portland Cement Mortar and Grout;ANSI A118.4 &
A118.6.
a. Concrete Subfloors: TCA F113.
b. Grout: Latex -ANSI A108.10.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile
flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that fmishes flush with top of tile.
C. Reducer Strips: Install with epoxy adhesive where exposed edge of tile flooring
meets exposed concrete floor surface.
3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements
indicated below for setting -bed methods, TCA installation methods related to
subsurface wall conditions, and grout types:
1. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4 and A 118.6.
a. Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243.
b. Grout: Latex -ANSI A 108.10.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they
are free of foreign matter.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped,
broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CERAMIC TILE
09300 - 8
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
le
L
L
boo
L
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
1. Protect installed floor tile work with 'craft paper and 14'tempered masonite
with taped joints covering during construction period to prevent staining,
damage, and wear. Protection shall be removed when directed by Sears Project
Manager and it may be at any time after construction substantial completion but
prior to store opening.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting
is completed except when shorter curing time is specifically approved by mortar
and grout manufacturer.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from
tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09300
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL CERAMIC TILE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09300 - 9
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
L2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09255 Gypsum Board SystemsTor ceilings.
2. Divisions 15 and 16 for ceiling diffusers, grilles, sprinlder heads, and
light fixtures.
1_3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
L4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single - Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of
acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
B. Single - Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of
suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the
Work.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 1
L
6
r
L
r..
tor
A. Furnish extra materials to the Owner, at designated location, that match
L products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are
identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1_5 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site
in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space
where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature
and a stabilied moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units
in any way.
L6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical
panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in
spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported
by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system
components and partition assemblies.
1_8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-siE units equal to
10.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2_1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong or equal.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 2
B. Match existing tile.
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated
that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Attachment Devices: Sie for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C
635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
1. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type
suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant
materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachment of hangers
of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the
following requirements:
1. i3ic- Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class
1 Inc coating, soft temper.
2. Sic Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design
load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield
stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch (2.69 -mm -) diameter
wire.
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, inc coated, or protected with rust- inhibitive paint.
E. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for
edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details: formed from
sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of
suspension system runners.
1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to
diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
F. Hold -Down Clips for Non - Fire - Resistance -Rated Ceilings: For interior
ceilings composed of acoustical panels weighing less than 1 lb per sq. ft.
provide hold -down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 3
r
tow
Ira
kir
L
has
Ilr+
23 NON - FIRE - RESISTANCE - RATED, DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION
SYSTEMS
A. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
runners roll formed from prepainted or electrolytic inc-coated, cold- rolled
steel sheet, with prefmished 15116 -inch (24 -mm -) wide metal caps on
flanges;other characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Heavy -duty system, Thigh, tees.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type,
as standard with manufacturer;1 tees.
3. Cap Material and Finish: Sheet steel with white baked paint finish.
B. Acceptable Manufactures:
1. Armstrong Prelude 7300 Series;' 15 /16'face dimension double web hot -
dip galvanied steel;heavy -duty, white color to match existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings
attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other
ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.
3_3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below
per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook."
irr
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with
ASTM C 636.
lor
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 4
2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic
Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.
3. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA
Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel
Ceilings."
4. CISCA Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply
with CISCA Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung
Suspended Ceiling Assemblies."
5. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No.
47 -18.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other
objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure
or of the ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions;offset resulting
horiontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum
produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at
spacings required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapees or equivalent devices. Sie supplemental suspension members
and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits
established by referenced standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports
above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly
to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure,
that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or
otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are
attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 5
is
how
that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
6. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with
a minimum of 4 tight turns. Fasten bracing wires to concrete with post
installed anchors.
7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten
hangers to powder - actuated fasteners, or drilled -in anchors that extend
through forms into concrete.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural
members.
10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member
supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown;and provide
hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
C. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked
with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into
suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at
borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short
axis of space.
b. Install panels with lead edge located in same direction.
2. Install hold -down clips within 20 feet of exterior door openings and in
areas required by goveming regulations, space as recommended by panel
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required.
3. Provide bracing wires at each comer of lighting fixtures and air ducts.
4. Seal perimeter of light fixtures by cutting panels to plane of reveal and
gasketing flanges.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 6
14 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge
moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's
instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and
replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired
to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09511 - 7
•
IMP
INN
ge
SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
tad
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient wall base.
1_3 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
L
►r
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
L22 SUMMARY
1 _ 4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1_5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
taw
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2_1 MATERIALS
A. Vinyl wall base:
•
A. Receive base at Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and
containers.
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient
temperatures maintained between 50 °F (10 °C) and 90 °F (32 °C).
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 °F (21 °C) in spaces to receive tiles for at
least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours
after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 °F
(13 °C).
B. Do not install base units until they are at the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
A. Install base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL RESILIENT BASE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09660 - 1
1. Kentile, type Kencove vinyl wall base, color - As selected by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where installation of base will occur, with Installer present, to verify
that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for base installation and comply with
base manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with base manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements.
B. Scribe, cut, and fit base to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,
built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds and nosings.
C. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile
manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
D. Apply base at all non tile finished walls constructed as part of this contract.
33 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing base installation:
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by base manufacturer.
2. Wash to remove black marks and soil.
B. Protect base against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
END OF SECTION 09660
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL RESILIENT BASE NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09660 - 2
low
SIM
r
1sr
►.,
SECTION 0968 - CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the
provisions of this Section.
1_2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prepare surfaces to receive carpeting.
B. Apply glue down carpeting on floor and base surfaces where indicated, complete
with required accessories.
C. Install edge strips where carpeting terminates at other flooring finishes
L33 OALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Company specialiing in carpet installation with not less than three (3)
years of documented experience.
1 _ 4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping, with mill register
numbers and tags attached.
B. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling.
L55 ENVIRONMENTAL REUIREMENTS
A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is
complete and ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved and completed.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to
installation, and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be
maintained.
C. Provide sufficient lighting.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CARPETING
0968 - 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1_6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Signed by Installer, agreeing to reinstall defective workmanship of
carpet work during two (2) year period following date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carpet: Furnished by Sears.
B. Carpet Type: Broadloom with Unibond'b acking glue down or carpet tile type at
all locations.
C. Adhesive: Furnished by Sears.
D. Nonmetallic Edge Strips: Furnished by Sears.
E. Carpet Base: Carpet furnished by Sears, cutting to 4'base dimension and binding
of top edge with approved thread color by carpet installer.
F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide seaming tape, thread, nails, and other items
recommended by carpet manufacturer and installer for the indicated conditions of
carpet use and as required for complete installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
11 PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances
which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet.
Allow floors to thoroughly dry.
B. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1 /4 inch in 10 feet,
noncumulative.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality
relative to acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CARPETING
0968 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1s
ler
1s
ira
bri
3_2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAY
A. Install underlay using maximum sied pieces. Securely adhere to subfloor. Lay out
underlay so that carpet seams will not fall directly over seams.
B. Butt edges firmly together and tight to edge of carpet gripper. Tape all joints.
C. Remove air pockets and ridges and slightly stretch. Anchor securely around
projections and contours.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CARPET (OVER UNDERLAY)
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Sears Project Manager approval.
B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation
between dye lots and matches adjacent existing carpet as applicable.
C. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match.
Ensure cuts are straight and true and unframed.
D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic.
E. Jin seams in recommended manner and so as not to detract from the appearance of
the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight,
not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
F. Lay carpet on floors with run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.
Lay carpet on stairs with the run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated
traffic to avoid peeking of backing at nosings.
G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next.
H. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other
vertical surfaces. Where wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet 1 /4 inch from walls to
allow for possible re- stretching. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surface
where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps.
I. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum
twenty -four (24) hours or until adhesive has set.
J Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at
edges, and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern
and texture match within any one area.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CARPETING
0968 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
K. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full
length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be
avoided, butt ends tight and flush.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CARPET (GLUE DOWN)
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Sears Project Manager approval.
B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation
between dye lots and matches adjacent existing carpet as applicable.
C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match.
Ensure cuts are straight and true and unframed.
D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic.
E. kin seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the
carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy Ensure seams are straight, not
overlapped or peaked and free of gaps.
F. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by
manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only
enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.
G. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic.
Lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic
to avoid peeking of backing at nosing.
H. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where
continuous through a wall opening.
I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other
vertical surfaces.
J Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled,
leaving no gaps.
K. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of
twenty -four (24) hours or until adhesive is set.
L. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at
edges, and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern
and texture match within any one area.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
CARPETING
0966 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
M. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full
length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be
avoided, butt ends tight and flush. Install carpet base at all Sales Area walls with
carpet flooring and other areas as designated.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
END OF SECTION 0968
CARPETING
0968 - 5
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1_2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Surface preparation priming, painting, and finishing of exposed interior items
and surfaces indicated to be painted.
2. Surface preparation, priming, and fmish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop - priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies"
C. Scope of Work:
1. Painting includes field- painting sales floor drywall soffits and ceilings.
2. Paint surfaces of partitions and column enclosures in sales area where new
gypsum board was applied as part of this project.
3. Paint surfaces exposed to view, whether or not colors or materials are designated
including overhead dock sectional doors, except where a surface or material is
specifically indicated not to be painted. Where an item or surface is not
specifically referenced, paint the same color as similar adjacent surfaces. If
finish is not designated, the Architect will designate finish and color.
4. Painting is not required on pre - finished items, fmished metal surfaces, concealed
surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless indicated otherwise to be field
painted to match an adjacent finish
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
a. Pre - finished items not to be painted include factory- fmished components,
unless indicated above.
PAINTING
09900 - 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
is
Uw
c. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating
equipment.
d. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or
other code - required labels or equipment name, identification, performance
rating, or nomenclature plates.
L
1_3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
L Sections.
B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers.
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for
use.
2. List each material and cross - reference the specific coating, finish system, and
application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and
general classification.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be
applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the
actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label
each sample as to location and application.
3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color
and texture only:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
b. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in
inaccessible areas.
PAINTING
09900 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
l A UALITY ASSURANCE
a. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide two 12 -inch square samples for each color
and finish. Step samples to show undercoats.
A. Applicator Qtlifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the
Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in- service
performance.
B. Single - Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other painted components, duplicate finishes of
prepared samples. Provide full -coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface
until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting
conditions for review of in -place work.
1. Final acceptance of colors and quality of application will be from job - applied
samples.
2. The Owner§ Representative will select a 100 sq. ft. surface to represent surfaces
and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply
coatings to designated surface according to the schedule or as specified.
a. Repeat designated applications as necessary for acceptance by Architect.
b. After finishes are accepted, this surface will be used to evaluate coating
systems of a similar nature.
c. Accepted surfaces may remain as part of the finished work.
13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages
and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following
information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
PAINTING
09900 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
tar
Ike
err
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
'"' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
the following:
1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 °F (7 °C). Maintain containers used in storage in
a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freeing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work
areas are protected from fire and health haards resulting from handling, mixing,
and application.
1_6 PROECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds
8 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 °F (3 °C) above the dew point; or to damp or
wet surfaces.
B. Apply paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 °F (10 °C) and 90 °F (32 °C).
1_7 ATTIC STOCK
A. Provide two gallons, clearly labeled of each color and sheen of each product used,
including primers, undercoats and fmished coats. Deliver to Owner on project site,
where directed by Owner.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
PAINTING
09900 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
6. The Sherwin- Williams Company (S -W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, fmish coat materials, and
related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
B. Material 1tlity: Provide the manufacturer's best - quality trade sale paint material of
the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the fmished paint systems to match the Architect's
samples.
23 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory- formulated primers that
are compatible with the substrate and fmish coats indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer.
a. Devoe: 5081 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.
b. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer.
c. Moore: Moore's Latex flick -Dry Prime Seal 201.
d. PPG: 6 -2 Qck -Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
e. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z0001.
f. S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B2W200.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
PAINTING
09900 - 5
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Interior, Flat, Latex -Based Paint: Ready - mixed, latex -based paint for a satin
finish.
, a. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Satin Wall Paint.
b. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint.
iro
c. Moore: Regal Wall Satin 215.
Mk, d. PPG: 8 Line Wallhide Satin Latex Paint.
e. P & L: Vapex Latex Satin Wall Finish.
f. S -W: Classic 99 Latex Eg -Shel B 30W200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
#i•
3_1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for
compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be
thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
INN
in
0
•
w
2A INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory- formulated fmish-
coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of fmish materials to ensure use of compatible
primers.
1. Notify the Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
PAINTING
09900 - 6
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide
surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these
items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to
cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re- prime. Notify
Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish -coat
material with substrates primed by others.
D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturer's directions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the
color of the fmish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
13 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
PAINTING
09900 - 7
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and fmishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Provide fmish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat
has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications
where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the
manufacturer's directions.
4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of
flat surfaces.
5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built -in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to
maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces
behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, non - specular black paint.
8 Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field - finished casework to
match exterior.
10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch -up
painted.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL PAINTING
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 09900 - 8
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated,
or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
re -coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint
does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.
14 CLEANING
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice sie as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire
system as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of paint, as
recommended by the paint manufacturer, to substrate that is required to be painted or
finished and that has not been prime- coated by others. Re -coat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to
ensure a fmish coat with no burn - through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
G. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, irregularity in texture, or other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
PAINTING
09900 - 9
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
L
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other ..
discarded paint materials from the site.
1
1
B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
3_5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide Wet PainThigns to protect ne wly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing
painting operations.
C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
16 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
B. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats.
a. Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer.
b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex -based paint.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING
09900 - 10
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirement for mechanical trades.
2. Materials.
3. Equipment electrical characteristics.
B. Related Sections:
1. General Requirements - Division 1 Sections.
2. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Section 15600.
1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications are intended to describe complete systems
as shown on the Drawings and as specified in appropriate Section. The Drawings and
Specifications are complementary, and work shown but not specified, or specified but
not shown, shall be the same as though required by both.
B. Minor items and accessories or devices reasonably inferable as necessary to the
complete and proper operation of any system shall be provided for such system whether
or not they are specifically shown or specified.
C. Drawings for mechanical system are diagrammatic and illustrate the general
arrangements of ductwork, equipment, etc.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 19,
2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15050 - 1
In
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification
Sections.
B. Shop Drawings: Detailed, dimensioned shop drawings as stipulated in the other Articles
of these specifications.
1. The following coordinated shop drawings shall be submitted for review:
a. All new equipment
C. Manufacturers' Literature: Manufacturers' literature and data sheets shall be submitted
indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials, and performance
information. The performance shall include capacities, pressure drop, design and
operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including
power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, shall be included.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Contractor shall furnish data covering
model, type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of recessed
ceiling heaters in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits; arrange and pay for all related governmental
inspections. Provide additional materials, parts, etc. and modify the Work as required
by governmental inspections and regulations.
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. The Contractor shall warrant all new mechanical work in accordance with the General
Conditions. Repairs, or replacements shall bear additional warranties. Warranties
beyond twelve (12) months shall be special written warranties. Special warranties shall
apply even though they exceed product warranties normally furnished by manufacturer.
Warranties shall extend from the date of substantial completion of the project and not
from the date of acceptance, or installation, of an item or device.
+r. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Use only new materials of best quality of their respective kinds.
, 1. Material shall be manufactured by reputable manufacturers who have been
producing the specified type of material to be sold and distributed in every major
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 19,
2007
y 07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15050 - 2
la
city in the United States for a minimum period of five (5) years unless otherwise
noted herein. All items containing electrical components shall be U.L. listed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Labor shall be performed rapidly, consistent with the Project Schedule, and in a
workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the GC, Architect and Owner.
3.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation, lubrication and
maintenance of all equipment.
B. Where applicable, copies of the National Board Certificates and of the operational test
reports shall be bound with the manual.
3.3 COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Cleaning Equipment, Completed Work and Premises: After the completion of all
installations, each system shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all paint and oil and
other foreign material. Each contractor shall also clean all foreign paint, grease, oil,
dirt, labels and stickers, etc., from all fixtures, equipment, piping, ductwork, etc.,
accumulated from his operation from the premises.
B. Demonstration: At the conclusion of his work and before final contract payment is
made, each mechanical contractor shall demonstrate and explain to the Using Agency's
personnel the function, operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems
installed by him. This shall include at least one (1) session and shall be of session
length as Architect/Engineer may direct.
END OF SECTION 15050
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 19,
2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15050 - 3
Yr
bog
SECTION 15300 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Section Includes:
1. Automatic Sprinkler System.
B. Visit the site to determine existing conditions and extent of work to coordinate with
the work of the other trades to establish a major routing of the piping and elevations.
C. Complete fire protection system as outlined in these specifications, including all
labor, materials and shop drawings needed to furnish and install a complete and
functional automatic sprinlder system, including all of the following:
1. All trim, fittings, offsets, hangers and accessories, necessary to provide a
complete and functional system.
2. Coordination of work with all other trades.
3. Shop drawings; including materials, Hydraulic Calculations and Piping Design.
Submit and Obtain approval as required by local jurisdiction.
4. Operating instructions and valve diagrams.
5. Record drawings.
6. Sleeves.
7. All required system testing.
8. All sprinlder heads between walls, and baffles, cornices and junction displays, or
other obstructions.
9. Warranty of all materials and labor.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 1
10. Pay for all permits, fees, state, federal and local taxes, and charges required for
this work.
D. Related Sections:
1. Division #01.
2. Division #15.
3. Division #16.
E. Related Items:
1. Cutting and patching.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.
C. AWS: American Welding Society.
D. AWWA: American Water Works Association.
E. FM: Factory Mutual.
F. FMRC: Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
G. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
H. UL: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Approved: Unless otherwise stated, materials, equipment or submittals approved by
the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Concealed: Where used in connection with installation of piping or conduit and
accessories, shall mean "hidden from sight" as in shafts, furred spaces, in soffits or
above suspended ceilings.
0
L
Ire
C. Contractor: The company awarded the prime contract for this work and any of its
sub - subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or fabricators.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 2
1.6
D. Exposed: Where used in connection with installation of piping or conduit and
accessories, shall mean "visible" or "not concealed."
E. FM Approved: Materials or equipment approved by Factory Mutual Research
Corporation and included in the most recent edition of the FM Approval Guide.
F. Furnish: Supply materials.
G. GPM: Gallons per minute.
H. Install: Install materials, mount and connect equipment or assemblies.
I. Owner: Sears, Roebuck and Co.
J. Provide: Furnish, install and connect.
K. psi: Pounds per square inch.
L. Remove: Remove material and equipment and restore surface.
M. UL Listed: Materials or equipment listed by UL and included in the most recent
edition of the UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory or other appropriate UL
directory. This listing indicates that periodic inspections of the production of listed
equipment or materials are made and that the equipment or materials satisfy UL
standards and have been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Sprinkler System Design Criteria: In accordance with applicable NFPA standards,
local authority requirements and the following criteria:
1. Sales Areas, Offices, Customer Service Area and small perimeter stockrooms
with shelving and 11 -12 foot high ceilings:
a. Sprinlder system with 1/2 -inch sprinkler orifice and a nominal K factor of
5.6, spaced to a maximum of 130 square feet per sprinlder. This system
shall be designed to provide 0.18 GPM per square foot to the most remote
2,500 square foot area with a combined hose demand of 250 GPM at the
nearest hydrant.
2. Sprinkler system pipe sizing shall be determined by hydraulic calculations in
accordance with NFPA 13 and the requirements of this specification.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing and Approval Agency: Factory Mutual Engineering (FM) and Underwriter's
Laboratory (UL).
B. Regulatory Agencies: State and local building codes and ordinances, fire department
and Fire Prevention Bureau requirements, and the requirements of FM shall apply.
C. Reference Standards: The following standards are included as part of this
specification as applicable:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as listed:
a. NFPA 13, 25, 231, 231C, 20, 24, 14, 14A, etc. Standard for the Installation
of Sprinkler Systems, 1989 edition.
2. Factory Mutual (FM) Data Sheets (2 -8N, 3 -26, 4 -4N, 8 -3, 8 -9, and others as
applicable).
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication: Fire Protection Equipment
List.
4. State /County/Local codes.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Submittal Procedures:
Contractor shall submit required number of prints and receive approval from the
local and state Fire Prevention Bureaus, the Building Department and any other
local/state authorities having jurisdiction over the project site.
2. Review of the shop drawing submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to comply with the contract, plans, specifications, NFPA
requirements, and state and local codes requirements.
3. Where any devices which are provided or furnished involve work by another
contractor, submit additional data copies directly to that contractor.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 4
him
L
l
h.
j
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Prepare shop drawings at minimum scale of 1/8" inch equals 1' -0" for plans, and
1 /4 inch equals 1' -0" for details. Show all piping, elevations of piping, sprinklers,
hangers, type of pipe, tube connections, outlets, flexible couplings, roof
construction, and occupancy of each area, including ceiling and roof heights as
required by NFPA 13. When welding is planned, shop drawings shall indicate
the sections to be shop welded and the type of welded fittings to be used. Shop
drawings shall indicate all information required by bid design document and
NFPA 13.
2. Fire protection system shop drawings shall include separate and complete
reflected ceiling plans indicating the location of each sprinlder, as well as piping
layouts. Provide additional sprinklers (over code minimum quantities) if
requested by the Architect, to obtain symmetrical ceiling layouts.
3. Hydraulic calculations shall be submitted with the shop drawings.
a. Hydraulic calculations shall include a water supply graph and hydraulic
cover sheet. The cover sheet shall include the name and location of the
calculated area, ceiling height, occupancy, design criteria, sprinlder spacing,
system type, sprinlder make, model, size, K factor and temperature rating,
flow requirements, C factor used, water supply data and source of
information, commodity storage class, height and configuration, and all
other information required by NFPA 13.
b. A safety factor of 5 psi or 10 percent, whichever is higher, shall be used
when developing hydraulic calculations as required by the Sears insurance
underwriter.
c. Catalog cuts of all the material equipment and fittings.
4. Design shall be based upon actual survey and all of the latest architectural,
structural, heating and ventilating, plumbing, electrical, and Owner's fixture,
rack and equipment drawings.
5. Contractor shall submit complete submittal packages. Partial submittals will be
rejected.
6. Contractor shall not start work until the shop drawings, catalog cuts and
hydraulic calculations have been reviewed and accepted by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction. Any changes to work that have not been reviewed shall be
at the Contractor's own expense.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 5
D. Manufacturer's Data: Provide data from manufacturer on the following devices,
including installation, maintenance, and testing procedures, dimensions, wiring
diagrams, etc.
1. Sprinklers and escutcheons.
2. Pipe, fittings and hangers.
3. All other system components.
E. Record Drawings:
1. Maintain at the site and up -to -date marked set of record drawings which shall be
corrected and delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work.
2. Upon completion, furnish the Owner with one reproducible sepia print and one
blueline print of each shop drawing, revised to show actual conditions.
F. Test Reports: Upon completion of final inspections and tests, as required by FM
Data Sheets and appropriate NFPA standards, submit copies of Standard Contractor's
Material and Test Certificates for piping.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A. Deliver all materials to area of project designated by the Owner's representative.
Vehicles shall not block fire lanes or fire doors during delivery of materials.
B. Store all materials within area designated by the Owner's representative. At the end
of each working day, return all materials to the designated area. Materials,
equipment, tools, etc. will not be left outside the storage area without the consent of
the Owner's representative.
C. Assume responsibility for the cost of all material handling, delivery and freight.
D. Maintain the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused
by this work. At the completion of the work, remove all surplus materials, tools,
etc., and leave the premises clean to the Owner's satisfaction.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. This Contractor shall provide a one -year written warranty against defects in material
and workmanship furnished under this contract. The costs of such warranty shall be
part of the purchase price. The warranty commences when the system and
installation are accepted by the Owner and Engineer.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 6
k
B. The warranty shall include all necessary material, travel, labor and parts to replace
defective components or materials at the job site.
C. Commence repair of any "in guarantee" defects within 18 hours of notification of
such defects.
D. Make allowances in the warranty to cover diagnosis of system defects which might
ultimately be the responsibility of others to correct. Notify the Owner and other
affected trades when this occurs.
E. Provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four hours of a
request for such service by the Owner during the warranty period. This service shall
be available on a 24 -hour per day, seven -day per week basis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall be FMRC approved and UL listed on NFPA 13.
B. All components shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and their FMRC approval and UL listing.
C. The naming of manufacturers in the specifications shall not be construed as
eliminating the materials, products or services of other manufacturers and suppliers
providing approved equivalent items.
D. The substitutions of materials or products other than those named in the
specifications are subject to written approval by the Owner.
2.2 OVERHEAD PIPING
A. All pipe shall be FMRC approved and meet the requirements of NFPA 13. Pipe
shall be new, designed for 175 psi minimum working pressure, conforming to ASTM
specifications, and have the manufacturer's name and brand along with the applicable
ASTM standard marked on each length of pipe.
1. Steel: Steel piping shall be black or galvanized. (Galvanized to be used for dry-
pipe systems.)
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Change of direction, unless otherwise noted, shall be accomplished by the use of
tow
fittings suitable for use in sprinkler systems, as defined in NFPA 13. Fittings
exposed to outside atmosphere shall be galvanized. Bushings shall not be used
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 7
unless written approval is obtained from the Engineer. Additional fittings, pipe and
hangers required by site conditions shall be provided at no additional cost to the
Owner.
B. Grooved fittings shall be joined using rubber gaskets from the same manufacturer.
Gaskets shall be listed for use for the appropriate application (wet or dry system).
C. All fittings shall be compatible with the piping and UL listed and FM approved for
use with the piping to be installed.
D. Push -on fittings shall not be used.
2.4 SPRINKLERS
A. Sales Areas, Offices and Consumer Service Area: Chrome plated semi - recessed, 165
degree (F) temperature rated sprinklers with two -piece escutcheons.
2.5 OTHER COMPONENTS
A. Hangers:
1. Inserts, powder driven studs, expansion cases or Phillips -type shells shall be
installed to support the 1 -inch through 4 -inch size sprinkler piping below
concrete construction. Inserts shall also be installed for all 5-inch or larger
piping below concrete construction. In lieu of the inserts, expansion cases,
spaced not more than 10 feet apart may be installed in accordance with NFPA
13. Powder driven studs shall be tested in accordance with FM data sheet 2 -8N
and NFPA 13.
2. Use beam clamps to hang piping from top chord or joist below steel deck and
joist construction. Do not hang piping from bottom chord or bridging.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Changes: Changes to sprinlder drawings shall be limited to necessary revisions
required for coordination, approved by the authority of jurisdiction. Make no
changes in sprinkler the layout as shown on the drawings. This does not include
minor revisions for the purpose of coordination.
B. Clean-Up:
1. Maintain the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
caused by this work.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 8
le
Iwo
lbw
I�r
L
2. At the completion of the work, remove all surplus materials, tools, etc., and
leave the premises clean.
C. Overhead Piping:
1. All sprinlder piping, drain and test piping, fire department connection piping,
etc., exposed to weather shall be galvanized.
2. All sprinlder piping must be substantially supported from the building structure
and only approved type hangers shall be used. Sprinkler lines under ducts shall
not be supported from ductwork, but shall be supported from the building
structure with trapeze hangers where necessary or from steel angles supporting
ductwork in accordance with NFPA 13.
3. Sprinklers below ceilings which are on exposed piping shall be listed and
approved regular bronze upright type, in upright position, except listed and
approved regular bronze pendent type in pendent position which may be used on
wet pipe systems where necessary due to clear height requirements, duct
interferences, etc.
4. Pendent sprinklers shall be in alignment and parallel to walls, etc.
2. Pendent sprinlders shall be located within a minimum of 4 inches from the
ceiling "T" bar.
3. Adjustable escutcheons shall not be used.
4. Sprig -ups shall be provided wherever necessary to provide proper deflector
distances in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements.
5. Sprinlder piping shall be installed above ceilings. Layout the sprinlder piping so
that there is a minimum separation of 12 inches between the ceiling height and
the bottom of the sprinlder pipe.
6. Install sprinlder piping in exposed areas as high as possible using necessary
fittings and auxiliary drains to maintain maximum clear head room.
7. Install sprinklers as required by NFPA 13 with regard to ducts, obstructions and
partitions.
8. Complete sprinlder installation and place in service during hours when the
Owner's facilities are not open to the public or for standard business in all areas
where merchandise or fixtures are stored in place.
D. Adjustment and Cleaning:
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 9
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
3.2 WELDING
1. Adjustment: Remove all burrs from pipe threads and fittings, and all debris and
foreign material from inside all pipe and fittings before installation. Correct all
system leaks prior to fmal acceptance test.
2. Cleaning: Flush all piping in accordance with NFPA standards for test
procedures.
E. Drains:
1. Provide main drain valves at system control valves, sized in accordance with
NFPA 13. Drains should discharge outside the building.
2. Provide all auxiliary drains where necessary, extended to a safe location.
3. Pipe all drains and auxiliary drains to locations where water drained will not
damage stock, equipment, vehicles, planted areas, etc., or injure personnel.
4. Plugs used for auxiliary drains shall be brass.
5. All piping and fittings downstream of drain valve shall be galvanized.
6. High and low pressure drains shall not be connected together.
F. Ceiling and Wall Plates: Install finished ceiling and wall plates wherever exposed
sprinkler piping passes through floors, ceilings and walls.
G. Sleeves:
1. Set sleeves in place for all pipes passing through floor openings.
2. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be filled with noncombustible fire -
stopping. Ratings of fire -rated walls shall be maintained. Provide chrome
finished wall plates at each side of the wall.
A. No field welding of sprinkler piping shall be permitted.
B. Headers, risers, feed mains, cross mains and branch lines may be shop welded using
acceptable welding fittings. Welding and torch cutting shall not be permitted as a
means of installing or repairing sprinkler systems.
C. Provide a blind flange or grooved cap and coupling at each end of the welder header.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 10
D. Certify welders or brazers as being qualified for welding and/or brazing, in
accordance with the requirements of AWS D 10.9, Qualification of Welding
Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing Level AR -3.
E. Comply with NFPA 13.
3.3 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTIONS
A. Per NFPA 13, at required points for testing each waterflow alarm device. Special
discharge nozzle shall have the same size orifice as the smallest orifice sprinklers
installed.
B. Provide a 1 -inch sight glass if inspector's test discharge cannot be readily observed
while operating valve.
C. Pipe all inspector's test connections discharging to atmosphere, to a location where
water drained will not damage stock, equipment, vehicles, planted areas, etc., or
injure personnel.
D. Splash blocks shall be provided where inspector's test discharge could produce
damage to surroundings.
E. All pipe and fittings downstream of the inspector's test valve shall be galvanized.
F. Consult with Sears Project Manager for exact location of inspector's test connections
and coordinate with latest revision of the fixturing drawing.
G. Identify inspector's test valve.
3.4 SPRINKLER GUARDS AND WATER SHIELDS
A. Provide guards on sprinlders within 7 feet of the fmished floor or wherever
sprinlders may be subject to mechanical damage.
B. Install sheet metal water shield (5 -inch minimum diameter) over each intermediate
rack sprinkler or install special listed sprinklers manufactured with integral water
shields, as shown on the drawings.
3.5 SPECIALTY DEVICES
A. Installation of all specialty devices shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Where the installation of those devices require use of a torque wrench
or other appliance, the Contractor shall certify that manufacturer's instructions have
been complied with.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 11
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installer shall be responsible for all tests required during the course of installation.
B. Testing Overhead Piping: Test all overhead sprinkler piping for a period of two
hours, in accordance with NFPA 13. All piping, valves, sprinklers, etc. shall be
watertight. Test dry pipe systems at an air pressure of 40 psi for 24 hours. Notify
the Owner's representative(s) 48 hours in advance regarding the time and date of all
tests.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Damage: Protect all unfinished work to prevent damage and furnish protection of all
surrounding areas where necessary.
B. Leak Damage: The Contractor shall be responsible during the installation and
testing periods of the sprinkler system for any damage to the work of others, to the
building or its contents caused by leaks in any equipment, by unplugged or
disconnected pipes or fittings, or by overflow, and shall pay for the necessary
replacements or repairs to work of others damaged by such leakage.
C. Water shall not be introduced into the system during conditions where there is
danger of freezing.
END OF SECTION 15300
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM NOVEMBER 19, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 15300 - 12
SECTION 15600 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: heating and air conditioning work as shown on the Drawings and
specified herein.
1. Low pressure supply, air ductwork distribution systems.
2. Ceiling diffusers.
3. Electric recessed ceiling heaters.
4. Insulated flexible duct work.
5. Testing and balancing of new ceiling diffusers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Painting: Section 09900.
2. Basic Mech. Materials & Methods: Section 15050.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit each item according to General Conditions and Division -1 Specification
Sections.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: Specifications, installation and maintenance instruction for
all equipment. Furnish data covering model, type and serial number, capacities,
maintenance and operation of each item of equipment. Operating instructions shall
cover all phases of control, maintenance and usage.
C. Test Reports: Furnish test reports on balancing of the new ceiling diffusers, certified
by the Contractor.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
15600 - 1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cooperate with others involved in other parts of the Work, for the proper location of
piping, outlets and equipment before the installation of same.
B. Examine the Drawings and Specifications in connection with other parts of the Work
and inform the Architect of anticipated conflicts.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC RECESSED CEILING HEATERS,
A. Shall be Markel, Chromolox, Berko, or Aztec as scheduled on the drawings.
B. All units shall bear the U.L. label.
C. Units shall be 208 volt, single phase, as indicated on drawings. Ceiling heaters shall
have built -in thermostats.
D. Heaters shall be furnished with necessary contractors, relays, control transformers and
thermal cut -outs. Where required by NEC provide internal fusing in the units of
electric radiation. Recessed ceiling heaters shall have built -in disconnect switches.
E. The electric heaters shall be furnished by the firm performing the work of Division 15,
Electric Wiring and installation will be by Division 16.
2.2 DUCTWORK
A. Flexible ducts.
2. Shall be UL -181 Class 1 approved for use with pressures up to 10" W.C. positive
and 2" W.C. negative.
3. Flexible duct connections shall be no longer than 5' -0 ".
2.3 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A. Air distribution devices shall be Titus, Metalaire, Krueger, or Carnes.
B. All ceiling mounted distributors shall have factory applied baked white enamel finish.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
15600 - 2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
1. New connections to air diffusers shall be flexible ducts equal to Wiremold Type
WG with 1" thick insulation, Anco or United.
fir
h.
C. All ceiling diffusers shall be equipped with opposed blade volume dampers operable
from the face side with screwdriver adjustment.
E. All square faced round neck ceiling diffusers shall be Titus louver faced face Model
TDC with Type 3 (lay -in) border.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCTWORK
A. Ductwork shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
B. Volume dampers shall be provided in each supply duct connection at locations where
required to accomplish proper air balancing. Provide operator suitable for the function
of the damper.
C. Flexible ducts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and
the terms of its UL listing. They shall not exceed 5 feet in length, and shall make
connections by use of a sheet metal collar and a stainless steel circular clamp. Clamp
shall encircle the duct completely, and shall be tightened with a worm gear operator, or
similar to the point that will provide an airtight connection without unnecessary
deformation of the duct.
D. At no time shall duct work be exposed to rain, snow, dust, or dirt. Any ductwork
which has been so exposed shall not be installed on this project. If exposure has
occurred after installation, it shall be removed and replaced with new, clean ductwork.
3.02 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A. Coordinate all trim and hardware associated with devices in each particular installation.
B. Refer to Architectural Drawings of reflected ceilings for proper locations of devices in
fmished ceilings.
C. All devices shall be properly assigned and alignment shall conform to the basic
building lines.
3.03 LEAKAGE TEST
A. After ductwork is installed but before any work is concealed, each new duct system
shall be subjected to a leakage test to demonstrate its tightness.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
15600 - 3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
B. Leakage test shall be performed in accordance with method outlined in the "Manual for
the Balancing and Adjusting of Air Distribution Systems ", Latest Edition, published by
the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).
C. A final leakage test shall be performed. Results of final leakage test shall be recorded
on a form and submitted to the Architect.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT OF VENTILATING SYSTEM
A. Provide the services of an approved engineer that specializes in the balancing and
testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems to balance, adjust and test
new ceiling diffusers.
B. Balance and testing shall not begin until the systems have been completed and are in
full working order.
C. Upon completion of the airside system installations, the Balance and Testing Engineer
shall perform the tests, compile the test data.
D. Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with latest AABC
Standard for Field Measurement and Instrumentation Form as published by the
aforementioned council, with calibrated instruments including certification of same.
All test data shall be recorded on official data sheets, dated and initialed by Contractor.
E. Three certified copies of the tests shall be furnished to the Architect.
END OF SECTION 15600
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL HEATING, VENTILATION AND
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
15600 - 4
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
is
SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Work included but not limited to:
h
a. New lighting
b. Modification to existing lighting
bri c. Exit signs.
d. Wiring devices.
e. All the suspended conduits shall run next to the underside of the
roof deck and upper level structures unless there are interferences
with other installations and if so, Contractor shall submit shop
drawings for approval before the installation begins.
,,,j 2. Products installed by the Contractor, but furnished by others as indicated in
Sections 16500 and 16600.
3. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications shall be understood to cover
complete operating systems. The Drawings and Specifications are to be
taken together. Work specified and not shown, or work shown and not
specified shall be performed or furnished as though mentioned in both
Drawings and Specifications.
4. Minor items and accessories reasonably inferred as necessary to the
complete and proper operation of any system, shall be provided by this
Contractor or Subcontractor for such systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. General, Special and Supplementary Conditions.
2. Division 1, Specification Sections.
3. 03300 - Concrete.
4. 16500 - Lighting.
5. 16600 - Special Systems.
6. - See Divisions 2 thru 15, for additional equipment to be
connected, under Division 16.
1_2 SUBMITTALS
r.. A. Submit the following according to the General and Special Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
id
1. Cable and wire.
L33 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -1
Err
A. Qualifications:
1. Of Contractor: Provide adequate skilled workmen, properly supervised and
sufficient quantities of materials and equipment to the end that the general
progress of the work shall not be delayed. Employ at all times during the
work, a competent superintendent who will be present and responsible for
the correctness of work.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits and inspection fees required for the
execution of electrical contract work. See Supplementary Conditions.
2. Building Codes: All work shall conform to the latest accepted National
Electrical Code (NEC) and all rules of other local enforcing agencies.
3. Tests by independent agencies whose classifications, standards and
requirements have general acceptance as regulatory:
a. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM).
b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
d. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Sequencing, Scheduling:
1. Conform to construction schedule.
2. Cooperate with others working on the premises to facilitate progress and
to coordinate and integrate all parts of work.
B. Seismic Areas:
1. All equipment, piping, etc. in seismic areas shall be mounted and braced per
local seismic codes.
1.5 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish a written guarantee stating that all materials and workmanship are
guaranteed against defects for a period of one (1) year after completion and
acceptance of work. Defects due to faulty material and workmanship developed
during the guarantee period shall be satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at his
expense.
L6 TEMPORARY LIGHTING AND POWER
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -2
•
Ira
A. See Section 01500, Temporary Utilities, regarding temporary lighting and power
6.• and temporary service.
Imo
1 _ 7 SAFETY
A. The Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods and sequences of
construction, and for the safety of workers and others on the construction site.
1.8 CO- ORDINATION
2_2 INDEX
A. Inspect Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Fire Protection
Drawings for dimensions, locations of partitions and walls, structural details, and
location of mechanical pipes and ducts so that the electrical installation shall be in
harmony with that of the other trades.
B. Exact location of equipment furnished by the other trades and wired by this
Contractor shall be obtained from the Drawings of the other trades.
C. Field verify existing conditions prior to bid so as to include conditions which may
impact this contractor's work.
D. Electrical work will be completed under separate contracts. Refer to drawing for
scope of work. Coordinate with other contractor and cooperate fully.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2_1 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and shall be put in place in a complete and workmanlike
manner. They shall bear Underwriters' Label where such service is normally
provided.
B. Where existing materials are shown to be re -used, this contractor shall field verify
the suitability /compatibility of such materials. Existing materials found suitable for
re -use shall be tested and guaranteed as if new.
1. 2.3 Conduit and Fittings
2. 2.4 Pull and Junction Boxes
3. 2.5 Outlet Boxes
4. 2.6 Cable and Wire
5. 2.7 Wall Switches
6. 2.8 Wall Receptacles
7. 2.9 Plates
2.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -3
A. Steel Conduit: Hot dip galvanized heavy wall steel conduit, Intermediate metal
conduit (IMC) and electric metallic tubing (EMT) as manufactured by Triangle
Conduit and Cable Company or LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
B. PVC Conduit: Rigid heavy wall as manufactured by Triangle, or Carlon.
C. All Conduit Fittings: Galvanized when used with steel conduit. Fittings as
manufactured by Thomas and Betts or Appleton Electric Products Company.
E.M.T. connectors and couplings shall be "set- screw" type.
D. For conduits 1 -1/4" and larger, provide insulating bushings as manufactured by
Thomas and Betts Company or Appleton Electric Products Company.
E. Metal clad cable (type MC) See N.E.C. Article 334, (See Section 16050,
Paragraph 3.06). Use is permitted subject to approval by the Local Code.
2.4 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes: Code gauge galvanized steel of size required,
furnished with two coats of aluminum paint after fabrication at shop. Provide
removable blank covers.
B. Concealed Junction Boxes: Galvanized deep box with extension ring and blank
cover. Exposed junction boxes shall be cast with threaded hubs.
2_5 OUTLET BOXES
A. Each switch, light, receptacle and other miscellaneous device shall be provided
with galvanized or sherardized pressed steel outlet box of the knockout type, as
manufactured by All Steel Equipment, Inc., Raco or Appleton. Conduits shall be
fastened with locknuts and bushings and all unused knockouts must be left sealed.
There must be sufficient room for wires and bushings and deep boxes shall be
installed where required.
B. All ceiling outlet boxes shall be deep type with screw covers and shall have
adequate support to carry weight of fixtures. Where boxes and conduits leading to
them are embedded in concrete, sufficient support will be considered as having
been provided. Otherwise Contractor shall furnish and install suitable means for
fastening box to framing or floor slab.
C. Where outlets are installed in concrete or other construction where final finish is to
be plaster, furnish and install plaster rings with recessed covers on all such outlets.
Where other finishes are to be applied, install extension rings as required.
D. This Contractor shall furnish and install all special outlet boxes that may be
required to enclose receptacles specified hereinafter.
E. Outlet boxes for vapor -proof or weatherproof construction shall be cast, having
threaded hubs for conduits and shall be galvanized or sherardized. Boxes shall be
provided with gaskets under all covers.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -4
L
F. Outlet boxes for installation in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof.
G. Provide a blank cover for each outlet not to be provided with a lighting fixture and
for each outlet indicated as capped.
H. Where surface extensions are installed from existing outlets, furnish and install
extension rings as required.
2_6 CABLE AND WIRE
A. All cable and wire for power and light shall be installed in conduit or duct except
as otherwise specified herein and shall be of type as specified hereinafter unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
B. Cable for feeders and service shall be Type THHNTTHWN insulated copper. All
branch circuit wiring shall be THHN 90 °C. insulated copper. Aluminum cable not
acceptable.
C. Wire for branch wiring installed in wiring space of fluorescent lighting fixtures
shall be Type THHN 90 °C., rated 600 volts.
D. All wire shall be pure copper of size noted on Drawings. Copper shall have 98%
conductivity.
E. Wire, except as otherwise noted, shall not be less than No. 12 AWG, except No.
14 for control and wire of No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Wire smaller
than No. 8 AWG shall be solid.
F. Stranded wire shall be terminated in solderless compression type lugs.
G. Cable connectors shall be T & G Method Color Keyed Compression type units as
manufactured by Thomas and Betts Company for No. 8 AWG and larger
conductors. For smaller conductors, connectors shall be Ideal Industries, Inc.,
"Wing Nut" Model 452 or 454, "Scotchlok Brand" insulated, as manufactured by
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company or approved equal, all of type
recommended by manufacturer for wire sizes to be connected. Set screw type
connectors will be allowed when terminating cable to a circuit breaker.
H. Splicing tape shall be Scotch Brand No. 33 or No. 88 plastic electrical tape where
required, due to sharp projection of connectors or by Local Code Requirements.
Scotch Brand No. 22 rubber electrical tape shall also be applied, both as
manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, or approved
equal. Use Scotch Brand No. 99 tape where excessive heating may occur.
2_7 WALL SWITCHES
A. Single pole wall switches shall have capacity of 15 amperes at 277 volts alternating
current and shall be Hubbell No. 1201, or approved equal.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -5
B. Three -way wall switches shall have a capacity of 15 amperes at 277 volts
alternating current and shall be Hubbell No. 1203, or approved equal.
C. Where thermal switches are indicated, furnish and install a motor overload switch
with proper heating element to protect motor or equipment served. Switches shall
be Cutler - Hammer or approved equal with pilot light.
D. Where pilot lights are indicated, furnish and install lamp receptacle for installation
in outlet box, complete with lamp, plate and ruby jewel. Where pilot lights are
associated with wall switches, they shall be in gang with same.
E. Dimmer switches shall be Lutron, 1000 watt, minimum.
2.8 WALL RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex receptacles for general purpose shall be side wired grounding type with
double binding screws, having bakelite bodies and grounding terminals and shall be
Hubbell No. 5352 or approved equal. NEMA 5 -20R
B. Power receptacles for single phase, 208 volt, shall be single, three -wire plastic
body and shall be Hubbell or approved equal with collar or plate fitting snugly
around receptacle to close space between same and floor box where used.
C. Power receptacles for three -phase, 208 volt or 480 volt, shall be single, four -wire,
black composition Hubbell or approved equal.
D. Suspended drop cord type receptacles shall be 15A, 125V, three -wire duplex
receptacle or four outlet cluster, Hubbell No. 9259, or approved equal. Provide
three conductor, grounded, type S.O., heavy duty, 600 volts, drop cord. No. 16
AWG stranded wire insulated with RH rubber compound drop cord of sufficient
length to suspend receptacle approximately six feet, 6 inches above finished floor.
Length of cord shall not exceed 6' -0 ".
E. All receptacles shall be ivory in Office and Sales area.
Division 57 electronics back wall shall be gray in color.
F. All receptacles shall be specification grade, grounded, Hubbell or approved equal,
in ratings as shown on Drawings.
G. All 120 volt receptacles in P.O.S. room shall be "isolated grounded" type, and also
provide isolated grounded type for CRT's, printers, cash registers, employee time
clocks and monitor room, regardless of location. IG -5362 NEMA 5 -20R
H. All 125 volt single phase, 20 ampere receptacles, where electrical automotive
diagnostic equipment, electrical hand tools, and portable lighting devices are used,
in auto - center service area and lawnmower shop shall have ground fault
circuit - interrupter protection for personnel. NEMA 5 -20R
I. All receptacles in Photo Studio shall be 20 amp, Hubbell or approved equal:
duplex receptacle for general purpose shall be Hubbell #5352, surge suppression
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -6
1
L
los
IS
2_9 PLATES FOR WALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
A. Plates for wall switches and receptacles in finished areas shall be smooth
thermoplastic nylon, single or in gangs of proper combination as required, Hubbell
Series "P" nylon plates.
B. Plates for wall switches and wall receptacles in unfinished area shall be sheet steel
with rounded corners for installation on outlet boxes, cadmium plates, single or in
gang of proper combination as required.
C. Plates for wall switches and receptacles installed in cast boxes shall be similar to
plates used in unfinished areas except cast.
D. Plates in Sales and Office Areas shall match wall finish color. See Owners' project
manager for Owners' wall finish schedule.
E. Plates in Division 57 electronics backwall shall be gray in color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
11 INDEX:
1. 3.2 Preparation
3. 3.3 Sleeves, Inserts, Expansion Bolts, etc.,
5. 3.4 Conduits
6. 3.5 Pullboxes and Junction Boxes
7. 3.6 Outlet Boxes
8. 3.7 Column, Wall and Floor Outlets
9. 3.8 Wiring
11. 3.9 Nameplates and Equipment Designations
13. 3.10 Wall Switches and Receptacles
3_2 PREPARATION
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
duplex receptacle shall be Hubbell #5360S and isolated ground duplex receptacle
shall be Hubbell #IG5362. NEMA 5 -20R
A. Obtain all necessary measurements from other Contractors in order that work will
fit other branches of work. Verify all measurements at building to the end that
work will properly fit.
B. Confer with Architect/Engineer's Representative and other Contractors regarding
location and size of conduit, equipment, fixtures, duct openings, switches, ceiling,
wall and floor outlets, etc. in order that there may be no interferences between the
installation or progress of work of any Contractor on the project.
C. In the event that work of this Contractor interferes with the work of other
Contractors due to the failure of this Contractor to confer with said other
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -7
Contractors, then this Contractor shall make all necessary changes at his own
expense without additional cost whatsoever to Owner.
D. In all cases where ducts prevent locating of outlets in ceiling, provide approved
strap hangers from structural members for proper support of conduits and boxes
beneath ducts, such work being installed after ducts are in place.
E. Furnish all tools, apparatus, machines, hoists, staging, etc., necessary for the
installation of the work.
33 SLEEVES, INSERTS, EXPANSION BOLTS, ETC.
A. Lay out and install all work in advance of the pouring of concrete floors and walls.
Furnish and install all sleeves required for openings through said floors, walls, etc.
Where drawings require conduit to be run exposed, furnish and install all inserts or
beam clamps required for supporting said conduits.
B. In all cases where ducts prevent location of outlets in ceiling, provide approved
strap hangers for proper support of conduit and boxes beneath ducts, such hangers
being installed after ducts are in place.
C. Sleeves through floor shall be black iron pipe and shall be installed to finish 1"
above finished floor line. Sheet metal sleeves will not be accepted. All unused
sleeves shall be filled with concrete. All other sleeves shall have fill around conduit
for fire proofing.
D. Provide malleable inserts for hanging or bracketing all conduits to construction
wherever work required under this contract is attached to new concrete work.
E. Set inserts during construction of building and set only in locations approved by
Architect/Engineer. Inserts for conduit shall be Grinnel No. 282 or approved
equal, malleable iron adjustable concrete inserts.
F. Where inserts have been improperly located or where it is necessary to support
conduits from concrete construction already in place, anchor pipe hangers and
supports with expansion bolts by National Lead Company's Paine - Phillips or
approved equal expansion bolts.
G. For cutting and patching, see Division 1. (01045).
3.4 CONDUITS
A. All overhead conduits on the 1st floor of a 1 story building or the 2nd floor of a 2
story building, shall be run next to the underside of the roof deck, unless there are
interferences with other installations. Do not support conduits directly from the
metal roof deck.
B. All overhead conduits on the 1st floor of a 2 story building, shall be mounted tight
to the underside of the structural steel. Maintain approximately 15' -6" clear or as
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -8
1.
6
high as the structural steel will allow. This holds true for branch circuit conduits
and feeder conduits.
C. PVC conduit shall be used in concrete slabs on grade. All conduit for branch
circuit wiring not imbedded in slabs shall be electric metallic tubing. Service
Entrance conduit shall be heavy wall steel unless noted otherwise.
D. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be installed exposed in dry locations, in false
ceiling spaces and in stud walls, for branch circuit wiring. In upper level concrete
floor slabs, not on grade, provide Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) with threaded
fittings (PVC and EMT not permitted).
E. Metal clad cable (type MC): in sizes #12 and #10 may be used in lieu of EMT,
only for branch circuiting of lighting fixtures above suspended acoustical ceilings.
(With prior written approval of Local Electrical Inspection Department).
F. Feeder conduits of all sizes, installed exposed below Second Floor slab shall be
electric metallic tubing.
G. Size of conduit shall comply with Code Requirements for type of wire and cable
used, except that no conduit smaller than 3/4 inch shall be installed in slabs and
where larger sizes are indicated on Drawings, larger sizes shall be installed. All
home runs in concrete slabs shall be minimum one (1") inch. Voice and data
conduits shall be minimum (1") throughout.
H. All conduit shall be reamed after threads are cut, not before. All joints in conduit
shall be cut square and shall butt squarely into couplings. Running threads will not
be permitted.
I. Conduit installed in concrete slabs shall be carefully coordinated with reinforcing
steel. Coordinate the entire installation with Contractor installing reinforcing steel.
J. All joints in underground conduit and all conduits run in floor slabs shall be made
watertight with pipe sealer. All conduit openings shall be temporarily plugged to
exclude water, concrete and plaster. All underground conduits shall be swabbed
before conductors are pulled in. Conduits in cinder fills, underground or in slabs
under which there is no excavation shall be encased on all sides with a 3" concrete
envelope.
K. No conduit smaller than ( /2 ") shall be used unless otherwise shown on Drawings
or specified herein. Minimum size home run for conduit run exposed or in furred
ceiling shall be 3/4 ".
L. For conduit 1 -1/4" and larger, hickey bends will not be acceptable. Either
manufactured elbows or bends manufactured in bending machine shall be used. All
bends shall be long radius.
M. Each run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of three (3) quarter
bends including those bends located immediately at outlet or fitting.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -9
Q.
N. Where conduit enters a box or other fitting through a knockout, an approved
locknut and insulated bushing shall be provided. All conduits for cables larger than
No. 6 AWG shall be equipped with T & B, O.Z. Gedney or Appleton Bushings, in
addition to locknuts inside and outside at all outlets, pull boxes, cabinets, etc.
O. All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to building
column lines. Conduits may be run diagonally over areas with a suspended lay -in
ceiling.
P. Where vapor -proof or weatherproof wiring is shown on plans, such wiring shall be
run in rigid conduit installed exposed or concealed as conditions require. All joints
shall be made watertight, using threaded couplings and fittings, with pipe sealer.
Branch circuit wiring run exposed to the weather shall be heavy wall steel.
For exposed work on walls, conduits shall be supported with galvanized cast
one -hole straps and clamp backs and anchors. Where no building members are
available, this Contractor must provide suitable angle iron members for support of
conduits and outlet boxes.
R. For exposed conduits larger than one inch (1 ") where concrete slabs occur,
concrete inserts shall be installed in slab and conduit shall be supported by cast
pipe rings and threaded round rods.
S. Where two or more exposed conduits larger than one inch (1") are run parallel, a
trapeze hanger shall be used. Mount conduits as high as possible.
T. In concrete or brick construction, insert anchors shall be Ackerman- Johnson,
Paine - Phillips or approved equal, with round head machine screws.
U. Use an electric drill for drilling holes for all inserts in brick, concrete or similar
construction.
V. Where conduit is supported to steel members, use standard beam clamps.
W. The use of perforated strap iron is prohibited for any work.
X. Where fiber insulated bushings are required, conduit shall be threaded to take one
locknut on the outside of box, cabinet, etc., and one locknut and fiber bushing on
inside of box, cabinet, etc.
Y. Do not support conduit or lighting fixtures directly from the metal roof deck.
Additional supporting members (i.e. angle iron or unistrut) shall be provided by the
Electrical Contractor and supported from the structural steel.
Z. Do not support conduit or lighting fixtures directly from sheet metal duct -work or
piping.
AA. All connection to motors shall be made with minimum 18" and maximum 36"
length of sealtight flexible metal conduit.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
2007
16050 -10
NOVEMBER 21,
is
r
BB. Primary and secondary connections to transformers shall be made with minimum
18" and maximum 36" length of flexible metal conduit.
CC. Conduit Supports: Conduit runs not encased in walls or floor shall be supported at
the following intervals:
ims
Conduit Size Maximum Distance Between Supports
1 /2" to 3/4" 10 feet
1" 12 feet
1 -1/4" and larger 14 feet
All EMT (Thinwalls) 10 feet
3_5 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. All exposed pull and junction boxes shall be secured to building or equipment with
proper size machine bolts. Secure anchor and hanger rods in an approved manner.
B. Pull boxes shall be installed where shown and wherever necessary for each
installation of conduits, cables or wires. They shall be of size shown and as
required for size and number of conduits, cables and wires to be accommodated as
well as for the conditions responsible for installation of same.
C. For each low voltage power assistance door pushbutton provide an octagonal J.
Box.
3_6 OUTLET BOXES
INS
A. In installation of outlet boxes, no shallow ceiling boxes or plates shall be used. Use
of handy boxes or similar outlets for exposed work will not be permitted.
B. On brick and concrete walls or ceiling, exposed outlets shall be fastened with two
Paine - Phillips, Ackerman- Johnson or approved equal, screw anchors and round
head machine screws.
C. On structural members, exposed outlets shall be fastened using clamps with no less
than two machine screws. Where no structural members are available for support
of outlet boxes, furnish and install additional steel members as required and in a
manner as approved.
D. Carefully lay out all outlets and check with Plumbing, Heating and Ventilating and
other Contractors so that outlets are not blocked, hidden or rendered inaccessible
on account of piping or equipment of these trades passing under, over, across or in
close proximity to same, or to cause the devices or fixtures in or on these outlets
to be inaccessible for use or maintenance.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -11
v
E. Outlets and fixtures under fans, ducts, piping, etc., shall be independently
supported from the structural steel, so as to provide adequate support for the
fixtures.
F. Outlet boxes for vapor -proof and/or weatherproof construction shall be installed in
a manner to prevent the entrance of moisture into the conduit system.
G. Outlet boxes in hazardous areas shall be installed in accordance with Underwriters'
Class 1, Division 1 or 2 Requirements.
H. Where more than one (1) switch, wall receptacle, etc., occurs at the same location,
install multi -gang boxes and plates suitable for the combination of devices required
to be accommodated.
I. Care must be taken in placing boxes so that fixtures will hang plumb or stand at
right angles to wall.
3.7 COLUMN, WALL AND FLOOR OUTLETS
A. Floor outlets shall be securely supported as approved by the Architect/Engineer's
Representative. Wood stakes driven into ground will not be acceptable. It will be
the responsibility of this Contractor to provide supervision when floor slabs
containing floor outlets are poured and to take necessary corrective measures in
the event a floor outlet is displaced from its proper position.
B. Fixturing outlets shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. The fixturing outlets
are required around the sales floor, both on interior and exterior walls.
C. Fixturing outlets shall be circuited with independent circuits, to be used for the
cornice lighting. The cornice lighting will be installed by Owner.
D. All receptacle outlets in fixturing walls shall have conduit run above the ceiling,
and tied to an outlet in a permanent wall (where practical) or have a separate home
run above the ceiling. Fixturing walls shall be built by Owner. Receptacle outlets in
fixturing walls shall be installed by this Contractor.
E. All telephone, data and T.V. outlets in fixturing walls shall have a I" conduit with
plastic end bushing stubbed 6" above lay -in ceiling.
All telephone, data and T.V. outlets in exposed areas shall have a 1" conduit
terminated with plastic end bushing at the structural steel.
3_8 WIRING
A. Feeders and wiring from main distribution switchboards for power throughout
building shall be suitable for three -phase, three or four wire, 480/277 volt, 60 cycle
alternating current distribution.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -12
is
B. Feeders and wiring for certain general and emergency lighting from main
distribution switchboards shall be suitable for three phase, four wire, 277/480 volt,
knst 60 cycle alternating current distribution. Such wiring, in general, serves fluorescent
and H.I.D. lighting.
C. Feeders and wiring for all other general and emergency lighting as shown from
main distribution switchboards to lighting transformers where shown, shall be
suitable for three -phase, three wire or single phase, two wire (as shown), 480 volt,
60 cycle alternating current distribution.
D. Wiring from dry type transformers to respective panels shall be arranged for
operation at the secondary voltage characteristic of the transformer. Such wiring in
general serves incandescent lighting, wall and floor outlets, fractional horsepower
motors, etc.
E. In general, motors of less than V2 HP shall be suitable for single phase, 120 volt
6.' service. All such motors shall be served from lighting system. All motors% HP and
larger shall be served from power wiring system, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings or specified herein.
F. Branch circuits for lighting shall be two, three and four wire as shown and shall be
color coded per this specification.
G. All lighting shall be distributed between the phases and neutral to balance the load
as nearly as possible. Upon completion of work, this Contractor shall submit a
tabulation of voltage and ampere values as specified herein -after.
ha H. All conductors comprising a feeder or circuit shall be installed in the same conduit
or as noted on Drawings.
I+ I. All conduits buried in soil shall be provided with a concrete enclosure not less than
3" thick. All conduits in slabs under which there is an excavation shall have at least
3" concrete under same.
J. Where conduits are installed exposed, they shall be run at right angles to or parallel
with adjacent construction. They shall be supported from structural members of
building construction by clamps or other suitable devices and from masonry by
expansion bolts or sleeves and straps. In the absence of structural members, this
Contractor shall furnish and install steel angles, etc., as required for support of
conduit and equipment.
K. Where vapor -proof or weatherproof wiring is indicated on Drawings, conduit
system shall be made watertight, using gaskets at outlets as required.
L. Where hazardous locations are noted on Drawings, wiring and devices shall be
explosion - proof. All electrical work within and affected by hazardous classification
area shall be in accordance with all applicable codes.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -13
lar
M. All conductors installed underground or in conduits in slabs under which there is
no excavation shall be insulated with moisture resisting insulation approved for
installation in permanent moist locations.
N. Upon final completion of work, all temporary wiring shall be removed. No capped
outlets will be permitted.
O. Except as otherwise noted, all neutral conductors shall be of the same
cross - sectional area as phase conductors.
P. All lighting and receptacle homeruns 125 feet and greater shall have #10 wire for
the homerun. This shall apply to 277 volt and 120 volt wiring.
Q. Color Coding:
1. All conductors shall be color coded of the following colors and markers:
2. For wire sizes which are available in black only or in a limited color range,
the above specified color code shall be accomplished by application of
colored tape applied to the visible portion of wires in junction boxes, pull
boxes, panelboards, switchboards, etc. Tape shall be as manufactured by
3M Company, and wire markers shall be as manufactured by Brady.
3. Green shall be used only for grounding wire to meet National Electric
Code requirements.
4. Color as selected for the purpose of identifying circuits shall be applied to
insulation. Colors must be fast, fadeless and capable of withstanding
cleaning in the event that insulation becomes soiled.
5. Color codes shall be consistent in all control circuits with no splicing of
two or more colors within any single lead.
6. All systems of control circuits involving more than five wires shall have
each end of every wire, whether it connects to terminals, coils, switches,
etc., labeled with the given wire number with Brady or equivalent, gummed
tape labels either pre - printed or typewritten. In the event that more than
one wire of the same number leaves a common terminal or terminal bar, the
"home run" is to carry the given wire number (which is to be closest to the
termination of wire), a symbol or indication of the component it is
connected to, leaving about 1 /2" to 1" gap between these numbers.
7. Identify neutrals in Junction Boxes where more than one neutral is used.
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
For 120/208V
A Phase - Black
B Phase - Red
C Phase - Blue
Neutral - White
For 277/480V
A Phase - Brown
B Phase Orange
C Phase Yellow
Neutral Gray
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS NOVEMBER 21,
2007
16050 -14
Iwo
is
lbw
1
hir
19 NAMEPLATES AND EOUIPMENT DESIGNATIONS
A. In addition to nameplates specified elsewhere herein, furnish and install red or
black finish engraved white core laminated micarta nameplates for all panelboards,
motor starters, disconnect switches, transformers, safety switches, time switches,
magnetic contactors, relays, etc., furnished under this Contract.
B. Others will furnish nameplates to this Contractor for equipment furnished under
their particular branch of work. This Contractor shall install all such nameplates on
equipment for which such nameplates are intended.
C. Nameplate designations shall be as later directed by Owner's Superintendent.
D. Provide stick -on voltage name tags on all 480 volt and 277/480 volt equipment.
1. On all 480 volt starters, on outside covers (remote from M.C.C.)
2. On all 480 volt disconnect switches, on outside covers.
3. On all 277 -480 volt panels (on inside of door for recessed panels).
4. On timers, relays, contactors, etc.
E. Provide screw -on name tags on all motor starters giving pump or fan number
designation and on timers, relays and contactors indicating their function.
F. All lettering of voltage and motor number designations shall be minimum% inch
high.
3.10 WALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
A. Wall switches shall be located as indicated on Drawings, arranged single or in
gangs, at height 4' -0" centerline, or otherwise indicated on drawings, and shall
have approved plates and furnish as specified hereinafter.
B. Where two or more phases of a 277 volt system enter a single switch box, metal
barrier plates shall be used to separate the phases in the switch box.
C. Mounting height of receptacles shall be 15" to bottom above floor unless
otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 16050
SEARS AT SOUTHCENTER MALL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16050 -15
•
NOVEMBER 21,
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1_1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Installation of Lighting Fixtures.
2. Installation of Lighting Controls.
3. Retrofit of existing lighting fixtures
1. General, Special and Supplementary Conditions.
2. Division 1, Specification Sections.
3. 16050 - Basic Materials & Methods.
C. Products furnished and installed by this Contractor.
1. New Lighting Fixtures:
a. General lighting fixtures and exit signs.
2. Incandescent, fluorescent and H.I.D. lamps.
1_2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to the General and Special Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
1. Lighting fixtures furnished by this Contractor.
L3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lighting fixtures shall be in compliance with the following applicable standards:
1. NEC
2. UL
3. NEMA
4. IESNA
L4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All lighting fixtures and lamps shall be stored in one area. Contractor shall
coordinate with General Contractor to establish this storage area in the best
possible location. Conditions and procedures during storage shall be as follows:
1. Contractor shall provide all required equipment, etc., necessary to maintain
all lighting fixtures and lamps in a dry location and maintain the equipment
in good condition during the storage period.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
LIGHTING
16500 -1
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
If
B. Related Sections:
L
Y
B. All lighting fixture accessories, mounting materials and whips shall be provided by
this Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3_1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Install all lighting fixtures shown on the Drawings:
1. The Contractor shall provide metal channel for all fixtures which require 1-
1/2" metal channel for support.
2. Provide "caddy" or equal t -bar safety clips for all lighting fixtures in lay -in
ceilings, per N.E.C. 410 -16C. Each four (4) foot fixture shall have four (4)
clips; each two (2) foot fixture shall have two (2) clips. In addition, all
lighting fixtures in hurricane or earthquake regions shall have additional
supports per local code requirements, but in no case less than two wire
supports at opposite corners connected to structural steel.
3. Special Mounting: When mounting fixtures to drywall or acoustical
ceilings, provide and install mounting angles and secure fixtures all in
accordance with manufacturers' standard details. When mounting surface
and pendant type fixtures to drywall or acoustical tile, they shall be secured
as per manufacturers' standard details. Should recessed fixtures occur in
drywall ceilings, special mounting detail will be furnished by Engineer, if
required. When locating outlets in suspended grid ceilings, consult and
cooperate with Division 9 requirements to assure correct placement of
fixtures in the grid.
4. Plaster Rings: When recessed fixtures require plaster frame or ring,
Contractor shall deliver them to General Contractor three (3) days prior to
installation. All fixtures requiring plaster frames or rings will be furnished
with fixtures supplied by this Contractor.
5. Lamps: All lamps will be furnished by this Contractor in separate lamp
cartons.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the replacing of all defective fluorescent and
H.I.D. fixture ballasts during construction period. Make all arrangements directly
with ballast manufacturer. Ballast manufacturer will replace ballasts and
compensate Contractor for labor costs. See Manufacturer's guarantee for further
details.
C. Plenum Ceilings:
1. All equipment and work in plenum ceilings shall be approved for use in
plenum ceilings.
2. All work in plenum ceilings shall conform to local codes.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
LIGHTING
16500 -2
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
D. Where noted on the drawing "RX" or "RXR ", contractor shall.refer to plan notes
for scope of work
3.2 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. This Contractor shall provide time clocks for control of mall Sears sign and
exterior light boxes - refer to drawings for product requirements.
B. Refer to "Panel Schedules" on the drawings, for branch circuits controlled by time
clocks.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON)
END OF SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
16500 -3
NOVEMBER 19, 2007
ill
la
kIlb
SECTION 16600 - SPECIAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Emergency lighting and exit signs.
2. Exterior signs.
3. Sound and paging system. NIC
4. Telephone service. NIC
5. Cash register system/Telephone system. NIC
6. Fire Alarm and Security Alarm System.
7. Antenna System Bases. NIC
8. Display Wiring. NIC
9. Miscellaneous Equipment.
10 CCTV system. NIC
B. Related Sections:
1. General, Special and Supplementary Conditions.
2. Division 1, Specification Sections.
3. 16050 - Basic Materials & Methods.
C. Products Installed by this Contractor, but furnished by Owner.
1. Television and radio demonstration system: (NIC)
a. Antenna tower.
b. All radio antenna equipment.
1_2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to Owners General and Special Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
1. Exit signs.
L33 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment shall be in compliance with the following applicable standards:
1. NEC
2. UL
3. EIA
4. NEMA
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOVEMBER 21, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -1
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Assign one man the complete responsibility for receiving, storage and distribution
of all items furnished by Owner to the Contractor. This man shall maintain a
continuous inventory of all equipment, including number required, received and
installed; also he shall control the receiving operation so that equipment will not be
lost, stolen or misplaced.
B. Keep Owners' Project Manager informed so that all items can be delivered to job
site when required.
C. Contractor shall be totally responsible for protection and condition of all items
furnished to him by Owner from the time of receipt until the work is accepted by
Owner. All damaged and/or missing items not noted at time of receipt, but found
at the time of installation shall be replaced and repaired by Contractor at his
expense.
1.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS
A. Furnish and install an emergency wiring system as detailed on Drawings, including
circuit wiring, outlets and connection to the various lights.
B. List of equipment on Emergency System:
1. All emergency lighting.
2. All emergency exit signs.
C. Directional arrows and color of exit signs will meet the approval of the authority
having jurisdiction.
1.6 MALL ENTRY SIGNS
A. Signs will be furnished and installed by Owner, and this Contractor shall provide
all branch circuit wiring, conduit and controls relative thereto. Sign wiring shall be
120 volt. This Contractor shall provide a junction box with the appropriate number
of circuits as indicated on drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2A SOUND AND PAGING SYSTEM (NIC)
A. This contractor shall provide, unless otherwise indicated, new speakers to match
existing as indicated on plan drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 The Contractor shall install new exit signs and new emergency lights as indicated on
drawings.
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOVEMBER 21, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -2
L
L
3_2 SOUND AND PAGING SYSTEM FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS
CONTRACTOR (NIC)
A. New speakers, volume controls and wiring are indicated on lighting plans to march
existing.
3_3 TELEPHONE SERVICE (EXISTING) (NIC)
A. Telephone Service, existing run overhead to POS room, See power plans for
location.
B. Provide a 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood panel at telephone terminal location indicated on
plans. The telephone terminal location shall be provided with a ground connection
as specified herein and a duplex wall receptacle. The Main Telephone /Cash
Register Equipment Room shall be as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Install a fish wire in all new telephone conduits.
D. Handicap outlets shall be located so that top of phone is maximum 3' -8" above
floor, or per local code.
E. Arrange and co- ordinate all work with the local telephone company regarding
telephone service to the building (100 pair cable)..
34 CASH REGISTER/TELEPHONE SYSTEM (NIC)
A. All 120 volt circuits to remote cash/registers; CRT's; printers and processors shall
have circuit breaker handles locked in the "ON" position. All of these circuits shall
be dedicated to these devices and shall be 2 wire circuits (hot and neutral), with
isolated ground receptacles. Provide a green ground conductor for all isolated
ground receptacles.
B. Owner will furnish and install all telephone instruments; CRT's; printers;
processors and cash registers.
C. Owner will furnish and this contractor shall install all of the following:
1. Telephone cables (voice).
2. Data cables.
3. Cable terminations and connectors at both ends.
4. Cover - plates for wall outlets and floor pedestals.
5. Grounding of overhead cable racks.
D. Contractor shall provide the empty raceway system for the tele /data cables.
Furnish a single or 2 gang outlet box in walls as indicated on drawings with 1"
empty conduit, stubbed above lay -in ceilings. Furnish floor boxes with 1" empty
conduit. Run over to columns and stub -up with 1" empty conduit or as indicated
on drawings.
3_5 FIRE ALARM AND SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM (EXISTING)
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOVEMBER 21, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -3
A. Provide 120 volt circuit to bridge exterior doors and to mall entrance doors.
B. For additional information, see Section 16720 "Fire Alarm and Security Alarm
Specifications" and associated fire alarm system drawings.
3.6 ANTENNA SYSTEMS BASES (EXISTING) (NIC)
A. Contractor shall provide the following antenna weatherproof service heads on the
roof as per drawings.
1. The weatherproof service head for Master TV/FM Antenna, DSS Dish and
TV dish network located as close as possible to the center of the building
and to the store electronic shop.
B. For each antenna weatherproof service head, provide fish wiring as per drawings.
C. Provide grounding for the antenna base back to the main switchboard. Install as
shown on drawings by means of ground clamps, Killark type "CCSC ", or equal, if
necessary pipe connections. Ground shall have a resistance of not more than 25
ohms.
D. All antenna and cabling are provided by others.
E. Provide TV floor outlets as per Section 16050 Paragraph 2.12B and provide T.V.
wall outlets that shall have ivory cable outlet plate Leviton #86013. Provide empty
(1 ") conduit with fish wire for up to three T.V. floor outlets and thru the nearest
column or permanent wall up to the space 6" above the lay -in ceiling. Provide 120
volt, 20 amp double duplex receptacle next to the amplifier.
3_7 DISPLAY WIRING (NIC)
A. Extension of wiring beyond wall, column and floor outlets is a part of this
Contract. See General Conditions.
18 MISCELLANEOUS EOUIPMENT
A. Certain equipment, such as sliding door at Customer Pick -up, baler and
compactor, will be furnished and installed by others. Contractor shall furnish and
install all conduit, wire and disconnect devices and make all final line side
connections in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
19 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEMS (NIC)
A. All closed circuit TV equipment and wiring will be furnished and installed by
Owner.
B. Contractor shall provide dedicated circuits as shown on drawings.
C. For each exterior camera installed at the back of a parapet, the General Contractor
will provide supporting material for camera and this Contractor shall provide a
sleeve through the roof, with a weatherhead. (Existing)
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -4
NOVEMBER 21, 2007
is
le
r
END OF SECTION 16600
SEARS AT SOUTH CENTER MALL SPECIAL SYSTEMS NOVEMBER 21, 2007
07 -164 (TUKWILA, WASHINGTON) 16600 -5
February 6, 2009
Mark Hilliard
BN Builders, Inc.
2601 4 Ave, Ste 350
Seattle, WA 98121
RE: Request for Extension
Development Permit No. D07 -432
Sears — 301 Southcenter Mall
Dear Mr. Hilliard,
This letter is in response to your written request for an extension to Permit No. D07 -433. The
Acting Building Official has reviewed your letter and considered your request to extend the
above referenced permit. The City of Tukwila Building Division will be extending the expiration
date of your permit an additional 90 days, May 4, 2009 per your request.
If you should have any questions, please contact our office at (206) 431 -3670.
Sincerely,
(;, fifer M shall
it Technician
File: Permit No. D07 -432
City of Tukwila
Jim Haggerton, Mayor
Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director
P:\Pemdt Center\Extension Letters \Pennits\2007\DO7 -432 Permit Extension.doc
jem
6300 Southcenter Boulevard. Suite #100 • Tukwila. Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 431 - 3670 • Fax: 206 431 - 3665
B
N
B
BNBuilders, Inc.
January 29 2009
Jennifer Marshall
6300 Southcenter Boulevard
Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
RE: Permit No. D07 -432
Dear Jennifer;
On January 6 2009 I was forwarded a letter from the City of Tukwila stating that Permit No. D07 -432 was about to
expire. This permit is outstanding due to (2) exterior light fixtures that do not match what was approved by the City.
The corrected light fixture were ordered — but have a 3 -4 month lead time and will not get here before our permit
expires on 2/3/09. Our electrician has had several conversations with Moira Bradshaw regarding an alternate fixture.
On January 27 she selected a more locally available fixture from a list of options forwarded by the electrician (I've
pasted the email below in blue). The Lead time for the alternate fixture is 2 weeks — which puts us just outside the
permit expiration date. We are asking for an extension on this permit.
From: Moira Bradshaw [ mailto :mbradshawOci.tukwila.wa.us]
Sent: Tuesday, January 27, 2009 4:21 PM
To: Tim Marisch
Subject: Re: FW: NEW LUMINUS SUB
Hi Tim - I've gone back out to the site and I think that the Lightway, MERW -G that is solid, without any mesh or perf, in white, would be the best
option. The other Tamp that you attached to your email looked like it was for a post as it had a solid element on the bottom.
Let me know if this is possible and when you can get it installed. Thank you.
land regards,
Moira Carr Bradshaw, AICP
Senior Planner, DCD
City of Tukwila
6300 Southcenter BL, Suite 100
Tukwila WA 98188
206 421 3651
Phone: (206) 431- 3651
As always, if we can do anything to be of assistance please do not hesitate to ask.
Sincerely,
Mark Hilliard
2601 4 Ave., Suite 350
Seattle, WA 98121
Phone: (206) 382 -3443
Cc: Nicholas Lee
Cc: Moira Bradshaw
Cc: Tom Jordan
Cc: Milt Lanser
1of1
at y R nnIa
JAN a 0 /.009
PERMIT CENTER
g ) 4/4d
-o7
01 -02 -2009
MILTON LANSER
4582 S ULSTER ST PY, STE 1501
DENVER CO 80237
City of Tukwlla
RE: Permit No. D07 -432
301 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW
Dear Permit Holder:
In reviewing our current records the above noted permit has not received a final inspection by the City of Tukwila Building Division.
Per the International Codes, Uniform Plumbing/Fuel Gas Code and/or the National Electrical Code, every permit issued by the
Building Division under the provisions of the code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work
authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit issuance, or if the building or work
authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days.
Based on the above, you are hereby advised to:
Call the City of Tukwila Inspection Request Line at 206 -431 -2451 to schedule for the next or fmal inspection.
This inspection is intended to determine if substantial work has been accomplished since issuance of the permit or last inspection; or if
the project should be considered abandoned.
If such determination is made, the International Codes, Uniform Plumbing/Fuel Gas Code and/or the National Electrical Code does
allow the Building Official to approve one extension of time for an additional period not exceeding 180 days. Extension requests
must be in writing and provide satisfactory reasons why circumstances beyond the applicants control have prevented action from
being taken.
In the event you do not call for the above inspection and receive an extension prior to 02/03/2009 , your permit will become null and
void and any further work on the project will require a new permit application and associated fees.
Thank you for your cooperation in this matter.
Sincerely,
xc:
ifer Marshall
't Technician
Permit File No. D07 -432
Jim Haggerton, Mayor
Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
M 1 R 0
Denver
Fort Collins
Summit County
Civil Engineering
Structural Engineering
Retail Architecture
January 16, 2008
Mr. Dave Larson
Senior Plans Examiner
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, WA 98188
RE: Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington
New Second Level Exterior and Mall Entries
Reply to Correction Letter #1
Development Permit Application D07 -432
S. A. Miro Job No. 07164
Dear Mr. Larson:
Response to comment replies:
Reply to review comment from planning regarding exterior lighting fixtures is via attached
separate letter.
Four sets of drawings are enclosed, please contact us if you have any questions regarding these
issues.
Sincerely,
Vice President
1. See attached letter reply to comment: #1: "The letter from the engineer may only
address vertical Toad conditions that will not be changed by the removal of the two
sections of CMU wall. Please have the engineer verify that the lateral integrity will
not be affected as well or that the wall itself does not need any additional bracing to
restore its integrity."
2. See below for reply to comment #2: "Emergency lighting will need to be added to
the means of egress pathway connecting the new exit doors to the existing means of
egress. Emergency lighting is also required on the exterior side of the exit doors per
section 1006 IBC. Please show emergency lighting details on the plans. Also add
lighted exit signs at the new exits."
a. Interior egress path to the two new exterior doors is lighted by the 2x2 ceiling
lighting fixtures which are part of the emergency system (see sheet ME -2)
which are powered by an emergency generator. In addition, note 6 has been
added on plan detail B /ME.1 regarding interior emergency lighting. The
exterior lighting has been modified so both of the exterior lighting fixtures
adjacent to each side of the door are connected to the emergency system
(see sheet ME -2). In addition, it is our understanding that the lighting on the
bridge being constructed by the mall to the parking garage is connected to an
emergency power source as well. Lighted exit sign is indicated at exterior
door (see sheet ME -2). Note that exit signage is not provided at the new
mall entry since it is not an approved egress method.
mjl (x: /Jobs2007 /07- 164 /00 /Corres /Itr021 -Dave Larson — Tukwila Building Dept- 011608)
S. A. MIRO, INC. 4582 South Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, Colorado 80237 www.samiro.com Tel 303 - 741 -3737 FAX 303 - 694 -3134
M 1 R 0
Denver
Fort Collins
Summit County
Civil Engineering
Structural Engineering
Retail Architecture
January 16, 2008
Dear Mr. Larson:
Mr. Dave Larson
Senior Plans Examiner
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, WA 98188
RE: Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington
New Second Level Exterior and Mall Entries
Reply to Correction Letter #1
Development Permit Application D07 -432
S. A. Miro Job No. 07164
See reply below in response to the comment: #1: `The letter form the engineer may only address
vertical load conditions that will not be changed by the removal of the two sections of CMU wall.
Please have the engineer verify that the lateral integrity will not be affected as well or that the wall
itself does not need any additional bracing to restore its integrity."
The section of walls that are removed are not shear walls since the wall system does not continue
to grade, as may be noted on sections A/A3.0 and C /A3.0. Therefore removal of the two sections
of wall does not affect the integrity of the building lateral system.
Since the exterior walls span vertically from floor to floor for lateral load perpendicular to the
walls, the wall removal from floor to floor eliminates the effect of the opening on adjacent
remaining walls. The new exterior storefront glazed wall is secured to the concrete floor structure
and is braced laterally just above the ceiling line, these connections provide sufficient resistance
to lateral loading.
We are including an engineering stamp and signature as part of this letter for your records.
Let us know if you have any questions in this regard.
Sincerely, Reviewed by:
S. . 0,
on J. Lanser, P.E.
Vice President
David P. Renn, P.E.
Associate
mjl (x: /Jobs2OO7 /07- 164 /00 /Corres/krO2O -Dave Larson — Tukwila Building Dept - 011608)
I EXPIRES / /j4 /08 1
S. A. MIRO, INC. 4582 South Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, Colorado 80237 www.samiro.com Tel 303 - 741 -3737 FAX 303 - 694 -3134
M 1 R 0
Civil Engineering
Structural Engineering
Retail Architecture
January 16, 2008
Ms. Moira Bradshaw
Planning Division
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, WA 98188
Denver
RE: Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall
Fort Collins Tukwila, Washington
New Second Level Exterior and Mall Entries
Summit County Reply to Correction Letter #1
Development Permit Application D07 -432
S. A. Miro Job No. 07164
Dear Ms. Bradshaw:
See reply below in response to the following comment: "Please review lighting fixture
specifications and design and provide alternatives that are in keeping with the building's and
project 's architectural motifs"
We have revised the two exterior lighting fixtures on each side of the new exterior entry doors to
the Winona lighting 5740- WL -33- Melinda. We will be using the F8 /MH39 lamp system with two
F8 fluorescent lamps for general lighting with the metal halide down lamps. The finish will be
custom painted "Bone White" to match the storefront frame color which is adjacent.
Cut/information sheets are attached and the fixture callout on sheet ME -2 has been changed to
reflect this fixture.
Let us know if you have any questions in this regard.
Sincerely,
S IRO, INC
ice President
r, P.E.
mjl (x: /Jobs2007 /07- 164 /00 /Corres /Itr019 -Moira Bradshaw — Tukwila Bldg- Planning Dept- 011608)
S. A. MIRO, INC. 4582 South Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, Colorado 80237 www.samiro.com Tel 303 - 741 -3737 FAX 303 - 694 -3134
6
MELINDA • 5740 - WL
Product Specification:
5740 -WL-
titatal Sarni*
5740 - Wt. - 23 ! (2)40W A-19
111145 (2)40W A -19 & 45W PAR16 Halogen
VMH2O ....:...........__._... (2)40W A -19 & 20W MR16 Metal Halide
F (2)FT39W12G11
FIH45 (2)FT39Wt2G11 & 45W PAR16 Halogen
F /MH2O__ ( 2)F139W12G11 &20WMR16 Metal Halide
OR
5740 - WL - 33 1 (3)40W A -19
/HSO (3 )40W A -19 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
1/MH39 (3)40W A -19 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
F (2)FT4OW /2G11
F/HSO _ (2)F140W12G11 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
F /MH34 (2)FT40W72G11 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
FT8 (2)F17T8
FT8/1450 (2)F17T8 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
FT8/AIH39 (2)F17T8 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
FT12 (2.1F24T12H0
FT12/HSO (2)F24T12H0 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
FTI2 /MH39 (2)F24112H0 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
winona
tatnpsw U(towt1Hght Pos1tian trpitage
Sideview with no up or
downlight. Extended
ballast housing only
required for up and /or
downlight.
X _- None (use
onlyforlandF
larnping options)
D= Downlight
U _ Uplight
UD = Up and Down
lights
UL Listed:
Wet Location
Wino winona lighting on the web • www.winonalighting.corn
ttni Opt
WEIGHT
120V =120 Volt
277V=277 Volt
Note: 120V only
when using
incandescent or
halogen lightsource.
Finish
catalog N 'standard finishes
BAL'LBP
BB
i BAi.7I.BP
BB
OA Opal Acrylic
FAH4 = White Vein Faux Alabaster
FAHS = Antique Faux Alabaster
FAH6 = Gray Vein Faux Alabaster
FAH7 Beige Vein Faux Alabaster
weight
..............
40 Ibs
70 Ibs
561bs
881bs
3760 west fourth street • winona, minnesota 55987 • 507 -454- 5113 • fax: 507 -452 - 8528
BAL = Brushed Aluminum
BB = Brushed Brass
LBP = Light Bronze Paint with
Brushed Texture
CPF = Custom Paint Finish
CMF = Custom Metal Finish
Full Cylinders
A = Projection with
mounting back box
B Projection with no
mounting back box
7
A
131/14"1( //% 1 11
Options
51'0
STD - Standard
MOD = Modified
Standard i
X =none
'BATTERY (See page 13)
EMC =__= Cold Weather
EMW = Warm Weather
(Notes: Available for FT8 and FT12 ONLY.
Up /Down Lights cannot be
used in Battery specification.)
HONEYCOMB LOUVER
LU = Louver up
LD = Louver down
LLUD = Louver up & down
Your Specification: - - - - - - —
(Catalog Number) (Lamping) (Orientation) (Voltage) (Lens) (Finish) (Battery) (Special)
CATALOG NUMBER:
6740 -WL -23
6740 -WL -33
LAMPINGz
5740 - WL - 23
I (2) 40W Al 9
UH45 (2) 40W A19 & 45W PAR16 Halogen
IIMH2O (2) 40W A19 & 20W MR16 Metal Halide
F39 (2) 39W/2G11
F39/H45 (2) 39W/2G11 & 45W PAR16 Halogen
F39/MH20 (2) 39W/2G11 & 20W MR16 Metal Halide
5740 -WL -33
I (3) 40W A19
I /H60 (2) 40W Al 9 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
IIMH39 (2) 40W A19 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
F40 (2) FT402G11
F40 /HSO (2) FT402G11 & 50W PAR 20 Halogen
F40/MH39 (2) FT402G11 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
F8 (2) F17T8
F8/H60 (2) F17T8 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
F8IMH39 (2) F17T8 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
F12 (2) F24T12H0
F12/HSO (2) F24T12H0 & 50W PAR20 Halogen
F121MH39 (2) F24T12H0 & 39W PAR20 Metal Halide
ORIENTATION.
VOLTAGE:
120V 120 Volt
277V 277 Volt (Incandescent & Halogen 120V only)
j_ENS OPTIONS:
SPECIAL/MODIFICATIONS DESC.
(MOD only):
OA 1 Opal Acrylic
FAH4 White Vein (Hand Painted Faux Alabaster)
FAH5 Antique Alabaster (Beige)
(Hand Painted Faux Alabaster)
FAH6 Gray Vein (Hand Painted Faux Alabaster)
FAH7 Beige Vein (Hand Painted Faux Alabaster)
FINISHES:
Standard
BAL Brushed Aluminum
BB l Brushed Brass
LBP Light Bronze Paint with Brushed Detail
Custom
CPF Custom Painted Finish (Consult Factory)
CMF Custom Metal Finish (Consult Factory)
DATTERY BACK UP: (F8 & F12 LAMPING ONLY)
PROJECT: QTY:
NOTES:
• UL WET LISTED AND CUL APPROVED.
• WINONA LIGHTING PRODUCTS ARE
UNION MADE.
• CUSTOM SIZES AVAILABLE UPON
REQUEST.
• ALL FLUORESCENT FIXTURES AVAILABLE
IN 120 V AND 277 V, UNLESS PAIRED
WITH HALOGEN UP /DOWN LIGHT.
• INCANDESCENT 120 V ONLY.
• WINONA LIGHTING RESERVES THE RIGHT
TO MAKE DESIGN CHANGES WITHOUT
PRIOR NOTICE.
• LAMPS NOT INCLUDED.
X No Battery Back Up
EMC 1 Cold Weather Battery Back Up
EMW Warm Weather Battery Back Up
SPECIAL:
STD Standard
MOD Modified
WEIGHT (ibs):
6740 - WL - 23
BAL/LBP 40
BB 70
6740 - WL - 33
BAULBP 56
BB 88
U Par Lamp in the Up Position
D Par Lamp in the Down Position
UD Par Lamps in the Up & Down Position
w i n o n a 3760 West Fourth
Street - Winona, MN 55987 — 1 328 - 5291 —
www.wlnonallghting.com
507 - 454 -5113 — Fax 507 -452 -8528 —
I I g a t 1 II I
LUMINAIRE SUBMITTAL
I MODEL #: 5740 —WL SERIES: EXTERIORS 3.0 MODEL NAME: MELINDA
1 TYPE:
5740 -WL -23
3137S
I
SIDE VIM tiIIIH NO
Ur
ON DOW NLIGHt
10/9/2007
January 7, 2008
Milton Lanser
4582 S Ulster St Py, Ste 1501
Denver CO 80237
RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1
Development Permit Application Number D07 -432
Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall
Dear Mr. Lanser,
This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit(s) can
be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and
reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building and Planning Departments. At
this time the Fire and Public Works Departments have no comments.
Building Department: David Larson at 206 431 -3678 if you have questions regarding the
attached memo.
Planning Department: Moira Carr Bradshaw at 206 431 -3651 if you have questions
regarding the attached memo.
Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans,
specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) complete sets of revised
plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision
block.
In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every
resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person
and will not be accepted throurh the mail or by a messenger service.
Sincerely,
iffy M shall
it Technician
encl
File No. D07 -432
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director
P:\Pemrit Center\Correction Letters\2007 D07 -432 Correction Ltr #1.DOC
le
Jim Haggerton, Mayor
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
1
Building Division Review Memo
Date: December 19, 2007
Project Name: Sears
Permit #: D07 -432
Plan Review: Dave Larson, Senior Plans Examiner
Tukwila Building Division
Dave Larson, Senior Plan Examiner
The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the
following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable
documentation.
(GENERAL NOTE)
PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size).
(If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet
stamped, not copied.)
1. The letter from the engineer may only address vertical load conditions that will not be changed by the
removal of the two sections of CMU wall. Please have the engineer verify that lateral integrity will
not be affected as well or that the wall itself does not need any additional bracing to restore its
integrity.
2. Emergency lighting will need to be added to the means of egress pathway connecting the new exit
doors to the existing means of egress. Emergency lighting is also required on the exterior side of exit
doorways per section 1006 IBC. Please show emergency lighting details on plans. Also add lighted
exit signs at new exits.
Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206 -431-
3670. No further comments at this time.
Interdepartmental Memorandum
From: Moira Carr Bradshaw, Senior Planner
Department of Community Development
Planning Division
206 431 3651; mbradshaw @ci.tukwila.wa.us
\ \Tuk2 \vol3\HOME\MOIRA\mall\D07 -432 Sears.doc
Date: 07 January 2008
Subject: Sears TI D07 -432
Please review lighting fixture specifications and design and provide alternatives that are in keeping with
the building's and project's architectural motifs.
M 1 R 0
Denver
Fort Collins
Summit County
Civil Engineering
Structural Engineering
Retail Architecture
December 11, 2007
Mr. Allen Johannessen
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, WA 98188
RE: Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall
Tukwila, Washington
New Second Level Exterior and Mall Entries
Reply to Letter of Incomplete Application #1
Development Permit Application D07 -432
S. A. Miro Job No. 07164
Dear Mr. Johannessen:
See reply below in response to the comment: "Provide engineering calculations for wall removal
and construction of the opening to the new mall addition. Plans and calculations shall be wet
stamped and originally signed by the engineer."
The wall removal at both the new exterior and mall entry areas are completed in such a way that
structural modifications and calculations are not required. As may be noted on the drawings and
was verified in the field, the exterior wall construction is brick masonry veneer over CMU with a
concrete floor and vertical structure. Refer to sheet A -3 for wall sections indicating these details.
The exterior brick is being removed from the second floor line up to the bottom of an existing
ledger support angle just below the third level and then infilled with a storefront frame and glazing
system. Since the brick is removed to the existing steel ledger angle above, no additional lintel or
other support is needed.
The CMU (Concrete Masonry Units)are being removed from the line of the concrete floor
structure at the second level up to the bottom of the concrete beam of the third level floor
structure above. Since the CMU is removed to the concrete beam above, no additional lintel or
other support is needed.
The concrete building frame is the supporting structure for the building and there are no
modifications to the concrete building frame as part of this project.
We are including an engineering stamp and signature as part of this letter for your records.
Let us know if you have any questions in this regard.
Sincerely, Reviewed by:
S. 9 MIRO, IN
Vice President
ilton J. Lanser, P.E. David P. Renn, P.E.
Associate
INCOMPLETE
LTR#
mjl (x: /Jobs2007 /07- 164 /00 /Corres /Itr015 -Allen Johannnessen — Tukwila Building
CITY RECEIVED TUKWILA
DEC 14 2007
PERMIT CENTER
I EXPIRES ii, 4= /Zo I
S. A. MIRO, INC. 4582 South Ulster Street Suite 1501 Denver, Colorado 80237 www.samiro.com Tel 303 - 741 -3737 FAX 303 - 694 -3134
November 29, 2007
Milton Lanser
4582 S Ulster St Py, Ste 1501
Denver CO 80237
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director
RE: Letter of Incomplete Application # 1
Development Permit Application D07 -432
Sears — 400 Southcenter Mall
Dear Mr. Lanser,
This letter is to inform you that your permit application received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center on
November 27, 2007 is determined to be incomplete. Before your application can continue the plan
review process the attached items from the following department needs to be addressed:
Building Department: Allen Johannessen at 206 433 -7163 if you have any questions
concerning the following comment.
Steven M. Mullet, Mayor
Please address the comment above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications,
and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or
other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block.
In order to better expedite your resubmittal a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every
resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Revisions must be made in person and will not
be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service.
If you have any questions, please contact me at the Permit Center at (206) 431 -3670.
Sincerely,
ifer Marshall
it Technician
Enclosures
File: D07 -432
P:\Permit Center\lncomplete Letters\2007\D07 -432 Incomplete Ltr #1.DOC
jem
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 -431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Determination of Completeness Memo
Date: November 29, 2007
Project Name: Sears
Permit #: D07 -432
Plan Review: Allen Johannessen, Plans Examiner
Tukwila Building Division
Allen Johannessen, Plan Examiner
The Building Division has deemed the subject permit application incomplete. To assist the applicant in
expediting the Department plan review process, please forward the following comments.
(GENERAL NOTE)
PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size).
(If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets shall be original signed wet stamped,
not copied.)
1. Provide engineering calculations for wall removal and construction of the opening to the new mall
addition. Plans and calculations shall be wet stamped and originally signed . by the engineer.
Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206 -431 -3670.
No further comments at this time.
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D07 -432 DATE: 03 -27 -08
PROJECT NAME: SEARS
SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL
Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter #
Response to Correction Letter # X Revision # 1 After Permit Issued
DEPARTMENTS:
-
Buil•fl >; l'vision
Public Works ❑
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Complete
Comments:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
Documents/routing siip.doc
2 -28 -02
PERMIT COORD COPY
PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP
Fire Prevention
Structural
Incomplete ❑
❑
❑ Permit Coordinator
DUE DATE: 04 -01-08
Not Applicable E
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
TUES/THURS ROUTING:
Please Route d Structural Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
No further Review Required
DATE:
Planning Division
n
C
n
DUE DATE: 04 -29-08
Approved 2( Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) n
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
DATE:
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
DEPARTMENTS:
Building iDivision I
Public Works
Complete
Comments:
`-' PERMIT COORD COPY`'
PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D07 -432 DATE: 01 -18 -08
PROJECT NAME: SEARS
SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL
Original Plan Submittal
X Response to Correction Letter # 1
Response to Incomplete Letter #
Revision # After Permit Issued
Fire Prevention
Structural
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Incomplete ❑
Plarikavihf ie
Permit Coordinator ❑
DUE DATE: 01-22-08
Not Applicable ❑
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
TUES/THURS ROUT NG:
Please Route Structural Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2 -28-02
No further Review Required
DATE:
DATE:
DUE DATE: 02-19-08
Not Approved (attach comments) n
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
DEPARTMENTS:
dvi4;lbtt
Building Division
Public Works ❑
Complete
Comments:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2 -28 -02
PERMIT COORD COPY
PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D07 -432 DATE: 12 -14 -07
PROJECT NAME: SEARS
SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL
Original Plan Submittal X Response to Incomplete Letter # 1
Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued
Fire Prevention
Structural
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Incomplete ❑
TUES/THURS ROUT NG:
Please Route Structural Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: � �� ► 1
Departments issued corrections: Bldg ►'.1 Fire ❑ Ping
/�/� j d 44
Planning Division
Permit Coordinator n
DUE DATE: 12 -18-07
Not Applicable n
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
No further Review Required
DATE:
DUE DATE: 01 -1 508
Approved E Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) Fi
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE:
PW ❑ Staff Initials:
n
ACTIVITY NUMBER: D07 -432 DATE: 11 -27 -07
PROJECT NAME: SEARS
SITE ADDRESS: 400 SOUTHCENTER MALL
X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter #
Response to Correction Letter #
Revision # After Permit Issued
DEPARTME
Bui ng D si 1 . r �
Public Works
•- 5 tug .
11
PERMIT COORD COPY
PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP
6( AWG (kif?
Fire Prevention
Structural ❑
DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.)
Complete n Incomplete
Comments:
Planning Division
Permit Center Use Only
INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: l( 2et, LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED:
Departments determined incomplete: Bldg Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials
Permit Coordinator
DUE DATE: 11-29-07
Not Applicable n
TUES/THURS ROUTING:
Please Route ❑ Structural Review Required n No further Review Required
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS:
Documents/routing slip.doc
2 -28 -02
DATE:
n
DUE DATE: 12-27-07
Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments)
Notation:
REVIEWER'S INITIALS:
DATE:
n
Permit Center Use Only
CORRECTION LETTER MAILED:
Departments issued corrections:
Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials:
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summary of Revision:
Summary of Revision: (9 601 fl N( A f M motrlf/kiV i.S t ) G Pv6-12 c c
6 4 X F tvO'Y Mint l - C , e - r G flz>( & IAf11K1 r 4 D t f ' f v t 1 Aivoy tMA-Not-As
Received by: A ga Ni i 1-i
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summary of Revision:
Received by:
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summary of Revision:
Received by:
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summary of Revision:
- Received by:
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summary of Revision:
Received by:
REVISION
NO.
DATE RECEIVED
STAFF
INITIALS
ISSUED DATE
STAFF
INITIALS
Summary of Revision:
Received by:
PROJECT NAME: ri
SITE ADDRESS: LjOb cyC
REVISION LOG
PERMIT NO: L
ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: b fr(t Vb
(please print)
(please. print)
(please print)
(please print)
(please print)
1
REVISION SUBMITTAL
1
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail, fax, etc.
Date:
❑ Response to Incomplete letter #
❑ Response to Correction Letter #
• Revision # 1 after Permit is Issued
❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner
Project Name: Sears
Contact Person: Milt Lanser
City of Tukwila
Department of Community f)evelopntc'!tt
6300 Southeenter I3oulevard. Suite on
1 uk�ti ila. AV'asltinoon (-)S1 ti
2o6-431-3070
1 ax: 206-431- 3(105
Web site: Or tt•u•u•.ci.ttth.trilrr.n•a.tec
Project Address: 400 Southcenter Mall
Plan Check/Permit Number: D07 -432
.Sn r ii .t /. ,tlrrll. t. .1/,rt• „r
.S'tcve L <Utc :+re,,
RECE
cm' OF ALA
MAR 2 7 2008
0ERMtr oENTER
Phone Number: (303) 741 -3737 x 285
Summary of Revision: Modify drawing to include additional floor finish and fixturing
modifications in a portion of the second level sales area near the new mall and exterior
entries. Convert a small portion of sales to a stock room adjacent to one side of the new
exterior entry and stock room on the opposite side of the new exterior entry to remain instead
of be converted to sales. Associated lighting and mechanical diffuser modifications and
electrical power for three cash register stations to be added. Revisions have been clouded.
Sheet A2.1 and A2.2 were added to show the demolition and new work on the entire second
floor since there were partial floor plans only on the original drawings and sheet F1.0 was
added to show the area of changes in the store fixturing layout.
Sheet Number(s): A0.0(Cover) , A1.0, A2.0, A2.1, A2.2, A3.0, A4.0, ME.1, ME.2, F1.0
"Cloud” or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision
Received at the City of "I ukwila Permit Center bv:
Entered in Permits Plus on
!b_ Ic i •h , iii ^nir�i
D%71
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail, fax, etc.
Date: - "Zi}rt 1 2000 Plan Check/Permit Number:
❑ Response to Incomplete Letter #
® Response to Correction Letter # 1
❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued
❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner
Project Name: Sears
Entered in Permits Plus on
City of Tukwila
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 -431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
Project Address: 400 Southcenter Mall
\applications\forms- applications on line\revision submittal
Created: 8 -13 -2004
Revised:
Sheet Number(s): CoY-C',e A4.0 10,9 43_0 it 4-c /17e: / P2 EZ.
"Cloud" or highlight all areas of rev including date of revision
Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by:
Steven M. Mullet, Mayor
Steve Lancaster, Director
RECEIVED
cm/ nr 7 'tK'Ntt a
JAN 1 8 2008
HEHMU CENTEFI
. _
Contact Person: m I 1.31314 LAN Phone Number: 0 ? j � / -3 7P x.?h'S
Summary of Revision:
lc ,& t c — D e Ltsr ME -2 _ 012144,v Ag46,n I alu /a0
A-I -o — Ex rz L► own N S ru ers
A.7,0 -- C- Miv>=y 4 4 or N Ca oN k /A•?. o
CtAxii; Cou7ia o t. - c i avar t ucno, cts oc.c_ ij - CQio-
/t .1 1° G.UI SE hac�473a✓ of R L:.II GILA_ 4. ADD S JIgIur Nyva' R7 o/Lti,i o (04-o)
Me.! - 04 1" Fm424pa sus ExrE,ea; - 66i -rnws giavizizs'/CiAtiFy 6.7374000- -Cope
"i ?, No Prz. ✓/Slot Sinz7t- !sr ✓ ;t t -i,:,G pe- F,c,cc c c G ,m n r
Tpk, 2c'o 9
Department of Community Development
6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Phone: 206 - 431 -3670
Fax: 206 - 431 -3665
Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us
REVISION SUBMITTAL
Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through
the mail, fax, etc.
Date:
how
City of Tukwila
Plan Check/Permit Number: D07 -432
® Response to Incomplete Letter # 1
❑ Response to Correction Letter # -
❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued
❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner
Project Name: Sears
Project Address: 400 Southcenter Mall
Contact Person: m L(.T LAN $
\applications \forms- applications on line\revision submittal
Created: 8 -13 -2004
Revised:
Summary of Revision: Leurt1- ter-• st"Ru011/0 - N5 t N Erit, 4 t7Y
Sheet Number(s): Wor Ap'�t c4 [t'
"Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of r ' ision
Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by
Entered in Permits Plus on
Steven M. Mullet, Mayor
Steve Lancaster, Director
RECEIVED
CITV OF TI 1KWILA
DEC 14 2007
PERM17 CENTER
Phone Number: Cgo3) 79l 373 k 2 YS'
Business Owner Information
Name
Role
Effective Date
Expiration Date
BASTIAN, BRAD
PRESIDENT
05/23/2001
Bond
Amount
NIELSEN, JEFF
VICE PRESIDENT
05/23/2001
103355900
Bond Information
Bond
Bond
Company
Name
Bond
Account
Number
Effective
Date
Expiration
Date
Cancel
Date
Impaired
Date
Bond
Amount
Received
Date
#3
TRAVELERS
CAS &
SURETY CO
103355900
08/30/2001
Until
Cancelled
$12,000.00
09/06/2001
Look Up a Contractor, Electric' qn or Plumber License Detail Page 1 of 2
Sloe
Washington State Department of Labor and Industries
General/Specialty Contractor
A business registered as a construction contractor with L &I to perform
construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty
construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of
account and carry general liability insurance.
License Information
License
Licensee Name
Licensee Type
UBI
Ind. Ins. Account Id
Business Type
Address 1
Address 2
City
County
State
Zip
Phone
Status
Specialty 1
Specialty 2
Effective Date
Expiration Date
Suspend Date
Separation Date
Parent Company
Previous License
Next License
Associated License
BNBUII *990K3
B N BUILDERS INC
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR
602056687
CORPORATION
2601 4TH AVE STE 350
SEATTLE
KING
WA
98121
2067180960
ACTIVE
GENERAL
UNUSED
5/23/2001
9/12/2009
BASTINB0000J
PURODSI984JN
https: // fortress .wa.gov /lni/bbip /printer.aspx ?License= BNBUII *990K3 03/26/2008
0
0
ce
cn
Lu
I
b
I
O
0
a
'1
o Q
4N'
co
ato
m0
< �
,X 4,
Acldil ien
Additional
Aggregate
Anchor (Anc;hor
Anchor Halt
Aricalc
Aparexirnale
Archi1ecl
At
!team
Hear inq
Between
Rack
1 c,ttorn
Brick
Huildinca
Cast In Place
Ceiling
Center
Centerline
Circle
Clear
Column
Concrete
Concrete Masonry Unit
Connection
Construction
Construction Joint
Continue or Continuous
Contractor
Control Joint
Cubic Foot
Cubic Inch
Cubic Yard
Dead Load
Deep
Depth
Detail
Depression
Develop
Diagonal
Diameter
Dimension
Ditto
Double Extra Strong
Dowel
Down
Drawing
Each
Each Face
Each Way
Each Side
East — West
Electrical
Elevation
Elevator
Engineer
Equal
Equally Spaced
Equipment
Equivalent
Existing
Expansion
Expansion Anchor
Expansion Bolt
Expansion Joint
Exterior
Extra Strong
Far Side
Face to Face
Finish
Fireproof
Flange
Floor
Flush
Foot
Footing
Foundation
Framing
Gage or Gauge
Galvanized
Grade
Grade Beam
Headed
Headed Anchor Bolt
Headed Anchor Stud
ABBREVIATIONS
ADD
AI)I)NI
ACGI2
ANCI
A.l i
1
APt'R()X
ANGi I
IiM
H12(;
ItIWN
Hl K
HOI
1312K
HI DG
C
C.I.P.
C LC
CTR
CL
CIR
CLR
COL
CONC
CMU
CONN
CONSTR
G.J.
CONT
CONTR
C.J.
CU. FT
CU. IN
CU. YD
DL
DP
DP
DET or DTL
DEPR
DVL
D IAG
DIA
DIM
DO
XX STRONG
DWL
DN
DWG
EA
E.F.
E.W.
E.S.
E —W
ELEC
EL
ELEV
ENGR
EQ
EQ. SP-
EQPT
EQUIV
EXIST
EXP
EXP ANCH
EXP BOLT
EXP JT, E.J
EXT
X— STRONG
F.S
F to F
FI N
FPRF
FLG
FLR
FL
FT
FTG
FDN
FRAM
GA
GALV
GR
GR.BM
HD
H.A.B.
H.A.S.
11ealing Ventilating
and Air Conditioning
1Iciyht
Height x Width x I ength
Ilc)ri /antal
Inside Diameter
Inside f ace
Interior
Joint
Kip
I onglh
I ight Weight
I anq I ey Vertical
I onq I e.g Horizontal
M(Clllne Hoorn
Manufacturer
Masonry
Material
Maximum
Mechanical
Membrane
Membrane Waterproofing
Minimum
Miscellaneous
Moment Connections
Not To Scale
Number
On Center
Opening
Opposite
Opposite Hand
Outside Diameter
Outside Face
Partition
Penetration
Plate (Steel)
Plywood
Precast
Premolded Expansion Joint
Property Line
Radius
Refer (Reference)
Reinforce (ing)
Reinforced Concrete
Require
Required
Riser (Stair)
Room
Rough Opening
Round
Schedule
Section
Sheathing
Short Leg Vertical
Short Leg Horizontal
Similar
Slab on Ground
Square
Standard
Steel
Stiffener
Stirru p
Strength
Structural
Structure
Support
Top
Top of Steel
Top & Bottom
Top of Conc
Top Of
Tread (stairs)
Typical
Vertical
Waterproof
Waterproofing
Weight
Welded Wire Fabric
Width
With
Working Point
Wood
I IVAC
ICI
11xWxL.
ID
I.I .
INIR
J I
K
IC
I.WI
IIV
1 H
MACI I.RM
MI 12
MAS
MATL
MAX
MECH
MEMB
MWP
MIN
MISC
MC
NTS
NO or
O.C.
OPNG
OPP
OPP.HD.
O.D.
O.F.
PTN
PENE.
PL
PLYWD
P/C
P.E.J.
PL
RAD or R
RE:
REINF.
REINF.CONC.
REQ
REQ'D
R
RM
RO
RND or •
SCHED
SECT
SHTHG
SLV
SLH
SIM.
S.O.G.
SO or
STD
STL
STIFF
STI R
STR
STRL
STRUCT.
5PRT
T
T.O.S.
T & B
T.O.C.
T.O.
T
TYP.
VERT.
WTRPRF
WPG
WT
W.W.F.
WD
W/
WP
WD
BUILDING ADDRESS
400 SOL.11F1 CI NI! R MA11
TUKWII A, WAS' ZINC, I ON
BUILDING CODES
1. BUILDING CO )1:
?. MLCHANICAI C01)1 :
.S. PI UMBINC C01)1 :
4 . LI. [-CTR!CAI (;01)I :
5. FIRE CODE:
6. ACCESSIBILITY CODE:
7. ENERGY CODE:
7. OTHER CODE:
CODE REVIEW SUMMARY
BUILDING INFORMATION
1. EVALUATED AS A THREE LEVEL RETAIL STORE FACILITY WHICH IS
ATTACHED TO THE MALL BUILDING AND IS PROVIDED WITH THE FOLLOWING
SYSTEMS: FULL FIRE — EXTINGUISHING (SPRINKLER) SYSTEM_
2. OCCUPANCY GROUP: RETAIL: M— MERCANTILE. AND S -1, STORAGE
3. CONSTRUCTION TYPE: IIA
4. ASSESSOR TAX No.: 537920 -0330
BUILDING AREA
55,969
55,678
55,793
167,444
GROUND FLOOR
SECOND FLOOR
THIRD FLOOR
TOTAL
2. AREA OF WORK FOR THIS PROJECT = 1,200 SF
IBC 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AvENDMENTS
IMC - 2006 WI 1 H WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS
UPC — 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS
NEC 2002 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS
IFC — 2006 WITH WASHINGTON AMENDMENTS
ICC /ANSI A117.1-1998
STATE ENERGY CODE AND INDOOR QUALITY CODE
STATE BUILDING CODE
LEGAL DESCRIPTION
THAT PORTION OF I HE NORTHWEST QUARTER OF SECTION 26, TOWNSHIP 23 NORTH, RANGE 4 EAST, W.M.
DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS:
COMMENCING AT THE NORTHWEST CORNER OF THE NORTHEAST QUARTER OF SAID SECTION 26;
THENCE N89 °40'24 "W ON AN EXTENSION OF THE NORTH LINE OF THE NORTHEAST QUARTER OF
SAID SECTION 26, 23.00 FEET; THENCE SO °19'36 "W 433.32 FEET TO THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING;
THENCE CONTINUING SO° 19'36 "W 257.58 FEET; THENCE N89 °40'24 "W 302 FEET; THENCE NO° 19'36 "W 236.16 FEET;
THENCE S89 °40'24 "E 1 19.00 FEET; THENCE NO° 19'36 "E 21.42 FEET; THENCE S89 °40'24 "E 183.00 FEET
TO THE TRUE POINT OF BEGINNING.
SITUATED IN THE CITY OF TUKWILA, COUNTY OF KING, STATE OF WASHINGTON
��� /�• /
41
'�`;% / f wow 9 7 '//•• d oYG xam u e 3 +i N.•.iri iilrir.
f e/
' i i// ' /,'/„2'/_,Z;///f/iii://:////.4/4/11/1' "Ili//1:/f:I'"1:2/////i/le:;;;1171: 1 ' / C 7
f+ l �`F/F
J
/ /f
/,'./.. / II ,. / //' / / / ".,/; , //.,/‘, 4A tp: ,//,/, ?". ./;;;;/././/,,,, ..F. ',/ / F_/.4f: , :
%;///' :/,;;(!//' Pd0 // 4 // / / //4 / 4 //, / , f /4 /7 / / '/ 4 1;/
; / ; / 4 ' / / / /1/ •/' 1//' //' / 1:"/ 1// //,/, 4" :///Y/7 ;/////// //////5::///;://:/..4//://i////.1/"../////,11//1/
4 " ' / / ii 1 / ' / ;`,/ , , ,.' , / 7 1 ei ./.; /// ./. / / 7,1 '1 : / // // (//' //'/';' ' / ' 1 ./ 4 J./ / ' / / / 9///(/
f / 2>:, „ :,/,/ /;/;//,/' / /,: //i2. , :::: T /:/; „; :// i v., .. / //fa:
Y _ Y'
{
i f
//, • 4/4e"; /9, //// ' //•• 1 ,7/ ' / '' // / // / , / //,,,, /
: .. V'o-..+0. . 00 / / i //ff� ,C..i�.�..i,�i f : / f •: { 1R.:
xv://. ..., , ,,.... 7 .,, ,
i ',./1-/17 ;: / / A : // /7 /?:,'„ /1 2, -". ////74.7
r /
aoeg'
•
n e.v tilt
.w 'ff1.wfff/1ff1N1JSfNi
{s I. I:w•' :;ice . # ?+�
. :wa ref:n.fffQZQa:: : -/. ?Wk::n.::vr.; . R V. k..,rrf. ks. .ci.�c•:,x:.: >:.
Qcvowo » oo+ f A'A+Fa:rm ry o•. %.1..; . •: fi ? C n'. ?: r•vhy::�:TiiPNfrk'fA+iaiti..
"�d ff d}'!F mvx.x ';f{ ff+ffi {fF.2�.�. .... 'f fl.N,N, �eeu',eEbid'ffv ,v,[ae• A
:.
�dF f,N:.w.nctnc»k. .': o: exo .vfrin..w,:,:r..r+:.o.,�w.�.N. .+ww..::N.. f • '' '^' '.,,� }/,ty. i. °.,..�. ...uae�eeraeeeecmeeemaeea�ea. ' ..'. � ,wfee A` 6
VICINITY MAP
PROJECT CONSULTANT:
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741 —3737
4 0 SOUTHCENTER MALL
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188
NEW SECOND LEVEL EXTERIOR & MAIN ENTRIES
PROJECT ARCHITECT:
Robert Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741-3737
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
A -0 COVER SHEET, INDEX, ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES, AND LOCATION NAP
A -1 SECOND LEVEL REFERENCE PLAN AND EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A -2 ENLARGED FLOOR AND CEILING PLANS
A -3 WALL SECTIONS
A -4 DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE
ME -1 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLAN
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
DRAWINGS INDEX
FILE COPY
Permit No.
Filar review approval Is subject toerns and
Approval of Construction downing does .
the Wolation of any adopted code orord4�
of APProv$d Field Co .....:, . _Receipt
By
S C ► of Tukwila
_DING DIVISION
SEPARATE PERMIT
REQUIRED FOR:
Electrical
Electrical
wring
W ees Piping
City of Tukwila
BUILDING DIVISION
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY REVIEW THE DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND
SITE TO VERIFY ALL SITE CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK.
BE G OR K.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY INCONSISTENCIES TO THE ARCHITECT
IMMEDIATELY FOR RESOLUTION BEFORE BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION.
ALL PHASES OF WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF THE
BUILDING CODE CURRENTLY USED BY THE CITY, STATE AND LOCAL ORDINANCES
THAT MAY APPLY. HOWEVER, WHERE THE DRAWINGS AND/OR T
D/O SPECIFICATIONS ARE MORE
STRINGENT THEY SHALL GOVERN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE ARCHITECT OF
ANY CODE DISCREPANCY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF WORK.
ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH OSHA STANDARDS.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHALL HAVE PRECEDENCE OVER SCALING THE DRAWINGS. ALL
DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF CONCRETE OR MASONRY, CENTERLINE OF BEAM OR
COLUMNS AND TO FACE OF STUD, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
THE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE SPRINKLER
MODIFICATIONS, INCLUDING DESIGN, ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL PROTECTION REQUIRED TO ADEQUATELY
PROTECT PERSONNEL AND ADJACENT PROPERTY AND TO ENSURE THE SAFETY OF
THE PUBLIC AND STRUCTURE THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD.
ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH 2006 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE,
WASHINGTON STATE REGULATIONS FOR BARRIER FREE DESIGN, WASHINGTON STATE
ENERGY CODE, AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES, ORDINANCES, AND STANDARDS
CONTRACTOR IS TO VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, DIMENSIONS, DETAILS, ETC,
AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY AND ALL DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO
PROCEEDNG WITH THE WORK
CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE RELEVANT CITY AND STATE APPROVALS RELATING TO
FIRE, CONSTRUCTION, LABOR, HEALTH, AND LICENSING. CONTRACTOR SHALL
FURTHER POST ALL BONDS AND SECURE ALL INSURANCE REQUIRED BY LAW OR
CONTRACT, FORWARDING PROOF OF SUCH ACTIONS TO THE OWNER PRIOR TO
COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND PROVIDE ALL PERMITS FOR OCCUPANCY, UTILITIES
AND ANY OTHERS REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES BEYOND THE BASIC
BUILDING PERMIT, MAKING TIMELY APPLICATIONS AND INQUIRIES, PAYING ALL FEES
AND POSTING ALL BONDS TO BE RELEASED AT THE COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION
EXIT SIGNS AND EMERGENCY EXIT ILLUMINATION SHALL CONFORM TO THE 2006 IBC
CHAPTER 10 AND LOCAL JURISDICTION REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE
AND INSTALL EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND EXIT LIGHTING AS REQUIRED BY
JURISDICTIONAL FIRE AND BUILDING DEPARTMENTS. CONFIRM ACCEPTABILITY OF
LOCATIONS WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE BEFORE INSTALLATION
PROVIDE BIDDER DESIGNED FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. SYSTEM SHALL BE DESIGNED
AND SUBMITTED TO THE FIRE MARSHALL AND /OR APPROPRIATE ENGINEER FOR
APPROVAL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
GENERAL NOTES
ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEW AND FREE OF DEFECTS.
ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE OF THE HIGHEST QUALITY AND CONFOR
TO ACCEPTABLE INDUSTRY /TRADE STANDARDS.
ALL RUBBISH AND DEBRIS RESULTING FROM DEv1OLITION AND /OR NEW WOR<
SHALL BE DISPOSED OF OFF —SITE. v1AINTAIN BUILDING AREAS CLEAN AND
FREE OF DEBRIS ON A DAILY BASIS.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRING
ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING STRUCTURES OR ITEMS AND NEWLY INSTALLED MATERIALS
DURING CONSTRUCTION.
ALL CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND ALL OTHER TRADES
INVOLVED IN THE WORK OR PORTION THEREOF SHALL REVIEW THE
COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND HAVE KNOWLEDGE OF ALL THE
WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY ALL TRADES THAT EFFECTS SAID WORK AND
SHALL COORDINATE THEIR WORK WITH SAID CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS
AND TRADES.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK AND SCHEDULE WITH THE
OWNER AND USERS OF ALL ADJACENT BUILDINGS AND PROPERTIES.
CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP A RECORD SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
ON SITE AT ALL TIMES AND SHALL RECORD ALL ALTERATIONS FROv THE
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.
ALL LAY —IN ACCOUSTICAL CEILING GRIDS, LIGHT FIXTURES AND DIFFUSERS SHALL
BE INSTALLED AND SECURED PER LOCAL SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THIS PROJECT, AND ALL CONSTRUCTION
ACTIVITIES RELATED THERETO, CONFORM WITH ALL LOCAL, REGIONAL, STATE, AND /OR
FEDERAL REGULATIONS PERTAINING TO DISTURBING, DISPLACING, AND /OR REMOVAL
OF ASBESTOS OR ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS. NOTE SPECIFICALLY, THAT THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFORM WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PUGET SOUND AIR
POLLUTION CONTROL AGENCY REGARDING, INSPECTION, CERTIFICATION AND
NOTIFICATION
CORRECTION
cf , OF TUKWIG' �T
JAN 18 2008
REHMIT CENTER
SEARS -
TUKWILA,
WASHINGTON
16 JANUARY 2008
JOB NO:
07164
NEW BRIDGE FROM
PARKING GARAGE
Al .0
EXISTING EAST ELEVATION
NEW EAST ELEVATION
EXISTING SOUTH ELEVATION
WALL MOUNTED
LIGHTING FIXTURES
RE: ELECTRICAL (MEC)
SEARS
REMOVE PORTION OF
EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW
MALL ENTRY RE: DEIAILS
FOR SIZE AND EXTENT (MEC)
IL
NEW BRIDGE BY MALL
NEW STORE FRONT ENTRY (MEC)
SCALE: 1/16" =
FILVE,PaEEIELIESSEP.,M'EkttEtcIEVEVEV.f.EIEF'a.sgES,'-
=rggra
wi.L
.1111111111.11.1nn
,rmms ■Nem
============== m•ilamm.=.
mV.W.M.V.VM.7.VE.VM.WM.V.W.er(Z3 I II
I g ULM L WA m anari IVA= t..-
0■waswira Era kr: Woo ammo: aa i ihWeffee.
..........■■■■•■■■moureammisammammmo
11 a sal i Fa i ran ree:WEff:Wa
EN.■■■■■.0.
IMMOMOIMIIIIIIII17111111111111CM•1117.11WarthWaWl
111•1•1=========MMMM==M=M101•111111111111
rarira
reATZAWATZenifirri
SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"
SCALE: 1/16" =
4'.-0 CENTERLINE OF FIXTURE TO EDGE OF FRAME
---- LOCATE MID HEIGHT OF LIGHT FIXTURE AT MID
HEIGHT OF CLEAR TRANSOM ABOVE DOORS
EXISTING LOCATION OF
BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT
ANGLE
EXISTING LOCATION OF
BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT
ANGLE
/
N
Nz
N
N
N
llL
EXISTING BRICK FACADE
OVER CMU WITH CONCRETE
STRUCTURE
REMOVE PORTION OF EXTERIOR
WALL FOR NEW MALL ENTRY
RE: DETAILS FOR SIZE AND
EXTENT (MEC)
MALL ENTRY FACADE TILE
BY MALL
4'-0 SEARS 5
FLAN A2.0 &
ME-1 FOR AD
NEW SEARS MALL ENTRY
I N RE:
LECTRICAL
L INFO.
EXISTING BRICK
FACADE OVER CMU
WITH CONCRETE
STRUCTURE
Al .0
NEW SOUTH ELEVATION
SCALE: 1/16" =
,
oi074
4.
NE1A1 SECOND LEVEL
SEARS EXTERIOR
ENTRY
anumwe
o,
ma,),
0
V-10°
0
•
4
...r,
LLIgii5E2Z=72
•
1111•1111M1•11••••••••••••
•
lorrossamaama-=
'MM
1
111
SEARS R
SECO\3
ETA L STOR
LEVEL
/ 41
icsensissmassamen.
SECOND LEVEL REFERENCE PLAN
1
9
mom
FIRE LANE
NO PARKING
CEILING
FLOOR
111
111
SCALE: 1/16" = 1
0
_J9
CEILING
FLOOR
•
0
v
ALL PAR<1\G GARAG
- ICO \ 3 LEVEL
0
0
E
g
FIRE LAN
,
11
TTJ
0
41
LA
1 a MMMMMMMMMMMM IMMEMMEM
1
IMEMEMMUMMEMMEMEMMEMMENUMENIIMI
IIIMMENOMMMMN MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
1
a
a 11
V=0"
MMM
0
ft
A' A
•
NEIN SEGONi LEVEL
SEA MALL ENTRY
UP
EXISTING SEAR
EXTERIOR ENTR
LEVEL BELOW
MALL GOURTYA
g
Doa
1
L__
v
ALL
L
SCO\D
EVEL
NEI/NI MALL EN I K AT
1ST LEVEL BELOW
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL/ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
JAN 1 8 2008
PEHMIT CENTER
Project Consultant:
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(.303) 741-3737
Contact: Milt Lanser
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741-3737
2
1
Issue:
Sheet Number:
80237
11/19/2007
11/07/2007
Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 1 1 /01 /2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A1.0
PRICING/PERMIT
REVIEW
Description:
A1.0
CEILING LEGEND (DASHED TO BE REMOVED)
SYMBOLS (DEMOLITION) DESCRIPTION SYMBOLS (NEW)
F
LJ
En
k J L -�nl
- - I -4 -I--
III!
- * -1- t - -
I I I I
SECURITY CAMERA
CEILING MOUNTED EXIT SIGN
WALL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN
SPEAKER
SPRINKLERS
4' -0" STRIP LIGHT
10 "X24" FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER
10 "X48" FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER
2x2 W /(3) FLUORESCENT LAMPS
RECESSED CAN LIGHT
TRACK LIGHTING
WALL MOUNTED OUTSIDE LIGHT
CEILING DIFFUSER (SUPPLY AIR)
CEILING DIFFUSER (RETURN AIR)
24 "x24" ACCESS PANEL
SHADED AREA INDICATES AREA OF
CEILING WORK
2X2 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE
GRID WORK (REFER TO
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR
CEILING HEIGHTS)
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING WORK
REFER TO CEILING PLAN
FOR HEIGHTS
®
0
0
>CI
Iv
v
F
DEMO FLOOR PLAN LEGEND /NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES
5.
6.
1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND DEMOLITION
SUBCONTRACTOR TO PROTECT ALL ITEMS WHICH ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE DEMOLISHED.
PARTICULARLY NOTE ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING WHICH IS TO
REMAIN INCLUDING THE DATA /TELEPHONE SYSTEM, ALARM SYSTEM AND SPEAKER
SYSTEM. PARTS OF THESE SYSTEMS NOT PARTICULARLY NOTED TO BE REMOVED ARE
TO REMAIN. REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT OF THESE SYSTEMS OR PORTIONS THEREOF TO
ORIGINAL CONDITION REQUIRED DUE TO DEMOLITION ACTIVITIES WILL BE THE
RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.
2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OWNER PRIOR TO
PROCEEDING WITH DEMOLITION WORK. COORDINATE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION, PROTECTION,
SALVAGE AND FINISHES TO REMAIN.
3. THE OWNER HAS CONDUCTED AN INVESTIGATION FOR ASBESTOS MATERIALS. REMOVAL OF
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL WILL BE ACCOMPLISHED BY THE OWNER UNDER SEPARATE
CONTRACT. IF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR DETECTS OR BELIEVES HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
EXISTS, CONTACT THE OWNER IMMEDIATELY AND DO NOT DISTURB THE AREAS IN
QUESTION.
4. ALL CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN IS TO BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION WORK TO
AVOID DAMAGE. ALL DAMAGE DUE TO DEMOLITION WORK IS TO BE REPAIRED BY
DEMOLITION CONTRACTOR TO ORIGINAL CONDITION.
COLUMN TEXTURE ON ADJACENT COLUMNS IS TO MATCH EXISTING. RELOCATE
THERMOSTATS AND OTHER ITEMS TO FACE OF COLUMN.
REMOVAL OF EXISTING CEILINGS, WALLS OR OTHER ELEMENTS, IN SOME CASES, RELATES
TO EXACT LOCATIONS OF NEW FLOORS OR WALLS. COORDINATE EXACT EXTENT OF
DEMOLITION WITH NEW LAYOUT.
7. EXISTING FIXTURE WALLS ARE TO BE REMOVED IN A MANNER TO ALLOW THE RE -USE
OF FIXTURE WALLS. COORDINATE WITH SEARS PROJECT MANAGER FOR RE -USE FOR THIS
LOCATION, OR IF FIXTURE WALL PARTS ARE TO BE PACKAGED AND SHIPPED TO ANOTHER
LOCATION.
8_ EXISTING CARPET, ETC. FLOOR FINISH TO BE REMOVED TO CONCRETE SURFACES IN
DESIGNATED AREAS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FLOOR SURFACE TO BE PREPARED
TO RECEIVE NEW FLOOR FINISH MATERIAL.
9.
SHADED AREAS INDICATE AREA OF FLOORING DEMOLITION.
LOOR FINISHES
WALL /DOOR LEGEND (DEv10LITI0N)
STONE TILE TO REMAIN
NEW STONE TILE
CARPET TO REMAIN
CARPET TO BE REMOVED
NEW CARPET
CONCRETE TO REMAIN
CONCRETE (PREPARE FOR FLOOR
FINISH)
EXISTING WALL TO BE REMOVED
i E EXISTING FIXTURE WALL TO BE REMOVED
WALL /DOOR LEGEND (NEW)
EXISTING WALL (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
NEW FIXTURE WALL BY SEARS - RE: Q /A4,0
NEW METAL STUD WALLS TO STRUCTURE
- RE: P /A4,0
FLOOR PLAN LEGEND /NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES
1. REFER TO SHEET A4.0 FOR DOOR SCHEDULE. DOOR NUMBERS INDICATED THUS:
2. PATCH ALL EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN WITH UNFINISHED FACES OR ENDS AS A RESULT OF DEMOLITION.
3. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY DEFICIENCIES NOTED IN PROVIDING PROPER HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL CODES.
4. AUDIBLE DOOR ALARM AND NEW EXTERIOR DOOR CONTACTS FOR BURGLAR SYSTEM ARE TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER A SEPARATE ALARM CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE
ALARM CONTRACTORS WORK AND PREPARE ALL ITEMS FOR SINGLE ALARM CONTRACTOR VISIT TO COMPLETE ALL ALARM WORK. ALARM CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH AND INSTALL REQUIRED CONNECTIONS AND
WIRING TO ALARM PANELS IN ASSET PROTECTION AREA
5. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A RIGID FRAMED CONSTRUCTION BARRIER, FLOOR TO CEILING, COMPLETELY SURROUNDING EACH AREA
BEING WORKED ON AND COVERED WITH WHITE, OPAQUE, FIRE PROOF FACING MATERIAL.
FLOORING NOTES
TILE AND CARPET AREA PREPARATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS (FURNISH & INSTALL SPECIFIED FLOOR LEVELING MATERIALS):
• FLOOR LEVELING COMPOUND TO BE UTILIZED AS NEEDED.
• PREPARE SURFACE PER SUPPLIERS RECOMMENDATIONS.
• FEATHER SURFACE TO ADJACENT FLOOR FINISH MATERIAL.
• INSTALL SPECIFIED FLOOR- LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT CONCRETE COMPOUND (INCLUDING PRIMER AND OTHER PRE - APPLICATION PREPARATION) IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDED REQUIREMENTS TO ACHIEVE A FLOOR FLATNESS NUMBER F(F) OF 32 AND A FLOOR LEVELNESS NUMBER F(L) OF 20.
2. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL REQUIRED TRANSITIONS BETWEEN DIFFERENT FLOORING MATERIALS.
3. FURNISH AND INSTALL VINYL WALL BASE AT NEW DRYWALL AREAS. INSTALL SEARS FURNISHED FOUR (4 ") INCH CARPET BASE AT CARPETED SALES AREAS AND AT NEW DRYWALL WALL AND
COLUMN ENCLOSURES.
4. REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
5. VERIFY FINAL FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS AND LAYOUT WITH SEARS FIELD PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATI ❑N OF ANY MATERIALS,
6. NEW TILE IN SALES AREAS TO MATCH EXISTING TILE, GROUT, AND PATTERN JOINTS, INSTALL TRANSITION EDGING AS REQUIRED.
SALES
DEMO CEILING PLAN LEG. /NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES
EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING (SAT) DEMOLITION: REMOVE
AREA OF CEILING AS INDICATED. REMOVE FULL SECTION OF ANY AFFECTED
CROSS TEE GRID. REMOVE MAIN TEE GRID PAST AFFECTED AREA AND TO
PROVIDE 4' -0" MINIMUM STAGGER BETWEEN ADJACENT MAIN GRID UNITS.
TERMINATE MAIN TEE GRID IN A MANNER APPROVED BY NEW CEILING
INSTALLER AND ARCHITECT.
2. LOCATIONS WHERE EXISTING FIXTURE WALLS OR CEILING TRANSITIONS ARE
REMOVED, REMOVE ALL DRYWALL, STUDS, BRACING, AND BAFFLE DROPS AS
REQUIRED TO ALLOW INSTALLATION OF NEW CEILING SYSTEM.
3. EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES ARE TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND
ARE TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION FROM DAMAGE. ANY DAMAGED
FIXTURE IS TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED. COORDINATE DEMOLITION
CEILING PLAN WITH NEW CEILING PLAN AND SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS.
4. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND CEILING DIFFUSERS IN CEILINGS TO BE DEMOLISHED
ARE TO BE CAREFULLY REMOVED AND STOCK PILED AT THE PROJECT SITE IN
A PROTECTED LOCATION DESIGNATED BY THE OWNER.
5. CEILINGS NOTED TO BE REMOVED INCLUDE ALL CEILING MATERIALS, SUPPORT
STRUCTURE, GRID, HANGER WIRE, AND ALL OTHER CONSTRUCTION
ASSOCIATED THEREWITH.
CEILING PLAN LEGEND /NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES
1. REPAIR /REPLACE CEILING ELEMENTS AT EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE (SAT) CEILING
ATTACHMENTS WHICH ARE REMOVED INCLUDING WALLS, SUSPENDED DRYWALL BAFFLES OR OTHER
ELEMENTS WHICH IN ANY WAY LEAVE OBSERVABLE DAMAGE OR MARKINGS TO TILE OR GRID 50
THAT THERE IS NO NOTICEABLE VARIATION TO SURROUNDING MATERIALS:
A. CROSS TEE GRID: REPLACE AFFECTED 4' -0" LONG CROSS TEE GRID ELEMENT TO
MATCH EXISTING.
B. MAIN TEE GRID: REPLACE DAMAGED SECTION OF MAIN TEE GRID AS RECOMMENDED BY
ORIGINAL GRID MANUFACTURER OR REPAIR HOLES AND PAINT TO MATCH AS APPROVED
BY SEARS PROJECT MANAGER.
2. ALL NEW CEILING AREAS ARE TO BE SUSPENDED AND BRACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT
DOCUMENTS AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING LIGHTING FIXTURES.
3. PAINT ALL NEW DRYWALL CEILINGS
4.
5.
6.
7.
CLEAN CEILING DIFFUSERS, SPEAKERS AND OTHER CEILING MOUNTED ITEMS TO REMAIN IN AREA
OF WORK ENCLOSURE.
INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL OF EXISTING CEILING PENETRATIONS IS TO BE COORDINATED WITH ALL
TRADES TO PROVIDE FINISHED CEILING SURFACE AT ALL LOCATIONS.
ALL AREAS WITH NO CEILINGS ARE TO BE SEPARATED FROM THE CEILING PLENUM AREA BY A
MINIMUM OF ONE LAYER OF 1/2" GYPSUM BOARD.
FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS ARE SHOWN AS EXISTING LOCATIONS AND ARE TO BE USED FOR
INFORMATION ONLY AND ARE TO BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR(S) ARE
RESPONSIBLE TO REMOVE, RELOCATE, REPLACE AND ADD NEW HEADS AS REQUIRED TO MEET
SPECIFICATIONS, FIRE AND LOCAL CODES. REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL FOR PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS.
8. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LIGHTING SCOPE OF WORK. LIGHT FIXTURES ARE TO BE
PROTECTED FROM DAMAGE AND DEBRIS AND DUST DURING CONSTRUCTION AND UNTIL SEARS
ACCEPTANCE.
9. REFER TO AND COORDINATE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION.
SALES
Iu
8' -10"
8 ' -O
1' -2
mqj
r�1
A2.0
v
A /A2.O FLAG NOTES
Al REMOVE EXISTING STRIP LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWING (SIG)
A2 MODIFY EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW
CEILING AND WALL LAYOUT (SIG)
A5 REMOVE /RELOCATE EXISTING RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: ELECTRICAL
DRAWINGS - PROVIDE CEILING TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AT PRIOR LIGHTING
FIXTURE LOCATIONS (SIG)
A
v
0
DEMO CEILING PLAN AT BRIDGE
O
x
X
X
0
EXISTING CEILING 11 -10 1
O
0
O
/2" AFF
0
r
LJ
E /A2.O FLAG NOTES
El REMOVE EXISTINS ACOUSTICAL SYSTEM CEILING AS REQUIRED TO CONSTRUCT
NEW DRYWALL MALL ENTRY SOFFIT (MEG)
E2 MODIFY EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW
CEILING AND WALL LAYOUT (Sc) I
E5 REMOVE /RELOCATE EXISTING RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: ELECTRICAL
DRAWINGS - PROVIDE CEILING TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AT PRIOR LIGHTING
FIXTURE LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED (MEG)
DEMO MALL ENTRY CEILING PLAN
SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-
SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-
r =�
r
MIME
6' -4/
4' -8
I oITT-
J 0
v
v
0
0
0
X
X
0
B1
EXISTING CEILING 1 1 -10 1 /2" AFF
0
0
0
NEW CEILING PLAN AT BRIDGE
a
a
v
a
4
NEW MALL ENTRY CEILING PLAN
ra
EXISTING
10 -0' A
0
CEILING
FF
B /A2.O FLAG NOTES
Ed SHADED AREA INDICATES NEW SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AREA TO
MATCH EXISTING - BRACE AS REQUIRED (Sc) I
152 NEW HVAC DIFFUSER LOCATIONS - RE: M.E. DRAWING (SIG)
55 NEV ELECTRICAL CEILING HEATERS - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (SIC)
B4 PROVIDE NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (SIG)
SCALE: 1 /8" - 1'-
F /A2.O FLAS NOTES
F NEW DROPPED MALL F.1\11 DRYWALL SOFFIT AT 10' -0 AFF (MEG)
F2 SLOT FOR NEW MALL ENTRY ROLLINS GRILL (MEG)
F5 NEW 24X24 PAINTED ACCESS DOOR (TWO LOCATIONS) LOCATE FOR MANUAL
GRAIN DRIVE AND FOR MOTOR ACCESS (MEC)
F4 SHADED AREA INDICATES NEV SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AREA TO
MATCH EXISTING - BRACE AS REQUIRED (MEG)
F5 PROVIDE NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (MEG)
0
x
SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'
I °
7
r
LJ
r
LJ
8
EXISTING STOCK ROOM
G /A2.O FLAS NOTES
GI REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURE WALL SYSTEM AND TURN OVER TO SEARS FOR RE -USE. REMOVE EXISTING DOOR.
REMOVE EXISTINS METAL STUD AND DRYWALL SYSTEM TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (SIG)
G2 REMOVE EXISTINS 6" CLAY TILE WALL AND METAL STUD WALL (SIG)
G3 EXISTING GMU SHAFT WALLS TO REMAIN
G4 EXISTINS FURRED DRYWALL AT GMU TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) AT
NEW OPENING AREA COORDINATE WORK WITH SEARS. REMOVE FURRING MEMBERS AS REQUIRED.
G5 REMOVE EXISTING 4" BRIGK AND S" REINFORCED MASONRY BACKUP. REMOVE BRICK FROM BELOW FLOOR
LEVEL AS INDICATED ON DRAWING UP TO BOTTOM OF LEDGER ANGLE ABOVE NEV' OPENING. REMOVE
SECTION OF INTERMEDIATE LEDGER ANGLE IN OPENINS. REMOVE GMU FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO
CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE AND REPAIR CONCRETE AS REQUIRED AT ATTACHMENTS AND REINFORCING
(MEG)
G6 AREA OF FLOOR TILE TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS (ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) - COORDINATE
WORK WITH SEARS.
C PREPARE EXISTING STOCK ROOM CONCRETE FLOOR FOR CARPET AND TILE FINISH. STOCK ROOM CONTENTS
AND SALES AREA F I XTUR I NG TO BE RELOCATED BY SEARS (SIG)
G8 REMOVE EXISTING CARPET IN PREPARATION FOR NEW AISLE TILE (SIG)
Gq EXISTING AISLE TILE TO REMAIN.
GIO PROTECT TWO EXISTINS DATA GABLE SLEEVES AND GABLE AND PREPARE FOR NEW ENLARGED COLUMN
ENCLOSURE (SIC)
DEMO FLOOR PLAN AT BRIDGE
LA
rzl
LJ
C 9
DEMO MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'
SALES
S /A2.0 FLAG NOTES
SI REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURE WALL SYSTEM AND TURN OVER TO SEARS FOR
RE -USE. REMOVE EXISTING METAL STUD AND DRYWALL SYSTEM TO CONCRETE
STRUCTURE ABOVE (SIG)
G2 REMOVE EXISTING 4" BRICK AND 5" REINFORCED MASONRY BACKUP. REMOVE
BRICK FROM BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AS INDICATED ON DRAWINS UP TO BOTTOM
OF LEDGER ANGLE ABOVE NEW OPENING. REMOVE SECTION OF INTERMEDIATE
LEDGER ANGLE IN OPENING. REMOVE GMU FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO
CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE AND REPAIR CONCRETE AS REQUIRED AT
ATTACHMENTS AND RE I NFORG I NS (MEG)
S3 REMOVE EXISTING CARPET IN PREPARATION FOR NEW AISLE TILE (SIG)
E4 EXISTING AISLE TILE TO REMAIN.
65 EXISTING FURRED DRYWALL AT GMU TO EE REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPECT
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL) AT NEW OPENING AREA --- COORDINATE WORK
WITH SEARS. REMOVE FURRING MEMBERS AS REQUIRED.
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-
TEMPORARY PROTECTION
WALL BY SIC
TEMPORARY P ,OTECTION
WALL BY SIC
LJ
r
LA
TA1R
a 11111111
••••••■■
••••••••
■ ■r - - ► ■■
■[ tM� ni•
■■►`ET■•
11111111
........
at
avisirad
1 m
'1.
•
A4.0
PROVIDE DOOR STOP (VIED
CPT -N
■■■ ■ ■i■■
E ' EMES ■■■E.!eee■eee ■e■ m
■■■■■■■■M■■■ ■■■■■■•■1
J
r ■ ■■ ■■■■11■ ■■■■■■■I■ ■■%_
I_, I■■■OI ■■■■■■■■i
MI I■ ■■■■ ■■■I ,
� i FOAM I■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■I l
i■■ ■III■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I■1:,n,
D 8 va • 11 1 1
A3.0
OH
' -10"
0
NEW FLOOR PLAN AT BRIDGE
LJ
2' -8
SALES
SALES
NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN
- 7-w 1 43 Z
D /A2.0 FLAG NOTES
D I NEW FIXTURE WALL FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SEARS.
D2 NEW BRACED METAL STUD DROP FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE AT FIXTURE WALL -
RE: DETAILQ /A4.O (5IG).
D5 NEW METAL STUD WALL AND DRYWALL - RE: DETAIL P /A4.0 (51
D4 NEV CARPET FURNISHED BY SEARS AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR AS
REQUIRED TO TIE INTO MATCHING EXISTINS CARFETINS (510).
D5 INSTALL NEW TILE AT AISLE (TILE ONLY FURNISHED BY SEARS) TO MATCH
EXISTING (SIG).
D6 EXISTING TILE AT AISLE TO REMAIN.
D 1 HANDICAPPED POWER ASSIST DOOR BUTTON (HARD WIRED) AT 56" AFF TO
CENTERLINE. SINGLE DOOR ON EXTREME WEST TO HAVE POWER ASSIST
OPERATOR. RE: M.E. DRAWING (MEG).
D8 EXTERIOR POWER ASSIST DOOR BUTTON (RADIO OPERATED) AND STAINLESS
STEEL POST. COORDINATE INSTALLATION ON MALL CONSTRUCTED BRIDGE
(MEG).
DG BRIDGE FROM PARKING GARAGE SECOND LEVEL BY MALL.
D10 MALL TO PROVIDE FOR FIRST FIVE FEET OF BRIDGE SURFACE TO SLOPE AT NO
MORE THAN 2% I N ANY DIRECTION
SCALE: 1 /8" = 1 ' -
MAI
POE
GI
1111111
1111111111
■■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■_•■ ■ ■■■■1i■■1i0■■■
I■■■■■■1■■■■I■CEM■■■ ■■ ■ ■■■
1111111111111111111111110 III
• ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■1■ ■■■ \ ■ ■■ ■■■ ■ ■ ■■■■■�i11� ■ ■■
111111111111111 111!!!!!�����!!
■iiiiii■■
•
■II_M■■■■
.■E■■■•
®
EM MEN.
■■I■■■■■ mi
■■■ M
0
N
•
0
H2
H2
1I ]
LJ
•
•
9
SALES
OH
H /A2.O FLAG NOTES
HI INSTALL NEW TILE AT AISLE (TILE ONLY FURNISHED BY SEARS) TO MATCH
EXISTING (510)
H2 EXISTINS TILE AT AISLE TO REMAIN.
H3 LOCATION OF KEYED SWITCH FOR MALL ENTRY ROLLING GRILL AT 42" AFF
(MEC)
H4 NEV MALL SECOND LEVEL AND ESCALATOR (NOTE THAT MALL SECOND LEVEL
FLOOR TRANSITIONS UP q.5" TO SEARS SECOND LEVEL FLOOR AT 2% MAXIMUM
SLOPE).
H5 LOCATION OF NEV' SEARS MALL ENTRY SIGN - SIGN FURNISHED AND INSTALLED
BY OTHERS - ELECTRICAL POWER BY (MEG) - NOTE THAT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
ROUSH -IN LOCATION 15 CRITICAL SINGE ACCESS BEHIND WALL WILL NOT BE
AVAILABLE - OBTAIN SIGNAGE ELECTRICAL TEMPLATE FROM SIGN SUPPLIER AND RECEIVED
INSTALL CONDUIT ROUGH -IN TO MATCH REQUIREMENTS FOR SIGN - SIGN BACKINOTY OF TUKWILA
(5/4" PLYWOOD) TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MALL
JAN 1 8 2008
P 1fv;11 CEN t ER
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0
(MEC) = WORK BY
MALL /ENTRY
CONTRACTOR
(SIC) - WORK BY
SEARS INTERIOR
CONTRACTOR
I tx
L1J Z
Z
L1J
FEE
U
2
O y
(0 1 2
Project Consultant:
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 5. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
Contact: Milt Lanser
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
5. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
Z
Z
W
U
Z
Q
cc
0
0
J
LL
11/07/2007
Issue: Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11/07/07
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A2.0
Sheet Number:
80237
Street Parkway
80237
PRICING /PERMIT
REVIEW
Description:
A2.0
O
THIRD LEVEL
ELEV. (63.58)
SECOND LEVEL
ELEV. (47.25)
THIRD LEVEL
ELEV. (63.5
SECOND LEVEL
ELEV. (47.25)
A
(
4 •.
NEW TILE FLOOR - RE: SHEET
A2.O FOR FLOOR PLAN
4
•1
NEW SECTION AT NEW EXTERIOR ENTRY
4
4 •'
LL
4,
DEMO SECTION AT NEW EXTERIOR ENTRY
SCALE: 1 /2" = V-0"
SCALE: 1 /2" = 1 ' -0"
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN
4" BRICK MASONRY TO BE
REMOVED AS INDICATED FROM
BELOW FLOOR UP TO BOTTOM OF
EXISTING BRICK LEDGE ANGLE (MEG)
BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRICK LEDGE
SUPPORT ANGLE
8" REINFORCED GMU TO BE
REMOVED FROM CONCRETE FLOOR
TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (MEG)
DRYWALL AT FURRING IS TO BE
REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPEGT
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL)
DRYWALL AND METAL STUD
BAFFLE DROP AND BRACING TO
BE REMOVED BACK TO
STRUCTURE (SIG)
FIXTURE WALL TO BE DISMANTLED
AND TURNED OVER TO OWNER
FOR REUSE (SIG)
EXISTING CEILING AT I0' -0 AFF
TO REMAIN
EXISTING GONGRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN
FIRST LEVEL WALL AND SOFFIT TO
REMAIN
NOTE: REFER TO PLAN FOR
OPENING DIMENSIONS
EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING
SYSTEM TO REMAIN - REMOVE
AS REQUIRE TO DEMOLISH WALL (SIG)
NEW INSULATED FROSTED OPAQUE
PANELS IN STOREFRONT FRAMING (MEG)
NEW 5 5/8 X16 GA STUD
(3625162 -55) AT 24" O.G. WITH
I6 GAGE TRACK TOP AND
BOTTOM. PROVIDE R- 13 BATT
INSULATION WITH RETAINER AND
DENS GLASS GOLD EXTERIOR
SHEATHING - SECURE TRACK TO
STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WITH
TWO 2" TAPCON SCREWS (MEG)
NEW DOUBLE 5 5/5"X 16 GA
STUD (3625162 -53) BRACE AT
48" D.G. SECURE TO VERTICAL
STUD AND ANGLE ABOVE WITH
FOUR NO 10 SCREWS. SECURE
TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE
WITH 2 "X2 "X16 GAGE XI' -O
ANGLE WITH SIX 2" TAPGON
SCREWS AT 2" D.G. (MEG)
NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING
I N I I .ANSOM (MEG)
NEV STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS (MEG)
NEW CEILING CONTINUATION OF
EXISTING CEILING - RE: A2.O FOR
FILING PLAN (SIG)
AL AL AA AA AL AL
a
NOTE: RE: SHEET A4.O FOR
STOREFRONT AND EXPANSION
JOINT DETAILS
. .4 •
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION BY MALL
THIRD LEVEL
ELEV. (63.55) • .
SECOND LEVEL
ELEV. (47.25)
EVEL
53.58)
• 44 4 O •
Q' 4 .
NEW P
4 • • 4 .
4i: 4.
4 . a
4 4
4.
•
a . •
4 • •� :4
A3.0
•
INFILL CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING (MEG)
INTER MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT AT 10' -0 AFF (MEG)
SEARS
EW TILE FLOOR - RE: SHEET A2.0 FOR FLOOR PLAN (SIC)
•
4
4
DEMO SECTION AT NEW MALL ENTRY
D NEW SECTION AT NEW MALL ENTRY
•• • :
•
4 •
SCALE: 1/2" = V-0"
-0"
SCALE: 1/2" = 1 ' -0"
N
SIN
�
O N
w
LEVEL
[7.25)
4" BRICK MASONRY TO BE
REMOVED AS INDICATED FROM
BELOW FLOOR UP TO BOTTOM OF
EXISTING BRICK LEDGE ANGLE (MEG)
BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRIGK LEDGE
SUPPORT ANGLE
8" REINFORCED GMU TO BE
REMOVED FROM CONCRETE FLOOR
TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (MEG)
DRYWALL AT FURRING IS TO BE
REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPEGT
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MA 1 ERIAL)
FIXTURE WALL TO BE DISMANTLED
AND TURNED OVER TO OWNER
FOR REUSE - REMOVE
REMAINDER OF DRYWALL AND
METAL STUD SYSTEM (MEG)
EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING
SYSTEM TO BE REMOVED FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LOWERED
DRYWALL SOFFIT (MEG)
EXISTING CEILING AT II' -10 ?"
AFF TO REMAIN
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN
FIRST LEVEL WALL, SOFFIT AND
GOLONADE TO REMAIN
NOTE: REFER TO PLAN FOR
OPENING DIMENSIONS
NEW ?" DRYWALL OVER 3 5/8 X 16 GA STUD (3625162 -53) AT 24" D.G. WITH 16 GAGE
TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM AT VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SIDES OF SOFFIT. SECURE STUDS TO
EAGHOTHER AT TRACK WITH AT LEAST TWO #10 SCREWS. SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT
EACH STUD WITH TWO 2" TAPCON SCREWS (MEG)
NEV'[ MALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION BY MALL
NEW 3 5/8 X16 GA STUD (3625162 -55) AT 24" D.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND
SECURED TO HORIZONTAL STUDS AT BOTTOM AS CLOSE TO GRILL ENCLOSURE AS POSSIBLE.
SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WITH TWO 2" TAPGON SCREWS (MEG)
NEW 3 5/8 "X 16 GA STUD (3625162 -55) BRACES AT 48" O.G. SECURE TO VERTICAL STUDS
TWO NO 10 SCREWS (MEG)
NEW 5/8" TYPE X DRYWALL (BOTH SIDES AS APPLICABLE) OVER 3 5/8 X 16 GA STUD
(3625162 -53) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM (ONE HOUR WALL
CONSTRUCTION). SECURE VERTICAL STUDS TO CONCRETE BEAM AT 12" O.G. WITH PCON
SGREWS - FURR AS REQUIRED - EXTEND TO BRICK ON EACH SIDE OF OPENING (MEG)
SOFFIT BY MALL TO MATCH SOFFIT AT SEARS SIDE OF EXPANSION JOINT
NEW MOTOR OPERATED ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILL WITH POLYGARBONATE CLEAR INSERTS -
PROVIDE KEY OPERA I ED SWITCH AND EMERGENCY MANUAL CHAIN OPERATION (MEG)
NEW GUIDE FOR ROLLING GRILL (MEG)
MALL
NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE BACKER BOARD FURNISHED (PURCHASE TILE FROM MALL OWNER)
AND INSTALLED UNDER THIS GON 1 kACT - MATCH MALL INSTALLED TILE PATTERN ACROSS
EXPANSION JOINT (MEG)
STONE TILE AND BACKING FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MALL - COORDINATE TO MATCH
PATTERN AT SEARS RETURN WALL
NEW EXPANSION JOINT COVER OVER JOINT BY MALL
N CARPET FLOORING BY MALL (NOTE FLOOR SLOPES DOWN AT 2% MAXIMUM TO MAIN MALL
FLOOR ELEVATION (1.5 ")
NOTE: RE: SHEET A4.0 FOR MALL ENTRY AND EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS
NEW MALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION BY MALL
\
EXISTING WALL, SOFFIT AND COLUMNS TO BE ENCLOSED BY MALL
CITY OF�T A
JAN 18 2008
F'Li1vli T CEN 1 ER
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
Cn
0
Project Consultant:
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
Contact: Milt Lanser
co
Z
O
0
W
J
1
Issue: Date:
REVIEW
Description:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A3.0
Sheet Number:
80237
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741 -3737
3
11/07/2007
PERMIT REVISIONS
rrw w w .r w w w
A3.0
DOOR SCHEDULE
DOOR
NO.
ROOM
NO.
DOORS
FRAMES
DETAILS
FEATURES
HARDWARE
GROUP
REMARKS
SIZE
ELEV
MAT
FIN /COL
MAT
FIN /COL
LABEL
GLAZING
LOUVER
101
—
22' -0" x 10' -0"
A
AL /P4
PF
AL
PF
A4 -0
-
--
-
1
R4
102
—
PR 3' -0" x 7' -0"
B
AL /GL
PF
AL
PF
A4 -0
-
LAM
-
2
R1, R3, R4
R1, R2, R3, R4
103
-
PR 3' -0" x 7' -O"
B
AL /GL
PF
AL
PF
A4 -0
-
LAM
—
2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A /
, / / / ,
1
A /
/ 1 1 / /
/,\
/ ./
/
i
c
\ \ \ \ \ \
N.
N.
N.
N.
S.
\ \ \ \ \ \
/ / / / /
\ \ \/
/ /
\ \ \/
/ /
NEW STONE FLOOR TILE (SIC)
. Q
Q
CONCRETE TO
A4.0
5"
MATCH FA I E OF BRICK
NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE BACKER
BOARD OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GAGE METAL
STUDS AT 24" 0.0. (MEC)
COLUMN DETAIL
4 -0"
FINISH
MALL ENTRY JAMB
NEW CARPET BY MALL
NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC)
WALL EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL -
RE: DETAIL B
STONE WALL TILE BY MALL
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT RECESSED COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
NEW GROUT FILL (MEC)
SEARS CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE SLAB EDGE
FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT
RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE PREPARATION
CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
REMOVE FIVE BRICKS BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AND
PROIVDE NEW REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTION (MEC)
#4 U -BAR AT 12" O.C.- DRILL AN EPDXY TOP AND
BOTTOM INTO EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM WITH
HILTI HY 150 INJECTION SYSTEM OR EQUAL - 8"
MINIMUM EMBEDMENT - INSTALL IN STRICT
ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS (MEC)
TWO #5 HORIZONTAL FOR LENGTH OF OPENING (MEC)
.::11116 1 111117W1
/ /A'
0 C/D
I z
A4.0
a
4
CONCRETE COLUMN
SCALE: 1 1 /2" = 1 '-0"
EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR HEAD
SCALE: 3" = 1'—
METAL CORNER BEAD (SIC)
NEW DOOR (MEC)
1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ON
1-5/8" X 25 GA. METAL STUDS
TO 6" ABOVE CLG. (SIC)
NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
EXISTING 3" FLOOR SLEEVE W/
DATA CABLES TO REMAIN
EXISTING 4" FLOOR SLEEVE W/
DATA CABLES TO REMAIN
METAL CORNER BEAD (SIC)
1/2" GYPSUM BOARD ON
1 -5/8" X 25 GA. METAL STUDS
TO 6" ABOVE CLG. (SIC)
CONCRE I E COLUMN
SCALE: 1" = 1'
EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
EXISTING METAL STUD AND FIXTURE
WALL TO REMAIN -
RECONSTRUCT/REPAIR END OF WALL AS
REQUIRED FOR TILE MALL ENTRY RETURN
WALL (MEC)
REFER TO DETAIL B FOR INFORMATION IN
THIS AREA
NEW DOUBLE 1 1 /2" X 20 GAGE METAL
STUDS ON EACH SIDE OF ROLLING GRILL
GUIDE (MEC)
NEW ROLLING GRILL GUIDE SECURED TO
CONCRETE COLUMN - PROVIDE SOLID
SHIMMING SYSTEM AND ATTACHMENT AS
RECOMMENDED BY ROLLING GRILL
MANUFACTURER (MEC)
STONE WALL TILE BY MALL
FACE OF TILE TO BE FLUSH WITH FACE OF
ROLLING GRILL GUIDE
CARPET FLOORING BY MALL
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY
MALL - RE: DETAIL A
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP
TO STRUCTURE WHERE THERE
IS NO CEILING
SEE REFLECTED CEILING
PLAN FOR CEILING TYPE
AND ELEVATION HEIGHT
POWER ACTUATED
FASTENERS @ 16"
ON CENTER
K
A4.0
5
B MALL ENTRY WALL
6, EXPANSION JOINT
EASED EDGE
TYPICAL
SECTION
IIIAIIIDIIIIIDI ®I IiID
QUIRK MITER
MALL ENTRY TILE CORNER
BUILDING STRUCTURE
EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP TO
STRUCTURE
SIC (TYPICAL)
CEILING ELEV.
3 5/8" x 20 GA METAL
STUDS @ 16" ON CENTER
1/2" OR 5/8" TYPE "X"
GYPSUM BOARD @ EACH FACE
RESILIENT BASE
WALL TYPE --- FLOOR TO CEILING
DIAGONAL BRACING AT 48" ON CENTER
N VERIFY CLEARANCES
SCALE: 1--1 /2" = 1 ' —0"
EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
REMOVE 4" BRICK TO PROVIDE NEW MALL
OPENING (MEC)
NEW FIRE SAFING (MEC)
NEW DOUBLE 6 "X20 GAGE METAL STUD (MEC)
WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND
RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
PREPARE WALL EDGE
FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT
RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE
PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE
BACKER BOARD (MEC)
STONE TILE BY MALL
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY
MALL - RE: DETAIL A
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
CARPET FLOORING BY MALL
SCALE: 3"
SCALE: 6" = 1 —0"
L 4X4X1/4 STOREFRONT SUPPORT WELD TOP
AND BOTTOM TO EACH STUD (MEC)
NEW DOUBLE STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING (MEC)
DRYWALL OVER WOOD BLOCKING AS
REQUIRED (MEC)
NEW CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING (SIC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY HEAD (LOW)
SCALE: 3" = 1'--0"
NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION,
T• L •►D 111' S IU IS SHEET (MEC)
NOTE: RE: SECTION B /A3.0 FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
EXTEND GYPSUM
BOARD UP TO
BOTTOM OF
STRUCTURE
1/2" GYPSUM BOARD
ON 3 5/8" METAL STUDS
AT 24" O.C. N TYPICAL
NA
ZA SIN
I
BOTTOM OF GYP BOARD
METAL CORNER
BEAD - TYPICAL
NEW PAINTED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT (MEC)
RE: DETAIL D FOR ROLLING GRILL OPENING (MEC)
A4.0
a
4
A4.0
IwumluImuuuuu!uu
SIC (TYPICAL)
MALL ENTRY CEILING
EXPANSION JOINT
4
a4.
A
/1 a
STUDS & BRACING
ATTACHED TO
STRUCTURE ABOVE
SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILING
CEILING
VARIES N RE: PLAN
SEARS FIXTURE WALL N FURNISHED
& INSTALLED BY SEARS
SCALE: 1 -1 /2" = 1' -0"
NEW 5/8" TYPE X DRYWALL OVER METAL STUDS
(ONE HOUR WALL CONSTRUCTION) (MEC)
PREPARE CEILING
EDGE FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT
RECEIVER BY MALL - COORDINATE
PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
CEILING EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND
RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
SOFFIT BY MALL TO MATCH SOFFIT AT SEARS
SIDE OF EXPANSION JOINT
NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC)
4
4 •
'a a
v• 4
STONE WALL TILE BY MALL
WALL EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL -
RE: DETAIL B
SCALE: 3" = 1
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM DOOR - RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
NEW ADAAG COMPLIANT ALUMINIUM THRESHOLD
SUPPLIED WITH STOREFRONT SYSTEM -- SET IN SEALANT
- SQUARE BACK EDGE TO ALIGN WITH TOP OF NEW
FLOOR TILE & CLEAR FROM EXP. JT. COVER (MEC)
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT RECESSED COVER AND
RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
PREPARE SLAB EDGE FOR
INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL
- COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
NEW GROUT FILL (MEC)
REMOVE FIVE BRICKS BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AND
PROIVDE NEW REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTION (MEC)
#4 U -BAR AT 12" O.C. --- DRILL AN EPDXY TOP AND BOTTOM
INTO EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM WITH HILTI HY 150
INJECTION SYSTEM OR EQUAL - 8" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT
- INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS (MEC)
TWO #5 HORIZONTAL FOR LENGTH OF OPENING (MEC)
FLASHING WITH CONCEALED FASTENER AND PERIMETER
SEAL - EXTEND FROM 1" BELOW NEW CONCRETE UP AND
UNDER EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER AND UNDER DOOR
THRESHOLD - AT EACH EDGE OF OPENING EXTEND
FLASHING UP BRICK EDGE 2" BEHIND STOREFRONT
FRAMING (MEC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY THRESHOLD/
EXPANSION JOINT SCALE: 3" = V-0"
EXISTING 4" BRICK MASONRY AND STEEL
LEDGER SUPPORT ANGLE TO REMAIN AT
TOP OF NEW OPENING
SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE:
ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE
THIS SHEET (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC)
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO
REMAIN
EXTERIOR ENTRY HEAD (HIGH)
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
R
COLUMN SUPPORT
COIL AREA
(NO HOOD REQUIRED)
ti
1
1
1
1
1
1 1/4"
D�
D COILING DOOR OPENING
ccy
RE: FLOOR PLAN D /A2.0 FOR OPENING WIDTH
ELEV. A ELEV. B
EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR ELEVATION,
EXTERIOR ENTRY JAMB
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
A4.0 / SCHEDULE, AND LEGEND SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0"
D07- 132
NEW MOTOR OPERATED ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILL
WITH POLYCARBONATE CLEAR INSERTS (MEC)
EXTEND DRYWALL UP THROUGH OPENING AND
WRAP BACK 4" MINIMUM AND FINISH
CORNERS (MEC)
EXTEND TILE TO TOP OF GRILL OPENING (MEC)
NEW GUIDE FOR ROLLING GRILL (MEC)
RE: DLIAIL C FOR EXPANSION JOINT
NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC)
SCALE: 3" = 1 ' -0"
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
NEW DOOR (MEC)
NEW 1 /2" DRYWALL OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GAGE
METAL STUDS - RE: P /A4.0 FOR WALL TYPE (SIC)
NEW THRESHOLD (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT DOOR FRAME (MEC)
EXISTING 8" REINFORCED MASONRY TO
REMAIN AT EDGE OF NEW OPENING
WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED (MEC)
EXISTING 4" BRICK MASONRY TO REMAIN AT
EDGE OF NEW OPENING
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM FRAME FLUSH
WITH BRICK TO TRANSITION TO OFFSET
STOREFRONT DOOR FRAME WITH FINISHED
EXPOSED EDGE AND FACE (MEC)
SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC)
PREPARE SLAB EDGE
AND BRICK WALL FOR INSTALLATION OF
EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL -
COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH
MALL (MEC)
WALL TO FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
(EXTENSION OF FLOOR TO FLOOR SYSTEM)
FLOOR TO FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
EXTERIOR ENTRY JAMB (HIGH)
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO
REMAIN
SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED
PANEL (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM - RE:
ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR
SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
NOTE: RE: DETAIL H FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
DOOR SCHEDULE LEGEND
MATERIAL & FINISHES
AL ALUMINUM
AL /GL ALUMINUM AND GLASS
PF PREFINISHED
TEMP TEMPERED GLASS
P4 POLY CARBONATE
LAM LAMINATED
REMARKS
R1 PROVIDE THRESHOLD
R2 POWER OPERATED DOOR WITH PUSH BUTTONS FOR
HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKW!L
JAN -1 82008
R5 r :NNil] C nIk
R3 PROVIDE SIGN AT DOOR TO READ (IBC 1008.1-8.3) "THIS
DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS"
R4 PROVIDED BY (MEC)
B = OPAQUE FROSTED INSULATED PANEL (MAPES MAPESPAN INSULATED PANEL
WITH EXTERIOR SKIN OF 1/4" HEAT STRENGTHENED SPANDREL GLASS WITH
CERAMIC FRIT ON THE #2 SURFACE — GLASS EQUALS 1/4" MATELUX
TEMPERED FROSTED GLASS BY OLD CASTLE GLASS)
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
zy,///f/0",/ "ti
2
1
Issue:
9407
R S" HA I EEJR.
STATE OF WASHINGTON
Project Consultant:
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
Contact: Milt Lanser
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
5. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
co
•74
W
11/07/2007
Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11-01-2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A4.0
Sheet Number:
REGISTERED
CHITECT
80237
Parkway
80237
RICING PERMIT
REVIEW
Description:
A4.0
Drawing Title:
XRR XRR XRR XRR
a
1. REMOVE (1 1) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (51C)
2. RE- INSTALL (5) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC)
3. TURN THE REMAINING (6) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS OVER TO THE SEARS PROJECT
MANAGER (SIC)
4. REMOVE (10) 4 FOOT SINGLE _AMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES AND TURN THEM OVER
TO THE SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. (SIC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY MECHANICAL/LIGHTING
1E7 - A
ADA POWER OPERATED
DOOR i . •LTS, 5
AMPS
0 0
••ii•••■
11111111
••1.1111
11111111
■ ■1■11 ■u1111
11111111
••••••••
1■11111•
11■■1111?
Ee1111ee1eeeEMEIEE111
•••u••il
1
1111111111111 �
1
�Mn■■[01 ■1 ■ ■1i k . z
arteliipi■ 'Ike FfN,',WMI
___
J
c! J
' -10
RF
9
CV
EXTERIOR ENTRY ELECTRICAL POWER
0 0 0
0 0 0
�� ELECTRICAL PLAN
XRR
1F 1
p u�.u il
—
0 0
FIRST/GROUND LEVEL
DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1 '-
NEW PLAN SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-
2#12, 1-#12G 3/4 "C.
(1) SPARE
20A.1 P.0 /B.IN
LE -2 AA, CCT.27
ELECT. ROOM 2A
1-
SEAF�S'
FIRST LFVFi
4, 1 1
O
SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"
EL
x
EMERGENCY
LIGHTIN G
CCTS
ii {+iffy
4, 31 MEC
Fla
C, EM31
LAY --IN CEILING kMEC)
SEE ARCHITECTURE DRAWINGS FOR
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
MOUNT PHOTO -CELL 6" ABOVE
EMS= EERIE El SEISM MEN= MS
4 1111111900M11 Mi 0e,/,{
i
5
NEW 12" ROUND 3-WAY BLOW CEILING
DIFFUSER 500 CFVI; MAKE NEW CONNECTION
TO BOTTOM OF EXISTING SUPPLY WITH
NEW - - - - 1 - 2 R Q:N:::....... - ::,X: -;k :,
1. RELOCATE (5) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS - EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUIT AS
2. ADD (6) NEW 2X2 RECESSED TYPE 'A' FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES; 9
MATCH EXISTING; 120 VOLT; BLAC< REVEAL (SIC)
3. ADD (1) NEW EXIT SIGN TO MATCH EXISTING - WIRE TO CONSTANT SECTION
xi
4. ADD (2) NEW TYPE 'C' LI ` `ES - EXTERIOR BESIDE BRIDGE DOORS; WINONA LIGHTING CAT. #
5740- WL -33 -D- 120 -OA -CP . (BONE WHI CUS •M PAINT Fl 15 TO ATCH 5 O'EFR•NT FINISH M C
•
i
•
EATERS - MARKEL # 482 -T -S - 2.0 KW, 208 VOLTS, SINGLE PHASE, RECESSED
CEILING HEATERS WITH BUILT IN THERMOSTAT AND DISCONNECT SWITCH; WHITE POWDER COAT FINISH. (SIC)
6. VERIFY AND PROVIDE AS REQUIRED -- EMERGENCY LIGHTING PER IBC 2006 FROM NEW EXTERIOR DOORS TO EXISTING MEANS
OF EGRESS ALONG MEANS OF EGRESS PATHWAY
111111111111111 11111111111
THE IT ED SECTION IN PANEL
r1
LA
0
II
11
11
11
34
11 111
■. IIU■........... •/U1111//
i 1l111'L1
nu �0������1
NUM
■ ■ir�■1 /11
■1�'
111111■
1■■ ■■1■
mminimmullE1
11 III 11111111111111
11 MOM 111•111111111111111111111111111111M•
roa
SEARS SIGN
CONTRACTOR
f
IAL
3#12, 1#12G, 3/4 "C., TO (2) SPARE
20A.1P.C/B'S PANEL 2LC; CCTS.
32,34 - PROVIDE NEW TWO CIRCUIT
TIME CLOCK 120 VOLTS, 24HR /7DAY
WITH ASTRONOMICAL IAL. STORE
OPENING TO STORE LOSING
CONTROLS TO ELECTRICAL ROOM 2C
(NEC)
J.B. ABOVE, LAY -IN o EILING
( FOR 5) (VIEC
8' -0" - 1' -0"
0
4,
ELECT ICAL
ROOM 1B
XISTING
FUSER
EX STING 14"X9"
PLY DUCT
LJ
22-8" �q
E
X
ILIN
EMI
31
(2) ELECTRICAL
HEATERS (5
TE #
NEW MECHANICAL /LIGHTING PLAN AT
NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN
M
/
EXITING 14'X
SUPPLY DUCT
29
29
29
7>
X
EXTERIOR ENTRY SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-
INDICATED. (SIC)
CELL; 3' PARABOLIC; 3 LAMP = BIAX 24" LONG TO
IN PANEL EM -1 (120 VOLTS) EMERGENCY LIGHTS
PROVIDE NC F EXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
, >rz:[2#12, 1 #12, G 1/2 "C. THROUGH HOLE
IN "EXTERIOR" WALL AND BACK ABOVE
LAY -IN CEILING (TYP. FOR 5). NOTE:
EXACT LOCATION OF ROUGH -IN POINT
IS CRITICAL AT SIGN COORDINATE
CLOSELY WITH SIGN SUPPLIER (MEC)
4' -0" HIGH SEARS SIGN 120 VOLTS
SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
FOR EXACT LOCATION
2#12, 1#120, 3/4 "C. (1) SPARE
20A.1P.C/B. PANEL 2LCC, CCT.15 (MEC)
1/2HP 120 VOLTS MOTORIZED GATE.
FLA =8.2 (MEC)
KEY OPERATED RAISE LOWER SWITCH
PROVIDED WITH MOTORIZED GATE
MOUNT 42" +/- AFF (MEC)
(SHED AND INSTALLED BY SIGN CONTRACTOR. ALL WIRING BY ELECTRICAL
SCALE: 1 /8" = 1 '
LIGHT BOX: 72 "X72 "X6 -3/4" 605 WATTS, 120 VOLTS (TYPICAL FOR 3) (MEC)
® HOMERUN: 2-#10, 1 - #10G 3/4 "C SPARE 20A.1P.C/B IN PANEL 1 LB
(ELECTRICAL ROOvA 1B), CCT. 29. TIME CLOCK 120v, 24 -HR, 7 -DAY WITH
ASTRONOMICAL DIAL STORE OPENING TO STORE CLOSING (MEC)
4 - #12, 1-#1 272,
3/4"C. (2) NE'V
1 5A.2P.0 /B
PANEL LP -2
CCT5. 36 -38;
'r0 -42 TO
ELECTRICA
'•O 2A I'1
LIGHTING
POWE
1. REMOVE AND RELOCATE (5) 2X2 RECESSED FLOURESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC)
2. REMOVE (7) 1X4 RECESSED FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS AND TURN OVER
TO SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. (MEC)
DEMOLITION SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
X
XRR
XR
R
XC
XO
XA
XM
DESCRIPTION
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO REMAIN
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED, RELOCATED AND JUNCTION BOX REMOVED OR CAPPED AS REQUIRED
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET RELOCATED (NEW LOCATION)
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED AND JUNCTION BOX CAPPED AS REQUIRED
NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OVER EXISTING OUTLET
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE ABANDONED
EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE MODIFIED
0
9
i
HCO LE
NE EXTE
*=
•
0
IOR
111
ul
J
X
111
SECOND LEVEL NEW ENTRIES ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
REGISTERED
HITECT
ELECTRICAL
4,
RO
0
M 2C
4,
0.
!1F
I®I
poT- LI 3 2
1. INSTALL (5) EXISTING RELOCATED (XR) 2X2 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC)
2. PROVIDE (7) NEW TYPE 'B' MALL ENTRANCE FIXTURES. TYPE '3' FIXTURE IS HALO
RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, 8" APERTURE, (2) LANP 26 WATT DTT, CATALOG NO
H787HP -9870C CLEAR SPECULAR REFLECTOR, 120 VOLTS, HIGH POWER FACTOR
BALLAST, 6 5/8" HIGH X 8 3/16" (MEC)
0
0
4,
J
•
0
CONNECT TO EXISTING
FLUORESCENT
WALL -WASH CIRCUITS
(MEC)
INSTALL I N MALL
SOFFIT COORDINATE
WITH MALL
CONTRACTOR (MEC)
4
J
LIGHTING
POWER
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
CITY O F TUK
JAN 18 2.008
PEHIVII1 CLN I ER
Project Consultant:
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
Contact: Milt Lanser
co
J
H
0_
1
Issue: Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11-01-2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: ME.1
Sheet Number:
Parkway
80237
Project Architect:
Robert Chcfee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741 —3737
11/07/2007
REVIEW
Description:
ME.1
T
Panel
2LA
c
k
t
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
r
p
Aft
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
200 amps 1 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse)
3 phase/ 4 wire
LOCATION
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Stock Room Lights
General Lighting
Janitor Room Receptacle
Exterior Entry Lighting
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
KVA
KVA
0.14
LOCATION
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet)
Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet)
Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet)
Spare
Spare
Stock Room Lighting
Stock Room Lighting
Stock Room Lighting
Stock Room Lighting
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
E Iectrical
Room
2A
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
c
k
t
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Panel
2LAA
C
k
t
#
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
1
1
20
20
20
120/208 volts
100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse)
3 phase/ 4 wire
LOCATION
Spare
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Spare
Exterior Entry - Power Assist Door
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare Circuit Column GG9
Spare Circuit Column GG9
Blank Space
KVA
KVA
LOCATION
0.75
Spare
POS System Receptacles
P os System Receptacles
Sales Receptacles - Idea Center
P O s System Receptacles
Column Receptacles m Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Receptacle - Passenger Elev - South
Column Receptacles - SW Storage
Column Receptacles - SW Storage
Column Receptacles - SW Storage
Batt Pack /Lighting - North Escalator
Blank Space
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
Blank Space
1.00 Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater
7.00
7.00 I Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater
1.00
Electrical
Room
2A
a
I
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
c
k
t
2
4
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Panel
ILB-2
c
k
t
#
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
100 amps 1 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse)
3 phase 1 wire
LOCATION
Light Boxes - Shoe Department
Light Boxes - Shoe Department
Exterior Light Boxes
Blank Space
Stock Room Lighting
Blank Space
Dice & Hall Lighting
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Sales
Blank Space
Spare
1.82
KVA I KVA
Restroom Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
LOCATION
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Blank Space
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Blank Space
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
Electrical
Room
1B
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Track Lighting
20
30
20
20
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
c
k
t
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
Panel
2LC
c
k
t
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
200 amps / 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse)
3 phase/ 4 wire
LOCATION
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Spare
Track Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Comice Lighting
Track Lighting Spare
Track Lighting Spare
Track Lighting Spare
Stock Lighting
Spare
Neon Lighting
Spare
KVA
KVA
1.20
1.20
LOCATION
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Spare
Mall Entry Sign
Mall Entry Sign
Spare
Neon Lighting - Christmas
Neon Lighting
Neon Lighting
Electrical
Room
2C
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Panel
2LCC
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
0
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
100 amps 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse)
3 phase 4 wire
LOCATION
Spare
Column Receptacles
Spare
POS System Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Mall Rolling Grill
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
POS System Receptacles
Stock/Funtronics Receptacles
Spare
Spare
Electrical Room Lighting
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
KVA
KVA
LOCATION
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Spare
Column Receptacles
Spare
Spare
Fitting Room Receptacles
Fitting Room Receptacles
POS System Receptacles
Spare
Spare
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Exit Alamois with 42
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Exit Alamis
Electrical
Room
2C
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
•
besT 1 13Z
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKVV1LA
JAN 8 2008
fat z
ct
Z cT)
ffit 0
WO 0 1 2
Project Consultant:
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741-3737
Contact: Milt Lanser
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
4582 5. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741-3737
LU
Issue: Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 12-10-2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
Sheet Number:
80237
ADDENDUM #1
ME.2
NEW BRIDGE FROM
PARKING GARAGE
I ' f
SEARS
EXISTING EAST ELEVATION
NEW EAST ELEVATION
EXISTING SOUTH ELEVATION
1 L
SEARS
WALL MOUNTED
LIGHTING FIXTURES N
RE: ELECTRICAL (MEC)
i
REMOVE PORTION OF
EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW
MALL ENTRY N RE: DETAILS
FOR SIZE AND EXTENT (MEC)
NEW SOUTH ELEVATION
S
L
LOCATE MID HEIGHT OF LIGHT FIXTURE AT MID
HEIGHT OF CLEAR TRANSOM ABOVE DOORS
4' —o" CENTERLINE OF FIXTURE TO EDGE OF FRAME
NEW BRIDGE BY MALL
1
NEW STORE FRONT ENTRY (MEC)
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
1
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' —O"
f
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
i
1
a
EXISTING LOCATION OF
BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT
ANGLE
EXISTING LOCATION OF
BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT
ANGLE
Is - - - -- 7.7
I N / I
I �N' 1
7 N I
a
N
L
I�iillllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll IIIIIIIIIIIIIII�IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIII
mum= SE mmommor OM
■��M��VEAWMffr ENEEP.MSTEP.Er.zl. -- iiiV r: T: = =.!= =r
r il aS ■1.1�Z�■I��.Ir1 AI rl� I I V =% /� ✓4.r-w•
i: �l rl' rruiniiiiliiurr ...........r:rrir:.G• •:I1ri.iiiiiiiiiiiiii
I_psi NIMMEMMMMMMMMMM ' � ' S " rril ii '
I =:. ._______________ _ "iitTii"_
---I -----------------_----
• �
— alrmaira.bMaMrn■r ■ IrrMeaiERigioiii�ss '3ifiireisiligenldiitieln .
Cm36i MALL .I®Rs110■alreAM1GiELFO iraO i �llfllriRB101a a�lrrw
tamem iigionis.wnl m iari;ilireci ara ini- A
.� nriuiiL7 mane I® zoid���ZHmmoanewri cro11iMfAl1==ammsia1®cascom Q........ immmw' -Rw mPfJm mm • mmRIIrT..l1
EXISTING BRICK FACADE
OVER CMU WITH CONCRETE
STRUCTURE
REMOVE PORTION OF EXTERIOR
WALL FOR NEW MALL ENTRY
RE: DETAILS FOR SIZE AND
EXTENT (MEC)
MALL ENTRY FACADE TILE
BY MALL
4' —O
PLAN
ME -1
NEW SEARS MALL ENTRY
S SI
N RE:
LECTRICAL
L INFO.
EXISTING BRICK
FACADE OVER CMU
WITH CONCRETE
STRUCTURE
■■ ■
►+ ary
^rrrr ■r►�
■■....rr
MEMI
GM.C-iC-iC-iC EgiiC -iG
II
......::
111r ■rrr■
rrrr■■■■
r■r■rrr■
■rrr ■rrr
MOOOMMOM
OOOMOOOM
irr■ ■rrr
rrrr =::a
MOMMEMEM
MEMOMEM
. ■ ■ t ;
■rrr_ rr
■ ■rl. rr
8'-10'
/
/
/ /
/ /
/
/ -
G* ILING
" ■. U.
.....r..
rrrr...^
.rrrr■..
...r ■..■
rrr ■ ■■ ■.
rr ■rrr ■r
-- . --
r..r...0
MEEME r.S'S3SCr-
A2_oAA2.0
FLOOR
RKING
�I II
.■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■........I� ■ ■ ■ = = ■■ rrrr ■ rrr ■ r �; = "����������Iri =jii:� i =.� -��i= 11111111
i
r:. ■ ■.r ■rrrrr ■ ■ ■ ■r.■ rrrr ■ ■ ■r ■ ■r ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■■■ ■■■ ■■■■■ ■lI
i aa
urrrrrrrrrr
. r ■ri .ou r
A.....■■■■rrrrrrrr■r■.ru■■■■..■■ ■■■.r ■r
MMMMM
■ ■ ■I. ■■
s.
rr■ ■rrrrrrrrrrrr�rrrrrrr rrrlr■■
■rrn.■...r "■ r■n — „j
rrrr■r.p a • .................rr. ■ .
EXISTING SEA
EXTERIOR ENTR
LEVEL BELON
MALL GOURTY'A
NEVI SECOND LEVEL
SEARS EXTERIOR
ENTRY
FIRE LANE
NO PARKING
SECOND LEVEL REFERENCE PLAN
SCALE: 1/16” = 1'
n+ns
REFER TO SHEET A2.1 FOR FLOOR DEMOLITON PLAN
REFER TO SHEET A2.2 FOR FLOOR ALTERATION PLAN
CEILING
L
\ NG
v1ALL PAR '< I N G GARAGE
SECOND LEVEL
FIRE LAN
i
%I/ I/4
i
V
ALL S EC O \ D
LEVEL
REVS1IIN N 1_
boT 9 3
NEV MALL ENTRY AT
1ST LEVEL BELOW
CITY OF
P
/ `
C
MAR 2 7 2008
PERMIT CENTER
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
Project Consultant:
Project Architect:
Robert Chofee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741 -3737
Z
W
U
W Z
ui CC O
wa
�
J J
W
� Cr
G
Z W
OX
W
w
ed
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11/01/2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A1.0
Sheet Number.
A1.0
.,.
4
01/28/2008
ALTERATION ISSUE
3
01/16/2008
PERMIT REVISIONS
2
11/19/2007
PRICING /PERMIT
1
11/07/2007
REVIEW
Issue:
Date:
Description:
NEW BRIDGE FROM
PARKING GARAGE
I ' f
SEARS
EXISTING EAST ELEVATION
NEW EAST ELEVATION
EXISTING SOUTH ELEVATION
1 L
SEARS
WALL MOUNTED
LIGHTING FIXTURES N
RE: ELECTRICAL (MEC)
i
REMOVE PORTION OF
EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW
MALL ENTRY N RE: DETAILS
FOR SIZE AND EXTENT (MEC)
NEW SOUTH ELEVATION
S
L
LOCATE MID HEIGHT OF LIGHT FIXTURE AT MID
HEIGHT OF CLEAR TRANSOM ABOVE DOORS
4' —o" CENTERLINE OF FIXTURE TO EDGE OF FRAME
NEW BRIDGE BY MALL
1
NEW STORE FRONT ENTRY (MEC)
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
1
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' —O"
f
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
i
1
a
EXISTING LOCATION OF
BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT
ANGLE
EXISTING LOCATION OF
BRICK LEDGE SUPPORT
ANGLE
Is - - - -- 7.7
I N / I
I �N' 1
7 N I
a
N
L
I�iillllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll IIIIIIIIIIIIIII�IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIII
mum= SE mmommor OM
■��M��VEAWMffr ENEEP.MSTEP.Er.zl. -- iiiV r: T: = =.!= =r
r il aS ■1.1�Z�■I��.Ir1 AI rl� I I V =% /� ✓4.r-w•
i: �l rl' rruiniiiiliiurr ...........r:rrir:.G• •:I1ri.iiiiiiiiiiiiii
I_psi NIMMEMMMMMMMMMM ' � ' S " rril ii '
I =:. ._______________ _ "iitTii"_
---I -----------------_----
• �
— alrmaira.bMaMrn■r ■ IrrMeaiERigioiii�ss '3ifiireisiligenldiitieln .
Cm36i MALL .I®Rs110■alreAM1GiELFO iraO i �llfllriRB101a a�lrrw
tamem iigionis.wnl m iari;ilireci ara ini- A
.� nriuiiL7 mane I® zoid���ZHmmoanewri cro11iMfAl1==ammsia1®cascom Q........ immmw' -Rw mPfJm mm • mmRIIrT..l1
EXISTING BRICK FACADE
OVER CMU WITH CONCRETE
STRUCTURE
REMOVE PORTION OF EXTERIOR
WALL FOR NEW MALL ENTRY
RE: DETAILS FOR SIZE AND
EXTENT (MEC)
MALL ENTRY FACADE TILE
BY MALL
4' —O
PLAN
ME -1
NEW SEARS MALL ENTRY
S SI
N RE:
LECTRICAL
L INFO.
EXISTING BRICK
FACADE OVER CMU
WITH CONCRETE
STRUCTURE
■■ ■
►+ ary
^rrrr ■r►�
■■....rr
MEMI
GM.C-iC-iC-iC EgiiC -iG
II
......::
111r ■rrr■
rrrr■■■■
r■r■rrr■
■rrr ■rrr
MOOOMMOM
OOOMOOOM
irr■ ■rrr
rrrr =::a
MOMMEMEM
MEMOMEM
. ■ ■ t ;
■rrr_ rr
■ ■rl. rr
8'-10'
/
/
/ /
/ /
/
/ -
G* ILING
" ■. U.
.....r..
rrrr...^
.rrrr■..
...r ■..■
rrr ■ ■■ ■.
rr ■rrr ■r
-- . --
r..r...0
MEEME r.S'S3SCr-
A2_oAA2.0
FLOOR
RKING
�I II
.■■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■........I� ■ ■ ■ = = ■■ rrrr ■ rrr ■ r �; = "����������Iri =jii:� i =.� -��i= 11111111
i
r:. ■ ■.r ■rrrrr ■ ■ ■ ■r.■ rrrr ■ ■ ■r ■ ■r ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■■■ ■■■ ■■■■■ ■lI
i aa
urrrrrrrrrr
. r ■ri .ou r
A.....■■■■rrrrrrrr■r■.ru■■■■..■■ ■■■.r ■r
MMMMM
■ ■ ■I. ■■
s.
rr■ ■rrrrrrrrrrrr�rrrrrrr rrrlr■■
■rrn.■...r "■ r■n — „j
rrrr■r.p a • .................rr. ■ .
EXISTING SEA
EXTERIOR ENTR
LEVEL BELON
MALL GOURTY'A
NEVI SECOND LEVEL
SEARS EXTERIOR
ENTRY
FIRE LANE
NO PARKING
SECOND LEVEL REFERENCE PLAN
SCALE: 1/16” = 1'
n+ns
REFER TO SHEET A2.1 FOR FLOOR DEMOLITON PLAN
REFER TO SHEET A2.2 FOR FLOOR ALTERATION PLAN
CEILING
L
\ NG
v1ALL PAR '< I N G GARAGE
SECOND LEVEL
FIRE LAN
i
%I/ I/4
i
V
ALL S EC O \ D
LEVEL
REVS1IIN N 1_
boT 9 3
NEV MALL ENTRY AT
1ST LEVEL BELOW
CITY OF
P
/ `
C
MAR 2 7 2008
PERMIT CENTER
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
Project Consultant:
Project Architect:
Robert Chofee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741 -3737
Z
W
U
W Z
ui CC O
wa
�
J J
W
� Cr
G
Z W
OX
W
w
ed
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11/01/2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A1.0
Sheet Number.
A1.0
CEILING LEGEND (DASHED TO BE REMOVED)
SYMBOLS (DEMOLITION) DESCRIPTION SYMBOLS (NEW)
nmu
LA
171 zi
LA L_L'
-+—Hi—F-
SECURITY CAMERA
CEILING MOUNTED EXIT SIGN
WALL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN
SPEAKER
SPRINKLERS
4'-0" STRIP LIGHT
10"X24" FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER
10"X48" FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER
2x2 W/(3) FLUORESCENT LAMPS
RECESSED CAN LIGHT
TRACK LIGHTING
WALL MOUNTED OUTSIDE LIGHT
CEILING DIFFUSER (SUPPLY AIR)
CEILING DIFFUSER (RETURN AIR)
24x24" ACCESS PANEL
SHADED AREA INDICATES AREA OF
CEILING WORK
2X2 ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE
GRID WORK (REFER TO
REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR
CEILING HEIGHTS)
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING WORK
— REFER TO CEILING PLAN
FOR HEIGHTS
%7CD [si cz]
[Z
z
El
0
I1
E1
12' 11 . 1 , 4'—s/ 4 "
EXISTING CEILING 1
44"
A/A2.O FLAG NOTES
Al REMOVE EXISTING STRIP LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWING (SIC)
A2 MODIFY' EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR NEN CEILING
AND WALL LAYOUT (SIC)
A3 REMOVE/RELOCATE EXISTING RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: ELECTRICAL
DRAWINGS - PROVIDE CEILING TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AT PRIOR LIGHTING
FIXTURE LOCATIONS (SIG)
A4 REMOVE EXISTING CEILING AND LIGHTING AT NEW STOCK. AREA (SIG)
AS REMOVE AND REPLACE CEILING GRID TILE IN THIS AREA TO MATCH SURROUNDING
GRID AND TILE PATTERNS (SIG)
DEMO CEILING PLAN AT BRIDGE
/2" AFF •
L
r-
- L
DEMO MALL ENTRY CEILING PLAN
DEt\'10L I T I ON CE L I NO FLAN LES. / NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES-
1, EXISTING SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING (SAT) DEMOLITION: REMOVE AREA OF
CEILING AS INDICATED. REMOVE FULL SECTION OF ANY AFFECTED GROSS TEE GRID
REMOVE MAIN TEE GRID PAST AFFECTED AREA AND TO PROVIDE 4 MINIMUM
STAGGER BETWEEN ADJAGENT MAIN GRID UNITS. TERMINATE MAIN TEE GRID IN A
MANNER APPROVED BY NEN CEILING INSTALLER AND ARCHITECT.
2. LOCATIONS WHERE EXISTING FIXTURE WALLS OR CEILING TRANSITIONS ARE REMOVED.
remove ALL DRYWALL STUDS, BRAGING, AND BAFFLE DROPS AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW
INSTALLATION OF NEW CEILING SYSTEM,
3. EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES ARE TO REMAIN UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND ARE TO BE
PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION FROM DAMAGE. ANY DAMAGED FIXTURE 15 TO BE
REMOVED AND REPLACED. COORDINATE DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN WITH NEW CEILING
PLAN AND SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWINGS.
4. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND CEILING DIFFUSERS IN CEILINGS TO BE DEMOLISHED ARE TO
BE CAREFULLY REMOVED AND STOCK PILED AT THE PROJECT SITE IN A PROTECTED
LOCATION DESIGNATED BY OMER.
5. CEILINGS NOTED TO BE REMOVED INCLUDE ALL CEILING MATERIALS, SUPPORT
STRUCTURE, GIRD, HANGER WIRE, AND ALL OTHER CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATED
THEREWITH.
CE L I NO FLAN LESENt7 / NOTES:
GENERAL NOTES:
I. REPAIR / REPLACE CEILING ELEMENTS AT EXISTING SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL TILE (SAT) CEILING ATTACHMENTS 1^11416H ARE REMOVED
INCLUDING WALLS, SUSPENDED DRYWALL BAFFLES, OR OTHER
ELEMENTS WHICH IN ANY WAY LEAVE OBSERBAf3LE DAMAGE OR
MAKINGS ON TILES OR GRID SO THAT THERE 15 NOT NOTICEABLE
VARIATION TO SURROUNDING MATERIALS:
A CR055 TEE GRID: REPLACE AFFECTED 4'-0" LONG CR055
TEE GRID ELEMENT TO MATCH EXISTING.
B. MAIN TEE GRID: REPLACE DAMAGED SECTION OF MAIN TEE
GRID AS RECOMMENDED BY ORIGINAL GRID MANUFACTURER
OR REPAIR HOLES AND PAINT TO MATCH AS APPROVED SY
SEARS PROJECT MANAGER.
2. ALL NEV CEILING AREAS ARE TO BE SUSPENDED AND BRACED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH PROJECT DOCUMENTS AND LOCAL CODE
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING LIGHTING FIXTURES,
3. PAINT ALL NEW DRYWALL CEILINGS.
4. GLEAN CEILING DIFFUSERS, SPEAKERS, AND OTHER CEILING
MOUNTED ITEMS TO REMAIN IN AREA OF WORK ENCLOSURE
5. INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL OF EXISTING CEILING PENETRATIONS
15 TO BE COORDINATED WITH ALL TRADES TO PROVIDE FINISHED
CEILING SURFACE AT ALL LOCATIONS.
6. ALL AREAS WITH NO CEILINGS ARE TO BE SEPARATED FROM THE
CEILING PLENUM AREA Sr' A MINIMUM OF ON LAYER OF 1/2"
GYPSUM BOARD.
FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS ARE SHOWN AS EXISTING LOCATIONS AND
ARE TO BE USED FOR INFORMATION ONLY AND ARE TO BE FIELD
VERIFIED E3Y CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR(S) ARE
RESPONSIBLE TO REMOVE, RELOCATE, REPLACE AND ADD NEN
HEADS AS REQUIRED TO MEET SPECIFICATION, FIRE AND LOCAL
CODES. REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL FOR PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS.
8. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LIGHTING SCOPE OF
NORK. LIGHT FIXTURES ARE TO BE PROTECTED FROM DAMAGE
AND DEBRIS AND DUST DURING CONSTRUCTION AND UNTIL SEARS
ACCEPTANCE.
GI. REFER TO AND COORDINATE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
Cr)
SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'
—
E/A2.0 FLAG NOTES
El REMOVE EXISTING ACOUSTICAL SYSTEM CEILING AS REQUIRED TO CONSTRUCT NEV
DRYWALL MALL ENTRY SOFFIT (MEG)
E2 MODIFY EXISTING FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPING AS REQUIRED FOR NEW CEILING
AND WALL LAYOUT (SIG)
E5 REMOVE/RELOCATE EXISTING RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: ELECTRICAL
DRAWINGS - PROVIDE CEILING TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AT PRIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE
LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED (MEG)
SCALE: 1 /8" = —
i Elign
=12
.:11111111111111111111111
11.1111"l1:1111111111
111111111111111111111F
0Tir
I.
15/A2.0 FLAG NOTES
El SHADED AREA WITH TILE PATTERN INDICATES NEN SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL
TILE CEILING AREA TO MATCH EXISTING - BRACE AS REQUIRED (SIG)
B2 NEN HVAG DIFFUSER LOCATIONS - RE: M.E. DRAWING (SIG)
133 NEW ELECTRICAL CEILING HEATERS - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (SIG)
54 PROVIDE NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (SIC)
7 7
NEW CEILING PLAN AT BRIDGE
EXISTING CEILING 11-10 1/2" AFF
c
x
LT]
NEW MALL ENTRY CEILING PLAN
SCALE: 1/8" = —
B.
F/A2.0 FLAG NO I tS
Fl NEW DROPPED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT AT 10 AFF (MEG)
F2 SLOT FOR NEW MALL ENTRY ROLLING &RILL (MEG)
F3 NEN 24X24 PAINTED ACCESS DOOR (The LOCATIONS) LOCATE FOR MANUAL CHAIN
DRIVE AND FOR MOTOR ACCESS (MEG)
F4 SHADED AREA INDICATES NEW SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AREA TO MATCH
EXISTING - BRACE AS REQUIRED (MEG)
F5 PROVIDE NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES - RE: M.E. DRAWINGS (MEG)
SCALE: 1 /8" = —
REFER TO SHEET A2.1
FOR DEMOLITON
FLOOR PLAN
AT BRIDGE AREA
DEMO FLOOR PLAN AT BRIDGE
SCALE: i/8" = —
REFER TO SHEET A2.1
FOR DEMOLITON
FLOOR PLAN
AT MALL ENTRANCE
DEMO MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN
SCALE: 1 /8" = —
REFER TO SHEET A2.2
FOR ALTERATION
FLOOR PLAN
AT BRIDGE AREA
NEW FLOOR PLAN AT BRIDGE
REFER TO SHEET A2.2
FOR ALTERATION
FLOOR PLAN
AT MALL ENTRANCE
32
REV JON N
•
NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN
SCALE: 1 /8" = —
RECE.I ED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 2 7 2008
PERMIT CENTER
SCALE: 1 /8"
(MEC) = WORK BY
MALL/ENTRY
CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY
SEARS INTERIOR
CONTRACTOR
Project Consultant:
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(3a3) 741-37.37
3
2
1
Issue:
Co
0-
(9
iii
0
0
0
Parkway
80237
01/16/2008
01/28/2008 INTERIOR ALTERATIONS
11/19/2007
11/07/2007
Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 1 1 /07/07
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A2.0
Sheet Number:
PERMIT REVISIONS
PRICING/PERMIT
REVIEW
Description:
A2.0
lo
0
THIRD LEVEL
ELEV. (63.58)
SECOND LEVEL
ELEV. (41.25)
DEMO SECTION AT NEW EXTERIOR ENTRY
A3.O
NEW TI LOOR - RE: SHEET
FOR FLOOR PLAN
NEW SECTION AT NEW EXTERIOR ENTRY
SCALE: 1 /2" = 1' -0"
NEW GEILING CONTINUATION OF
EXISTING CEILING - RE: A2.O
CEILING PLAN (SIG)
I1
VPIP
SCALE: 1 /2" = 1' -0"
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMA I N
4" BRI MASONRY TO BE
REMOVED AS I ND I GATED FROM
BELOW FLOOR UP TO BOTTOM OF
EXISTING BRICK LEDGE ANGLE (MEG)
BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRICK LEDGE
SUPPORT ANGLE
8" REINFORGED GMU TO BE REMOVED
FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO
CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (MEG)
DRYWALL AT FURRING IS TO BE
REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPECT
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL)
DRYWALL AND METAL STUD
BAFFLE DROP AND BRACING
TO BE REMOVED BACK TO
STRUGTURE (SI
FIXTURE WALL TO BE
DISMANTLED AND TURNED OVER
TO OWNER FOR REUSE (51
EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING
SYSTEM TO REMAIN - REMOVE AS
REQUIRE TO DEMOLISH WALL (SIC)
EXISTING CEILING AT 10' -0 AFF
TO REMA I N
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN N
FIRST LEVEL HALL AND SOFFIT
TO REMAIN
NOTE: REFER TO PLAN
FOR OPENING DIMENSIONS
NEW INSULATED FROSTED OPAQUE
PANELS IN STOREFRONT FRAMING (MEG)
NEW 3 5/8 X 16 GA STUD
(3625162 -53) AT 24" O.G. WITH
16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND
BOTTOM. PROVIDE R -13 BATT
INSULATION WITH RETAINER AND
DENS GLASS GOLD EXTERIOR
SHEATH I NG - SECURE TRACK TO
STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WITH
TWO 2" TAPCON SGREINS (MEG)
NEW DOUBLE 3 5/8 "X 16 GA
STUD (3625162 -55) BRACE AT
48" O.G. SECURE TO VERTICAL
STUD AND ANGLE ABOVE WITH
FOUR NO 10 SCREWS. SECURE
TO CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE
WITH 2 "X2 "X16 GAGE XI' -O
ANGLE WITH SIX 2" TAPCON
SCREWS AT 2" O.G. (MEG)
NEW INSULATED CLEAR
GLAZING I N TRANSOM (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS (MEG)
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION BY MALL
NOTE: RE: SHEET A4.0 FOR
STOREFRONT AND EXPANSION
JOINT DETAILS
• SECOND LEVEL
ELEV. (47.25)
EVEL
53.58)
LEVEL
NEW P
A3.0
DEMO SECTION AT NEW MALL ENTRY
NEW SECTION AT NEW MALL ENTRY
SCALE: 1 /2" = 1' -0"
SCALE: 1 /2" = 1' -0"
4" BRICK MASONRY TO BE
REMOVED AS INDICATED FROM
BELOW FLOOR UP TO BOTTOM OF
EXISTING BRICK LEDGE ANGLE (MEG)
BOTTOM OF EXISTING BRIGK LEDGE
SUPPORT ANGLE
8" REINFORCED GMU TO BE REMOVED
FROM CONCRETE FLOOR TO
CONCRETE STRUCTURE ABOVE (MEG)
DRYWALL AT FURRING IS TO BE
REMOVED BY OTHERS (SUSPECT
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL)
FIXTURE WALL TO BE DISMANTLED
AND TURNED OVER TO OWNER
FOR REUSE - REMOVE
REMAINDER OF DRYWALL AND
METAL STUD SYSTEM (MEG)
EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE
CEILING SYSTEM TO BE REMOVED
FOR CONSTRUCTION OF NEW
LOWERED DRYWALL SOFFIT NEC)
EXISTING CEILING AT II' -IO I/2"
AFF TO REMAIN
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE
TO REMAIN
FIRST LEVEL WALL, SOFFIT
AND GOLONAI7E TO REMAIN
NOTE: REFER TO PLAN FOR
OPENING DIMENSIONS
INFILL CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING (MEG)
INTED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT AT 10' -0 AFF (MEG)
NEV MALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION BY
MALL
NEW GUIDE FOR ROLLING GRILL
NEC)
MALL
NEW Ye DRYWALL OVER 3 5/8 X 16 GA STUD (3625162 -53) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK
TOP AND BOTTOM AT VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SIDES OF SOFFIT. SECURE STUDS TO
EAGHOTHER AT TRACK WITH AT LEAST TWO #IO SCREWS. SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT
EACH STUD WITH TWO 2" TAPCON SCREWS (MEG)
NEW 3 5/8 X 16 GA STUD (5625162 -53) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 SAGE TRACK TOP AND
SECURED TO HORIZONTAL STUDS AT BOTTOM AS CLOSE TO GRILL ENCLOSURE AS POSSIBLE.
SECURE TRACK TO STRUCTURE AT EACH STUD WITH TWO 2" TAPGON SCREWS (MEG)
NEW 5 5/8 "X 16 GA STUD (3625162 -55) BRACES AT 48" O.G. SECURE TO VERTICAL
STUDS TWO NO 10 SCREWS (MEG)
NEW 5/8" TYPE X DRYWALL (BOTH SIDES AS APPLICABLE) OVER 5 5/8 X 16 GA STUD
(5625162 -53) AT 24" O.G. WITH 16 GAGE TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM (ONE HOUR WALL
CONSTRUCTION). SEGURE VERTICAL STUDS TO CONCRETE BEAM AT 12" O.C. WI TH 2" TAPCON
SCREWS - FURR AS REQUIRED - EXTEND TO BRICK ON EACH SIDE OF OPENING (MEG)
SOFFIT BY MALL TO MATGH SOFFIT AT SEARS SIDE OF EXPANSION JOINT
NEW MOTOR OPERATED ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILL WITH POLYGARBONATE CLEAR INSERTS -
PROVIDE KEY OPERATED SWITCH AND EMERGENCY MANUAL CHAIN OPERATION (MEG)
NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE BACKER BOARD FURNISHED (PURCHASE TILE FROM MALL OWNER)
AND INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT - MATCH MALL INSTALLED TILE PAl I tRN ACROSS
EXPANSION JOINT (MEG)
STONE TILE AND BACKING FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MALL - COORD INATE TO MATCH
PATTERN AT SEARS RETURN WALL
NEW EXPANSION JOINT COVER OVER JOINT BY
MALL
NOTE: RE: SHEET A4.0 FOR MALL ENTRY AND EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS
NEW MALL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION BY MALL
EXISTING WALL, SOFFIT \AND COLUMNS TO BE ENCLOSED BY
MALL
RED FOR
�
COM COMP
APPROVE
CARPET FLOORING BY MALL (NOTE FLOOR SLOPES DOWN AT 2% MAXIMUM TO MAIN MALL
FLOOR ELEVATION (9.5 ")
flE\ISi
b0*
ISE
N
CITY RECEIVED A ILA
MAR 2 7 2008
PERMIT CENTER
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
ROBERT S. CHAFEE JR.
STATE OF WASHINGTON
cc W �
F z
Z
a
U
fflAN o
w 0 ,2
2
Project Architect:
Robed Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741 -3737
Project Consultant:
2
1
Issue:
1/16 2008
11/19/2007
11/07/2007
Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 1 1 -01 -2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A3.0
Sheet Number:
PER REVISIO
PRICING /PERMIT
REVIEW
Description:
A3.0
DOOR SCHEDULE
DOOR
NO.
ROOM
NO.
DOORS
FRAMES
DETAILS
FEATURES
HARDWARE
GROUP
REMARKS
SIZE
ELEV
MAT
FIN /COL
MAT
FIN /COL
LABEL
GLAZING
LOUVER
101
—
22' -0" x 10' -0"
A
AL /P4
PF
AL
PF
PF
A4 -0
—
—
—
1
R4
102
—
PR 3' —O" x 7' -0"
B
AL /GL
PF
AL
A4 -0
—
LAM
—
2
R1, R3, R4
103
--
PR 3' -0" x T-0"
B
AL /GL
PF
AL
PF
A4 -0
—
LAM
—
2
R1, R2, R3, R4
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
.,
•
J.
�'
A /
i i i i
i
�;
.
:�'
\
A
/ i i i
i
f /
/ / 1
, -'
.
♦
"
.
N.
\
"
.
p
p i
i i i
i i
v
\
i
NEW STONE FLOOR TILE (SIC)
CONCRETE
J
A4.y
TO
5"
MATCH FA I E OF BRICK
In WE
/ g .
A
A4.0
o_
0
NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE BACKER
BOARD OVER 3 5/8" X 20 GAGE METAL
STUDS AT 24" O.C. (MEC)
4 —O"
FINISH
MALL ENTRY JAMB
COLUMN DETAIL
NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC)
WALL EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY MALL —
RE: DETAIL B
STONE WALL TILE BY MALL
NEW CARPET BY MALL
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT RECESSED COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
NEW GROUT FILL (MEC)
SEARS CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE SLAB EDGE
FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT
RECEIVER BY MALL — COORDINATE PREPARATION
CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
REMOVE FIVE BRICKS BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AND
PROIVDE NEW REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTION (MEC)
#4 U —BAR AT 12" O.C.— DRILL AN EPDXY TOP AND
BOTTOM INTO EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM WITH
HILTI HY 150 INJECTION SYSTEM OR EQUAL — 8"
MINIMUM EMBEDMENT — INSTALL IN STRICT
ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS (MEC)
TWO #5 HORIZONTAL FOR LENGTH OF OPENING (MEC)
SCALE: 1 1 /2" = 1
Pf
NEW DOOR (MEC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR HEAD
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
SCALE: 1" = 1' -0"
EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
EXISTING METAL STUD AND FIXTURE
WALL TO REMAIN —
RECONSTRUCT/REPAIR END OF WALL AS
REQUIRED FOR TILE MALL ENTRY RETURN
WALL (MEC)
REFER TO DETAIL B FOR INFORMATION IN
THIS AREA
NEW DOUBLE 1 -5/8" X 20 GAGE METAL
STUDS ON EACH SIDE OF ROLLING GRILL
GUIDE (MEC)
NEW ROLLING GRILL GUIDE SECURED TO
CONCRETE COLUMN — PROVIDE SOLID
SHIMMING SYSTEM AND ATTACHMENT AS
RECOMMENDED BY ROLLING GRILL
MANUFACTURER (MEC)
STONE WALL TILE BY MALL
FACE OF TILE TO BE FLUSH WITH FACE OF
ROLLING GRILL GUIDE
CARPET FLOORING BY MALL
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY
MALL — RE: DETAIL A
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM — RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
A4.0
A
Ear 4
AK 4,
ACV
•
POWER ACTUATED
FASTENERS @ 16"
ON CENTER
K
A4.0
EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP
TO STRUCTURE WHERE THERE
IS NO CEILING
SEE REFLECTED CEILING
PLAN FOR CEILING TYPE
AND ELEVATION HEIGHT
EASED EDGE
TYPICAL
SECTION
F MALL ENTRY TILE CORNER
V p in
r
I I
3"
=1=1L111:11:011=ILIM
QUIRK MITER
NEW STONE TILE OVER TILE
BACKER BOARD (MEC)
BUILDING STRUCTURE
DIAGONAL BRACING AT 48" ON CENTER
N VERIFY CLEARANCES
EXTEND GYPSUM BOARD UP TO
STRUCTURE
CEILING ELEV.
3 5/8" x 20 GA METAL
STUDS @ 16" ON CENTER
1/2" OR 5/8" TYPE "X"
GYPSUM BOARD @ EACH FACE
RESILIENT BASE
SIC (TYPICAL)
WALL TYPE — FLOOR TO CEILING
SCALE: 1 -1 /2" = 1' —O"
EXISTING CONCRETE COLUMN
REMOVE 4" BRICK TO PROVIDE NEW MALL
OPENING (MEC)
NEW FIRE SAFING (MEC)
NEW DOUBLE 6 "X20 GAGE METAL STUD (MEC)
WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVER AND
RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
PREPARE WALL EDGE
FOR INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT
RECEIVER BY MALL — COORDINATE
PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
STONE TILE BY MALL
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY
MALL — RE: DETAIL A
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
CARPET FLOORING BY MALL
SCALE: 6" = 1 ' —
NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC)
L 4X4X1/4 STOREFRONT SUPPORT N WELD TOP
AND BOTTOM TO EACH STUD (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM — RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
SEALANT JOINT AS REQUIRED (MEC)
NEW DOUBLE STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW INSULATED CLEAR GLAZING (MEC)
DRYWALL OVER WOOD BLOCKING AS
REQUIRED (MEC)
NEW CEILING TO MATCH EXISTING (SIC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY HEAD (LOW)
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
NOTE: RE: SECTION B /A3.0 FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
EXTEND GYPSUM
BOARD UP TO
BOTTOM OF
STRUCTURE
1/2" GYPSUM BOARD
ON 3 5/8" METAL STUDS
AT 24" O.C. ' TYPICAL
BOTTOM OF GYP BOARD
METAL CORNER
BEAD N TYPICAL
NEW PAINTED MALL ENTRY DRYWALL SOFFIT (MEC)
RE: DETAIL 0 FOR ROLLING GRILL OPENING (MEC)
A4.0
L
A4.�
SIC (TYPICAL)
4
MALL ENTRY CEILING
EXPANSION JOINT
L!"
a.
A n
:1
..•‘■
C. q
NEW 5/8" TYPE X DRYWALL OVER METAL
STUDS (ONE HOUR WALL CONSTRUCTION)
(MEC)
PREPARE CEILING EDGE FOR INSTALLATION
OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL
N COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY
WITH MALL (MEC)
CEILING EXPANSION JOINT COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY
MALL
SOFFIT BY MALL TO MATCH SOFFIT AT
SEARS SIDE OF EXPANSION JOINT
NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC)
STONE WALL TILE BY MALL
WALL EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER BY
MALL N RE: DETAIL B
SCALE: 3" = 1 '--
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM DOOR — RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
NEW ADAAG COMPLIANT ALUMINIUM THRESHOLD
SUPPLIED WITH STOREFRONT SYSTEM — SET IN SEALANT
— SQUARE BACK EDGE TO ALIGN WITH TOP OF NEW
FLOOR TILE & CLEAR FROM EXP. JT. COVER (MEC)
FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT RECESSED COVER AND
RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
NEW GROUT FILL (MEC)
PREPARE SLAB EDGE FOR
INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL
COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH MALL (MEC)
REMOVE FIVE BRICKS BELOW FLOOR LEVEL AND
PROIVDE NEW REINFORCED CONCRETE SECTION (MEC)
#4 U--BAR AT 12" 0.C.- DRILL AN EPDXY TOP AND BOTTOM
INTO EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM WITH HILTI HY 150
INJECTION SYSTEM OR EQUAL - 8" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT
- INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS (MEC)
TWO #5 HORIZONTAL FOR LENGTH OF OPENING (MEC)
FLASHING WITH CONCEALED FASTENER AND PERIMETER
SEAL - EXTEND FROM 1" BELOW NEW CONCRETE UP AND
UNDER EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER AND UNDER DOOR
THRESHOLD - AT EACH EDGE OF OPENING EXTEND
FLASHING UP BRICK EDGE 2" BEHIND STOREFRONT
FRAMING (MEC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY THRESHOLD/
EXPANSION JOINT SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
EXISTING 4" BRICK MASONRY AND STEEL
LEDGER SUPPORT ANGLE TO REMAIN AT
TOP OF NEW OPENING
SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM — RE:
ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE
THIS SHEET (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED PANEL (MEC)
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO
REMAIN
EXTERIOR ENTRY HEAD (HIGH)
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
STUDS & BRACING
ATTACHED TO
STRUCTURE ABOVE
SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILING
CEILING
VARIES N RE: PLAN
I SEARS FIXTURE WALL ' FURNISHED OR
REUSED BY SEARS & INSTALLED BY
SEARS INTERIOR CONRACTOR (SIC).
COLUMN SUPPORT
COIL AREA
(NO HOOD REQUIRED)
ELEV. A
a0
D COILING DOOR OPENING
A4.0
RE: FLOOR PLAN A /A2.2 FOR OPENING WIDTH
NEW 1 /Z" DRYWALL OVER 1 5/8" X 20 GAGE
METAL STUD FURRING — RE: P /A4.O FOR WALL
TYPE (SIC)
v
ELEV. B
EXTERIOR ENTRY DOOR ELEVATION,
zi‹
SCHEDULE, AND LEGEND SCALE: 1/4" = 1'—
EXTERIOR ENTRY JAMB
SCALE: 3" = 1
A = CLEAR INSULATED GLAZING
B = OPAQUE FROSTED INSULATED PANEL
WITH EXTERIOR SKIN OF 1/4" HEAT
CERAMIC FRIT ON THE #2 SURFACE
TEMPERED FROSTED GLASS BY OLD
NEW MOTOR OPERATED ROLLING ALUMINUM GRILL
WITH POLYCARBONATE CLEAR INSERTS (MEC)
EXTEND DRYWALL UP THROUGH OPENING AND
WRAP BACK 4" MINIMUM AND FINISH
CORNERS (MEC)
EXTEND TILE TO TOP OF GRILL OPENING (MEC)
NEW GUIDE FOR ROLLING GRILL (MEC)
RE: DETAIL C FOR EXPANSION JOINT
NEW STONE WALL TILE (MEC)
SCALE: 3" = 1 ' --0"
NEW STONE TILE FLOORING (SIC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM — RE: ELEVATION,
DETAILS AND DOOR SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
N HRESHOLD (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT DOOR FRAME (MEC)
EXISTING 8" REINFORCED MASONRY TO
REMAIN AT EDGE OF NEW OPENING
WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED (MEC)
EXISTING 4" BRICK MASONRY TO REMAIN AT
EDGE OF NEW OPENING
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM FRAME FLUSH
WITH BRICK TO TRANSITION TO OFFSET
STOREFRONT DOOR FRAME WITH FINISHED
EXPOSED EDGE AND FACE (MEC)
SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC)
PREPARE SLAB EDGE
AND BRICK WALL FOR INSTALLATION OF
EXPANSION JOINT RECEIVER BY MALL —
COORDINATE PREPARATION CLOSELY WITH
MALL (MEC)
WALL TO FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
(EXTENSION OF FLOOR TO FLOOR SYSTEM)
FLOOR TO FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER
AND RECEIVERS (BOTH SIDES) BY MALL
REVIEWE FOR C \
CODE Po
1? a as
ILO D $1.7
EXTERIOR ENTRY JAMB (HIGH)
SCALE: 3" = 1' -0"
EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE TO
REMAIN
SHIM AND SEALANT (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC)
NEW OPAQUE FROSTED GLAZED
PANEL (MEC)
NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM N
RE: ELEVATION, DETAILS AND DOOR
SCHEDULE THIS SHEET (MEC)
NOTE: RE: DETAIL H FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
DOOR SCHEDULE LEGEND
MATERIAL & FINISHES
AL
AL /GL
PF
TEMP
P4
LAM
ALUMINUM
ALUMINUM AND GLASS
PREFINISHED
TEMPERED GLASS
POLY CARBONATE
LAMINATED
REMARKS
R1 PROVIDE THRESHOLD
R2 POWER OPERATED DOOR WITH PUSH BUTTONS FOR
HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY
R3 PROVIDE SIGN AT DOOR TO READ (IBC 1008.1.8.3) "THIS
DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS"
R4 PROVIDED BY (MEC)
R5
RECEI`,/ ED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 272008
PERMIT CENTER
(MAPES MAPESPAN INSULATED PANEL
STRENGTHENED SPANDREL GLASS WITH
GLASS EQUALS 1/4" MATELUX
CASTLE GLASS)
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
X07 -?i 3�
Project Consultant:
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street
Suite 1501
Denver, CO
(303) 741 -3737
4 01/28/2008 INTERIOR ALTERATIONS
11/19/2007
11/07/2007
3
2
1
Issue:
Parkway
80237
01/16/2008 REV I
PRICING /PERMIT
REVIEW
Date: Description:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11 -01 -2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: A4.0
Sheet Number
A4.0
Drawing Title:
>i sf' ?F$$$I:ti:$r :fif'i'S. �i:;$'• t$$$j:yi¢$;` {iii: $,> I
1. REMOVE (13) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC)
2. RE— INSTALL (5) FLUORESCENT 1X4 WALL WASHERS. (SIC)
3. TURN THE REMAINING (8) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS OVER TO THE SEARS PROJECT
MANAGER (SIC)
4. REMOVE (5) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES (SIC).
5. RE— INSTALL (4) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES (SIC).
6. TURN THE REMAINING (1) 4 FOOT SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP FIXTURES OVER TO
THE SEARS PROJECT MANAGER (SIC).
7. REMOVE TWO RETURN AIR REGISTERS AS PART OF DEMOLITION PREPARATION FOR NEW
STOCK ROOM AND TURN OVER TO SEARS PROJECT MANAGER (SIC).
(7\\ EXTERIOR ENTRY MECHANICAL /LIGHTING
ME.1 DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1 '—
■ ••••■■11
••••••••
1111■■■■
AIIIIIIIIIIII •1111••1111••
■ ■■ ■111
IIIEENIEEE
- L II F ...mom
11111111
■■ Inme■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
^ ■`IIl ■■■■ ■■■■ ■r ”_
Pv■I
!MI
ADA POWER OPERATED
DOOR 120 VOLTS, 5
AMPS (MEC)
EXTERIOR ENTRY ELECTRICAL POWER
NEW PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1 ' —
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
RF
- —
ELECTRICAL PLAN
FIRST/GROUND LEVEL
$
2 #12, 1—#12G 3/4 "C.
(1) SPARE
20A.1 P.0 /B.IN
LP -2 AA, CCT.27
ELECT ROOM 2A (MEC)
*EA a
j I FIRST LEV
a
E�
SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
1. RELOCATE (5) FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS -- EXTEND EXISTING CIRCUIT AS INDICATED. (SIC)
2. ADD (4) NEW 2X2 RECESSED TYPE 'A' FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES; 9 CELL; 3' PARABOLIC; 3 LAMP
v1ATCH EXISTING; 120 VOLT; BLACK REVEAL (SIC)
3. ADD (1) NEW EXIT SIGN TO vATCH EXISTING — WIRE TO CONSTANT SECTION IN PANEL EM -1 (120 VOLTS)
ARE ON THE SWITCHED SECTION IN PANEL EM -1 (120 VOLTS). (SIC)
ADD (2) NEW TYPE 'C' LIGHTING FIXTURES --- EXTERIOR BESIDE BRIDGE DOORS; WINONA LIGHTING CAT. #
5740— WL- 33 —D--- 120— OA —CPF; (BONE WHITE CUSTOM PAINT FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT FINISH)(MEC)
5. PROVIDE (2) NEW COMMERCIAL CEILING HEATERS — MARKEL #F3482 —T —S — 2.0 KW, 208 VOLTS, SINGLE
CEILING HEATERS WITH BUILT IN THERMOSTAT AND DISCONNECT SWITCH; WHITE POWDER COAT FINISH. (SIC)
6 VERIFY AND PROVIDE AS REQUIRED — EMERGENCY LIGHTING PER IBC 2006 FROM NEW EXTERIOR DOORS TO
OF EGRESS ALONG MEANS OF EGRESS PATHWAY (SIC).
LE
TING 1
PPLY DU
4
i
I I + ..'OpOP7P000.PP {..... A0 .0.?0070�.�.E........:•+.•::': •••,+
gp gu .: ;; ; Via::::• ?: c•.: < ? +•.•:::•:;:; x1 . ': ..•; ?.:;,.,.; .
"�'? ice'
< ? ?� � ter. «� >�:;.:... ...
I
' i LAY —IN CEILING MEC
NEW 12" ROUND .3—WAY BLOW CEILING
DIFFUSER 500 CFM; MAKE NEW CONNECTION (2) ELECTRICAL
TO BOTTOM OF E ISTING SUPPLY DUCT WITH HEATERS (SEE
\JEW.......1 ROI N., ,:X S: E, DUCT ( S. I .C.) . .......................... ATE 5 ) (SIC)
NEW MECHANICAL /LIGHTING PLAN AT
EXTERIOR ENTRY SCALE: 1/8" = 1
—
1
•
_
111111 1111■■■
111111111 II 1 111111111111/
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■U■■■■�
■■ ■■■■■ ■■■ ■1 =111 =1t :1:1:�I
II11II1 111■■■■■■■■■ I
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■■ ■►I■■
■ rn•••i••••
•■■■■1 ■ ■ ■■ ■ ■ ■■ ■•I ■I�I i ii ■■■ • ' •
■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■� ■ ■ ■.1112
1■■■■(I1FA
1EIf1J1■
■ ■i�1 /11■
r_1
roa
3#12, 1#12G, 3/4 "C. TO (2) SPARE
20A.1 P.0 /B'S PANEL 2LC; CCTS.
32,34 — PROVIDE NEW TWO CIRCUIT
TIME CLOCK 120 VO ` SS, 24HR /7DAY
WITH ASTRONOMICAL [ IAL. STORE
OPENING TO STORE LOSING
CONTROLS 10 ELECT ICAL ROOM 2C
(MEC)
J.B. ABOVE, LAY —IN CEILING
(TYP. FOR 5) (MEC)
1. SEARS SIGN FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SIGN CONTRACTOR. ALL WIRING BY ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR (MEC)
(7 b ' \ NEW MALL ENTRY FLOOR PLAN
ME.1
EL
Li
LL
CT IC11'IL
T
EMI
31
C, EM31
CAME
1W yew
C, EM31
29
29
29
LIGHT BOX: 72 "X72 "X6 -3/4" 605 WATTS, 120 VOLTS (TYPICAL FOR 3) (MEC)
® HOMERUN: 2—#10, 1—#10G 3/4 "C SPARE 20A.1P.C/B IN PANEL 1LB
(ELECTRICAL ROOVI 1B), CCT. 29. TIME CLOCK 120v, 24 —HR, 7 —DAY WITH
ASTRONOMICAL DIAL. STORE OPENING TO STORE CLOSING (MEC)
SCALE: 1/8" = 1
C�
E
B
SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS
MOUNT PHOTO —CELL 6" A
STOREFRONT FRAME (MEC
OVE
KEY OPERATED RAISE LOWER SWITCH
PROVIDED WITH MOTORIZED GATE
MOUNT 42" +/— AFF (MEC)
= BIAX 24" LONG TO
EMERGENCY LIGHTS
PHASE, RECESSED
EXISTING MEANS
PROVIDE MC 'CEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
2#12, 1#12, G 1/2"C. THROUGH HOLE
IN "EXTERIOR" WALL AND BACK ABOVE
LAY—IN CEILING (TYP. FOR 5). NOTE:
EXACT LOCATION OF ROUGH —IN POINT
IS CRITICAL AT SIGN — COORDINATE
CLOSELY WITH SIGN SUPPLIER (MEC)
4 -0" HIGH SEARS SIGN 120 VOLTS
SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
FOR EXACT LOCATION
2#12, 1#12G, 3/4 "C. (1) SPARE
20A.1 P.0 /B. PANEL 2LCC, CCT.15 (MEC)
1/2HP 120 VOLTS MOTORIZED GATE.
FLA =8.2 (MEC)
LIGHTIN
POWE
roa
0.97
L
DEMOLITION SYMBOLS
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
X EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO REMAIN
XRR EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED, RELOCATED AND JUNCTION BOX REMOVED OR CAPPED AS REQUIRED
XR EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET RELOCATED (NEW LOCATION)
R EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED
XC EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE REMOVED AND JUNCTION BOX CAPPED AS REQUIRED
XO NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OVER EXISTING OUTLET
XA EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE ABANDONED
XVI EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR OUTLET TO BE MODIFIED
° X R ® XRR
L L .J
1. REMOVE AND RELOCATE (5) 2X2 RECESSED FLOORESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC)
2. REMOVE (7) 1X4 RECESSED FLUORESCENT WALL WASHERS AND TURN OVER
TO SEARS PROJECT MANAGER. (MEC)
/
/ /
/ / /
/ /
/
/ / /
/ /
I-- - -
ELECTRIC L
1 39
IOR
S
L
II
/
/ /
AR
H 1 SECOND LEVEL NEW ENTRIES ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0"
R
*- ELECTR C
r
E1flSC
0"
COMB. POWE
POKE —THRU
MATCH BUILDI
(TYPICAL FOR
CONTRACTOR
XTEND CON
ASH WRAP
DOUBLE CAS
LOCATION AN
ONLY ONE FL
THIS LO CATI O
CONNECT TO EXISTING
FLUORESCENT
WALL —WASH CIRCUITS
(MEC)
7
INSTALL I N MALL
SOFFIT N COORDINATE
WITH MALL
CONTRACTOR (MEC)
1. INSTALL (5) EXISTING RELOCATED (XR) 2X2 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. (MEC)
2. PROVIDE (7) NEW TYPE 'B' MALL ENTRANCE FIXTURES. TYPE 'B' FIXTURE IS HALO
RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, 8" APERTURE, (2) LAMP 26 WATT DTT, CATALOG NO
H787HP -9870C CLEAR SPECULAR REFLECTOR, 120 VOLTS, HIGH POWER FACTOR
BALLAST, 6 5/8" HIGH X 8 3/16" (MEC)
II:IIIII
••rrrrr■
rrrrrrrr
EMME =MGM
— x,.nn --
rr•v..irli
,..r rrul. .
—y,ir �.u.lr H.
: i ■
il. r•..•• ••.r•....r ■
■
.....r
...r
.r
•
2 —#10 1—#10, G 3/
(1) 20A, 1P, C.B.
2LLC:2'3 (SIC)
N OTE: NEW VOI
AND DATA CAB
FURNISHED AND
INSTALLED BY
OTHERS
Jrrrrrrr.r..
• f
J.......VAMI
RUN ,CONDUIT ABOVE
LAY— N CEILING OF
. u r i. . I r r I w rrn r.�
Jrr / r' , r► I J ' l L�JJJr17rr!J�S!JLJCII'lrrr ! \R.9I1 ■■■.muLiL __��
rrrrrrrr rrrr■ rrr. rr■■ r•• ••••■■rr■■■ru■u■■■ru►u■■■r■■■■■ u•i i •, = = Tr = =m
d.r rrr r. r ■ LI IIIIIIIIIII:IIIIIIIIIII ..... I III IIII• .. f1.. , �ry n.rrr r�
.• I = II :I IIIIiI !IIIIII� :I ,�! _ I .. emu
■ li \■ 1 =41■ ■I; 0121111=
rrrrrrrr.rrrrrr.rr=rr.
INN EINEM ..... MOO
r.ru
171 J ►
.......ranr
- ± .r. U . .
...Ilr.rr
.rr
........
- U......
. ...U..
•
........
•r.....r
I ......
EMEMEMEE
.. ......
EMEMEMEM
........
..n= ±
...I$-
MEMEEME
LOW VOLTAGE
OOR BOX:
N3 STANDARD
3) OR
OPTION TO
IT THROU�
BINET AT
REGISTER
PROVIDE
DR BOX AT
(SIC).
LIGHTING
(MEC) = WORK BY MALL /ENTRY CONTRACTOR
(SIC) = WORK BY SEARS INTERIOR CONTRACTOR
CODE COMPLIANCE.\
OP ME_
�. APR - 3 Na
POWER
MI IN' Dig151
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 2 7 2008
PERMIT CENTER
3
0
9407
ROBERT S. CHAFEE JR.
STATE OF WASHINGTON
Project Consultant:
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
S. A. Miro, Inc.
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 80237
(303) 741-3737
01/16/2008
11/19/2007
11/07/2007
3
2
1
Issue:
Date:
REGISTERED
CHITECT
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 11-01-2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: ME.1
Sheet Number:
PERMIT REVISIO
PRICING /PERMIT
REVIEW
Description:
M E.1
Panel
2LA
C
k
t
1
3
5
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
200 amps 13 pole switch (150 amp fuse)
3 phase 14 wire
LOCATION
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Track Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Stock Room Lights
General Lighting
Janitor Room Receptacle
Exterior Entry Lighting
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
KVA
KVA
0.14
LOCATION
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting m West & Ctr
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West & Ctr
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet)
Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet)
Spare
Spare
Stock Room Lighting
Stock Room Lighting
Stock Room Lighting
Stock Room Lighting
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
Electrical
Room
2A
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Spare Circuit (over Janitor Closet)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C
k
t
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Panel
2LAA
C
k
t
#
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
1
1
20
20
1
20
1201208 volts
100 amps 13 pole switch (100 amp fuse)
3 phase 14 wire
LOCATION
Spare
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Spare
Exterior Entry - Power Assist Door
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare Circuit Column GG9
Spare Circuit Column GG9
Blank Space
KVA
KVA
0.75
•
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
LOCATION
POS System Receptacles
POS System Receptacles
Sales Receptacles - Idea Center
POS System Receptacles
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Column Receptacles - Southwest
Receptacle - Passenger Elev - South
Spare
Column Receptacles - SW Storage
Column Receptacles - SW Storage
Column Receptacles - SW Storage
Batt Pack /Lighting - North Escalator
Blank Space
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
Blank Space
Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater
Exterior Entry Ceiling Heater
Electrical
Room
2A
a
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
C
k
t
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Panel
ILB-2
C
k
t
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
T
r
P
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
100 amps 13 pole switch (100 amp fuse)
3 phase 14 wire
LOCATION
Light Boxes - Shoe Department
Light Boxes m Shoe Department
Exterior Light Boxes
Blank Space
Stock Room Lighting
Blank Space
Office & Hall Lighting
Restroom Lighting
Wall Washer Accent Lighting
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Sales
Blank Space
Spare
KVA I KVA
1.82
LOCATION
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Blank Space
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Blank Space
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Track Lighting
Spare
Spare
Blank Space
Electrical
Room
1B
r
p
20
20
20
20
20
20
30
20
20
P
0
e
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C
k
t
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
Panel
2LC
C
k
t
1
3
5
7
9
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
0
1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
200 amps / 3 pole switch (150 amp fuse)
LOCATION
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Track Lighting/Wall Washer Lighting
Spare
Track Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
'Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Cornice Lighting
Track Lighting Spare
Track Lighting Spare
Track Lighting Spare
Stock Lighting
Spare
Neon Lighting
Spare
KVA
KVA
1.20
1.20
LOCATION
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - West
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - Center
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Fluorescent 2x2 Lighting - East
Mall Entry Sign
Mall Entry Sign
Spare
Neon Lighting - Christmas
Neon Lighting
Neon Lighting
Electrical
Room
2C
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
Panel
2LCC
3
5
7
9
13
15
17
19
23
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
•
41
0
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
120/208 volts
100 amps / 3 pole switch (100 amp fuse)
LOCATION
Spare
Column Receptacles
Spare
POS System Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Mall Rolling Grill
Spare
Spare
(3) Cash Registers
Stock/Funtronics Receptacles
Spare
Spare
Electrical Room Lighting
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
KVA
KVA
0.98
0.90
LOCATION
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Spare
Column Receptacles
Spare
Spare
Fitting Room Receptacles
Fitting Room Receptacles
POS System Receptacles
Spare
Spare
Column Receptacles
Column Receptacles
Exit Alarms with 42
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Exit Alarms
Electrical
Room
2C
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
PtiF NN
b0"7 3 2,
RECEIVED
CITY OF TUKWILA
MAR 2 7 2008
PERMIT CENTER
9407 \ REGISTERED
\.... .... 1
ROBERT S. 4 AFEE JR.
STATE OF WASHINGTON
z
ct
z ?),
fgh 0 I
w CO 1 2
Project Consultant:
Project Architect:
Robert Chafee
4582 S. Ulster Street Parkway
Suite 1501
Denver, CO 802,37
(303) 741-3737
2
Issue:
Liu
a•
01/15/2008
12/11/2007
Date:
Scale: AS NOTED
Date: 12-10-2007
Design: MJL
Drawn: KJW
CADD File: ME.2
Sheet Number:
PERMIT REVISIONS
ADDENDUM #1
Description:
ME.2